Home

DAQSTATION DX200 User`s Manual

1. Parameters Menu Notes User key Action None Trigger Math Math rst M sample Messsage 1 Message 2 Message 3 Message4 Message5 Message 6 Message 7 Message 8 _ Snapshot Daylight Summer On Off o saving time Winter On lof Group set Group number 1 2 3 4 Fixed Group name GROUP 1 GROUP2 Character string CH set See section 7 6 for initial settings Trip line On Off On Position Numerical value Color Red Green Blue B violet Initial values are No 1 Red Brown Orange Y green Lightblue No 2 areen Nex Bite Violet Gray Lime Cyan Darkblue Yellow Lightgray Purple Color CH1 to CH30 Red Green Blue B violet See section 14 2 for initial settings Brown Orange Y green Lightblue Violet Gray Lime Cyan Darkblue Yellow Lightgray Purple Zone Lower ol to 95 Numerical value Upper 5 to 100 Graph Division 4 5 6 7 8 9 io 12 C10 Bar graph Normal Center Scale position 1o 2 a 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Off Partial On Off Expand Numerical value Boundary View Direction Horizon2 Background Trend line Trip line Grid Scroll Scale digit LCD Brightness Backlight saver On Off Saver time 1 min 2 min 5 min 10 min somn th Restore Key Math color CH31 to CH60 Red Green Blue B violet See section 14 2 for initial settings Brown Orange Y green Lightblue Violet Gray Lime Cyan Darkblue Yellow Lightgray Purple Math Zone Lower lol to 95
2. Memory Save Data Event Event Sample 500 ms 1s 125 ms 250 ms and 500 ms are rate 10s 30s for DX204 and DX208 only 300s 600 s Mode Trigger Rotate Block 1 2 4 8 1 2 and 4 when Data is set to 16 E D Data length 3 min to 31 days Up to other parameters set Pre trigger 0 5 25 50 75 95 100 Trigger Key On Off External On Off Alarm On Off Memory and Meas CH Math CH Math CH trend First CH Up to model types Last CH On Off On jort Memory Timeup type ot O e Hour Day Week timeup Month Date Numerical value Day of the week SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT Time hour Numerical value AUX Tag Channel Memory alarm 5h 10h 100 h Language German French Partial Batch for models with BT1 Time zone Time difference from GMT Numerical value App 4 IM 04L02A01 01E Appendix 1 Parameters and Initial Settings Parameters Menu Notes Keylock Use Not Use Not password Character string START Free Lock STOP Free Lock MENU Free Lock USER Free DISP ENTER Free Alarm ACK Free Math Free Write memory Free Media Free Key login Use Not Use Auto logout On Off User ID Use Not Use Not Number 1 2 4 5 6 On Off On Off User name User 1 to User 7 Character string User ID 1to7 Passwor
3. T i 3 T a oS gt o qo 2 a 3x o 2 sja g l m N Dimention after S mounting 288 11 34 2 294 6 11 60 Note When mounting to a panel use two brackets one each of the top and bottom of the DX200 or on the left and right sides The dimensional tolerance is 3 unless otUMrwise specified However the tolerance for dimensions less than 10 mm is 0 3 mm 14 20 IM 04L02A01 01E 14 8 Dimentional Drawings Desktop type 220 8 66 27 1 168 3 6 63 1 07 o 9 J T 19 le 11 34 Note The dimensional tolerance is 3 unless otherwise specified However the tolerance for dimentions less than 10 mm is 0 3 mm 14 21 IM 04L02A01 01E suoneoyiseds z Appendix Appendix 1 Setting mode Initial settings are thick framed Parameters and Initial Settings Parameters Menu Notes Range 20 mV 60 mV 200 mV Other parameters 6V 20V 50V Upper lower limits of span TC R S B K E J T N w L U RTD PT JPT Other parameters Upper ower limits of span Sc
4. n Trip line Message 0 643 v 0 643 v unit Numerical display section Can be turned ON OFF Do 0 644 Tag Channel no Alarm mark Measured computed value 0 644 v The display direction of the trend and the bar graph For the setting procedure of the display direction of the trend and the bar graph see section 7 13 4 6 IM 04L02A01 01E 4 3 Using the Trend Digital and Bar Graph Screens Digital Tag Channel no TAG 1 Measured computed value Alarm mark _7 Bar Graph Horizontal Display Starting point of the bar center Upper limit of span l Lower limit of span Bar graph m Unit 2 000 2 008 ITAG B1 Tag Channel no Measured computed value Alarm point Unit mark 2 000 2 000 TAG 02 Alarm mark ieee Alarm type 2 000 2 000 TAG 83 2 000 2 000 l l l l l 2 000 2 000 l l 2 000 2 000 l l f Scale mark Bar Graph Vertical Display Tag Channel no TAG 81 TAG 82 TAG 83 TAG 84 TAG 05 TAG 86
5. First block Second block Last block Data acquisition Data acquisition Data acquisition IN j AN i i Trigger wait Trigger wait Trigger wail Trigger activated Trigger activated Trigger activated Stop IM 04L02A01 01E 8 2 Function to Acquire Display Data and Event Data Mode Description Rotate When the internal memory is not divided into blocks One event data file is created in the internal memory Press the START key to enter the trigger wait state After the trigger is activated data are acquired for the specified time data length see section 8 11 and the operation is stopped Data are overwritten when the trigger is activated again Every time the trigger is activated during the trigger wait state data are overwritten Press the STOP key to terminate data acquisition Data acquisition uN Trigger wait wud Trigger activated When the internal memory is divided into blocks An event data file each in the blocks is created Press the START key to enter the trigger wait state After the trigger is activated data are acquired for the specified time data length see section 8 11 and the operation is stopped When the trigger is activated again data are acquired and stored to the next block When all blocks are full and the trigger is activated data are overwritten to the first block Every time the trigger is activated during the trigge
6. 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 EE we BEE EEE 5 E 85 3 E BE EEE EBE EE WE 70 z 72 z 71 E 66 66 me E E E E E m E E MC EE REEE PEE FE 50 50 E unit unit 50 junit 50 unit 50 unit junit unit unit f unit unit E E 44 E W E E E E 40 E 7 f MO Ee 36 os ba E 33 E PEEEERPEE amp PERM PEE mE E PEE E fe PEF o 0 OF OO O0 O O O bob n The scale is divided into 4 to 12 sections as shown in the figure above Scale for display position 1 4 scale division example Span Scale for display position 2 5 scale division example Span Scale for display position 3 6 scale division example Span Scale for display position 4 7 scale division example Span Scale for display position 5 8 scale division example Span Scale for display position 6 9 scale division example Span Scale for display position 7 10 scale division example Span Scale for display position 8 11 scale division example Span Scale for display position 9 12 scale division example Span Scale for display position 10 C10 scale division example Span 0 to 100 Unit UNIT 0 to 100 Unit 0 to 100 Unit 0 to 100 Unit 0 to 100 Unit 0 to 100 Unit 0 to 100 Unit 0 to 100 Unit UNIT 0 to 100 Unit UNIT 0 to 100 Unit UNIT IM 04L02A01 01E 7 17 Ae dsiq oy Buiyesodo pue Buras 7 10 Setting the Scale Division Bar Grap
7. 0 618 Updating of the Numerical Display Measured computed values are updated every second However when the scan interval on the DX210 DX220 DX230 is 2 s the display update rate is also 2 s Bar graph Screen M Unit Tag Channel no t Measured computed value Alarm mark The measured computed data are displayed using bar graphs See section 4 3 Bar Graph Display Horizontal Starting point of the bar center Bar graph Alarm point mark 2 000 2 000 ee 2 000 I 2 000 TAG B1 2 000 2 000 1 389 TAG 83 c Unit TAG a L Alarm mark IH _963 DOOM La Tag Channel no Alarm type 483 Measured 2 000 2 000 TAG B4 2 000 2 000 2 000 2 000 TAG B5 URI I 0 551 pH TAG 86 1 030 y Lower limit of span Bar Graph Display Vertical Upper limit of span cn computed data 0 034 nV Tag Channel no TAG G1 TAG 82 TAG 83 TAG B4 TAG 05 TAG 06 Alarm mark naan mumun HIHIRI Dug una OG Upper limit of span Alarm point mark 4 Scale Bar graph l _ Unit 72008 72200 72020 2020 2020 7210885 Lower limit of span Measured 6 749 8 243 8 278 8 78
8. 60 q My 30 e YVEN ARMY 0 1 0 Explanation Regarding the Partial Expanded Display By compressing a section of the display scale of the waveform the remaining section of the display is expanded You specify a value on the display scale boundary value to be moved to another position on the display scale boundary value displacement position In the example shown in the figure below 0 V boundary value is moved to the 30 position of the display scale boundary value displacement position The section below the boundary accounts for 30 of the entire display represents 6 V to 0 V and the section above the boundary accounts for 70 of the entire display represents 0 V to 6 V Normal display Partial expanded display Measured of full Measured of full value display span value display span 6V 100 6V 100 Boundary value Expanded portion 0 50 Shifted boundary 0 30 Compressed portion 6V 0 6V 0 x 1 8 IM 04L02A01 01E 1 3 Display Function Digital Screen The measured computed data are displayed using numerical values in large size See section 4 3 TAG 1 1 677 TAG 2 1 398 any i L H TAG 04
9. 10 6 IM 04L02A01 01E 10 5 Using the Key Login Logout Function Explanation Auto logout This function is available in the operation mode If there is no key operation for ten minutes the user is automatically logged out The auto logout function can be activated in the basic setting mode Power up operation Power ON i Log out status Logout operation Login operation or FUNC key Auto logout Password User ID Operation mode When the basic setting mode is terminated When the basic setting mode is terminated and the mode returns to the operation mode the DX200 is in the logged out condition Saving the user name The user name is stored to the display and event data files at the following points when the display or event data acquisition starts and ends and when a message is written IM 04L02A01 01E 10 7 suon uny 13410 2 10 6 Setting the Key Login Logout Functions Basic Setting Mode Procedure These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press uw Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears To display the setting screen press the soft key OB
10. 4 18 IM 04L02A01 01E 4 5 Using the Information Screen Alarm Summary Message Summary and Memory Summary Changing the report data to be displayed The index number of the report data currently displayed the number of report data sets in the internal memory is displayed in the Index column of the report data display The most recent report data set is the one with the largest report data index number When the report data are being displayed the arrow keys can be pressed to switch the report being displayed The operation when the four arrow keys are pressed are as follows Up arrow key Displays next report data Down arrow key Displays the previous report data Right arrow key Displays the report data that is 10 data sets after the report data being displayed However if there are less than 10 data sets the most recent report data with the maximum report data index number are displayed Left arrow key Displays the report data that is 10 data sets before the report data being displayed However if there are less than 10 data sets the oldest report data report data index number 1 are displayed INO te I When new report data are created while displaying the report data the screen is not updated The most recent report data can be displayed by carrying out the following operations Press the DISP ENTER key and display the report data again from the menu or Press the right arrow key IM 04L02A01 01E
11. The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press mew To display the setting screen press the soft key T File Header E 1 Directory name PATAG Br 2 Save data Unsave 3 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Header Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a string Enter the header up to 32 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 8 20 IM 04L02A01 01E 8 9 Setting the File Header Directory Name and the Saved Data during Manual Save 2 Directory name Enter the directory name up to 8 alphanumeric characters using the same method as step 1 Note The following character combinations can not be used as directory names AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK All spaces or spaces at the top or in the middle of character strings are also not allowed for directory names 3 Save data Displayed when Manual Save is selected Select Unsave or All The initial setting is All Unsave Saves only the data that have not been saved when the medium is in
12. Option Terminal 1 R1 AR1 AR2 Terminal Arrangement Only the position of the remote control terminals is indicated C is acommon terminal for terminals 1 through 8 Option Terminal 1 3 Replace the terminal cover and fasten it with screws Note Input Specifications Use shielded wires for the remote control wires to reduce the effects of noise Connect the shield to the ground terminal of the DX200 Item Specification Input signal Voltage free dry contact open collector TTL or transistor Input conditions ON voltage Less than or equal to 0 5 V 30 mA DC Leakage current in the OFF state No more than 0 25 mA Signal duration 250 ms minimum Input type Photocoupler isolation one side common Internal isolated power source 5 V 5 Dielectric strength 500 VDC for one minute between input terminals and the ground terminal For details related to the control and input types see section 10 9 2 14 IM 04L02A01 01E 2 7 VGA Output Connection D5 Option AN CAUTION Before connecting the monitor to the DX200 be sure to turn OFF the power to both monitor and DX200 e Never short circuit the VIDEO OUT terminal or apply an external voltage otherwise damage to the DX200 may result VIDEO OUT terminal The DX200 s screen can be displayed on a monitor via this terminal Only a VGA mon
13. Ae dsiq oy Buiyesodo pue Buras 7 6 Setting Groups Procedure Trend digital and bar graph screens are displayed in groups Channels can be assigned to each group and the group name can be registered Number of groups 4 Number of channels Up to 10 channels group As for setting the channels to display the trend see section 8 10 These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press uw Press the soft key 4 To display the setting screen press the soft key ol Group number r Group set Group name GROUP 1 ___4 2 CH Set 1 62 03 04 05 06 07 68 89 10 3 Trip line No 1 Off 2 Off 3 off 4 Off The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Group number Select the group number 1 to 4 2 Group name Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter the group name Enter the group name up to 16 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings se
14. Alarm mark B 2 000 EEEN 2 000 2 000 es 2 000 _ _ Upper limit of span Alarm point mark t Scale mark Bar graph 7 Unit 788 on _2 88 7 Lower limit of span Measured computed value _ 8 749 8 243 1 597 IM 04L02A01 01E 4 7 su 19 5 uodo HuryIMS g 4 3 Using the Trend Digital and Bar Graph Screens Displaying or clearing the scale on the trend screen This operation is carried out on the Trend screen 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu Trend is selected 2 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key 3 Select SCALE ON or SCALE OFF The one that is selectable is displayed in the sub menu A TREND gt z I LLL LL iN J SCALE ON EE he ra gE 4 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the scale To close the menu without displaying clearing the scale press the ESC key T Showing the all channel display returning to the group display On the group display the channels that are assigned to the group are displayed see section 7 6 On the all channel display the waveform of all channels that are set to display the trend see section 8 10 are displayed over the current group display See Explanation 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu Trend is selected 2 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left
15. See Communication Interface User s Manual Incorrect function parameter See Communication Interface User s Manual The input numerical value exceeds the set range Enter a proper value Incorrect input character string Enter a proper character string Too many characters Enter specified number of characters Incorrect input mode See Communication Interface User s Manual OJoINI OJAJ AJOJN Incorrect input range code See Communication Interface User s Manual N k Cannot set an alarm for a skipped channel See Communication Interface User s Manual N N The upper and lower span limits are equal See sections 5 1 to 5 7 N oO The upper and lower scale limits are equal See sections 5 5 and 5 6 2 fo The partial boundary value exceeds the range of the span See section 7 11 ow pare Partial expansion display is set ON for a SKIPPED channel See Communication Interface User s Manual ie oa The upper and lower limits of the display band are equal See section 7 9 amp O The lower limit of the display band is greater than the upper limit See section 7 9 wo J The display band is narrower than 4 of the entire display See section 7 9 D oO Incorrect group set character string See section 7 6 A There is no specified input channel See Communication Interface User
16. Starts stops data acquisition StartStop Remote input Rising start falling stop Start Starts stops the acquisition of the display data and the event data and the report option Stop Stops the acquisition of the display data and the event data and the report option Ifthe data acquisition is in progress applying a rising signal produces no effect If the data acquisition is stopped applying a falling signal produces no effect External trigger for event data acquisition Trigger Remote input Trigger 250 ms or more This becomes the external trigger that starts the acquisition of the event data to the internal memory This is valid only when acquiring the event data to the internal memory using the trigger or rotate mode the acquisition start trigger is set to external trigger and the DX200 is in the trigger wait state see section 8 2 For all other cases applying the remote signal produces no effect Releasing the alarm indication and output relay AlarmACK Remote input Trigger 250 ms or more Releases the alarm indication and relay output option This is the same function as when the AlarmACK soft key is pressed Adjusting the internal clock Time adj Remote input Trigger 250 ms or more Adjusts the internal clock of the DX200 to the nearest hour depending on the time when the remote signal is applied Time of signal input New time 00 min 00 s to 01 min 59 s Adjus
17. Note Span lower limit and span upper limit cannot be set to the same value IM 04L02A01 01E 5 1 sBunjes jouueyy jusweinseoyy eo 5 1 Voltage Input Setting Explanation Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Measurable range The following table shows the mode range and measurable range Mode Range Measurable Range Volt 20 mV 60 mV 200 mV 2V 6V 20 V 50 V 20 00 to 20 00 mV 60 00 to 60 00 mV 200 0 to 200 0 mV 2 000 to 2 000 V 6 000 to 6 000 V 20 00 to 20 00 V 50 00 to 50 00 V DC current input An external shunt resistor is connected to the input terminal to convert a current signal to a voltage signal The shunt resistors in the following table can be provided A 250 Q shunt resistor for example is used to convert a 4 to 20 mA to a 1 to 5 V 250 Q 0 1 100 Q 0 1 10 Q 0 1 250 Q 0 1 100 Q 0 1 Name Model Code Specification Shunt resistors 4159 20 for screw terminals 4159 21 4159 22 Shunt resistors 4389 20 for clamped terminals 4389 21 4389 22 10 Q 0 1 5 2 IM 04L02A01 01E 5 2 Thermocouple TC Resistance Temperature Detector RTD Setting To measure TC and RTD signals follow the procedures below to set the input range
18. Number On Off User I Enter User name lse o Password r Key login Use Not EPE Auto logout ot 2 UserID Use Not Use 3 1i On D setup Enable The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Note Use Not Set whether or not to use the key login function If Use is selected items 2 3 4 5 6 8 and 9 are displayed Use Use key login Not Do not use key login Auto logout Select On or Off On Automatically logs out if there is no key operation for ten minutes Off The user stays logged on until the user manually logs out User ID Use Not Set whether or not to use the user ID If Use is selected item 7 User ID appears Use Use the user ID Not Do not use the user ID For models with the batch function The key login function of all users 1 to 7 item 4 turns Off item 5 when User ID is changed to Use from Not Number This is the user registration number 1 to 7 Select the user number to be set On Off Set whether or not to enable the key login function for the selected user On Enable the key login function for the selected user Off Disable the key login function for the selected user 10 8 IM 04L02A01 01E 10 6 Setting the Key Login Logout Functions Basic Setting Mode 6 User name Enter the user name up to 16 alph
19. Relay output off Note If the reflash alarm is turned ON 101 to 103 are set to non hold Specifying hold produces no effect Relays 111 112 113 are used for models without 101 to 106 Hold Non hold of the alarm indicator When the alarm changes from the activated state to the released state you can select to Release the alarm indicator in sync with the alarm release non hold or Hold the alarm indicator till an alarm acknowledge operation is executed hold The initial setting is Nonhold For details regarding the alarm indicator see section 6 1 IM 04L02A01 01E 6 13 suey Buipas pue Guibpe mouyoy jo Chapter 7 Setting and Operating the Display 7 1 Setting Tag Names Procedure Tag names can be displayed in place of channel numbers on the operation screen trend screen digital screen etc The basic setting mode is used to select whether tag names or channel numbers are displayed see section 7 2 Tag names are saved to the file along with the data These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press w Setting on a measuremen
20. Y a fo 0 15 of rdg 0 3 C IM 04L02A01 01E 14 15 14 7 General Specifications Power Supply Measuring accuracy in case of scaling digits Accuracy during scaling digits measuring accuracy digits x multiplier 2 digits rounded up where the multiplier scaling span digits measuring span digits Example Assuming that range 6V measuring span 1 000 to 5 000 V scaling span 0 000 to 2 000 Then Measuring accuracy 0 1 x 5 V 2 digits 0 005 V 5 digits 2 7 digits Multiplier 2000 digits 0 000 to 2 000 4000 digits 1 000 to 5 000 V 0 5 Accuracy during scaling 7 digits x 0 5 2 6 digits rounded up Reference junction compensation Internal External selectable for each channel Reference junction compensation accuracy above 0 C Types R S B W 1 C Types K J E T N L U 0 5 C Maximum allowable input voltage 10 V DC continuous for ranges of 2 V or less and TC ranges 60 V DC continuous for 6 V DC 20 V DC and 50 V DC ranges Input resistance Approximately 10 MQ or more for ranges of 2 V DC or less and TC Approximately 1 MQ for 6 V DC 20 V DC and 50 V DC ranges Input source resistance Volt TC 2 kQ or less RTD 10 Q or less per wire The resistance of all three wires must be equal Input bias current 10 nA or less Maximum common mode noise voltage 250 Vrms AC 50 60 Hz Maximum noise voltage between channels
21. 250 Vrms AC 50 60 Hz Interference between channels 120 dB when the input source resistance is 500 Q and the inputs to other channels are 60 V Common mode rejection ratio 120 dB 50 60 Hz 0 1 500 Q imbalance between the minus terminal and ground Normal mode rejection ratio 40 dB 50 60 Hz 0 1 Rated power supply 100 to 240 VAC automatic switching except for P1 model 24 VDC AC for P1 model Allowable power supply voltage range 90 to 132 or 180 to 264 VAC except for P1 model 21 6 to 26 4 VDC AC for P1 model Rated power supply frequency 50 60 Hz automatic switching for AC Rated Power consumption 106 VA except for P1 model 54 VA for P1 model DC 76 VA for P1 model AC 14 16 IM 04L02A01 01E 14 7 General Specifications Power consumption Normal Operating Conditions Except for P1 model Supply voltage Backlight saving mode Normal Max 100 VAC 50 VA 53 VA 75 VA 240 VAC 78 VA 80 VA 106 VA For P1 model Supply voltage Backlight saving mode Normal Max 24 VDC 34 VA 35 VA 54 VA 24 VAC 50 60Hz 50 VA 53 VA 76 VA Power supply voltage 90 to 132 or 180 to 250 VAC except for P1 model 21 6 to 26 4 VDC AC for P1 model Power supply frequency Ambient temperature Ambient humidity Vibration Shock Magnetic field Noise 0 to 50 C when using FDD or Zip drive 5 to 40 C 20 to 80 RH at 5 to 40 C 10 to 60 Hz 0 2 m s or less Not accept
22. 265 SMTP protocol error May occur if a network failure cable problems duplicate addresses network device failure and so on occurs in the middle of the e mail transmission 266 Ethernet cable is not connected Check the cable connection 267 Could not connect to SMTP server e Check to see that the SMTP server is connected to the network If the SMTP server name is specified using an IP address check to see that the IP address is correct 268 E mail transmission request failed Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer 269 E mail transfer error May occur if a network failure cable problems duplicate addresses network device failure and so on occurs in the middle of the e mail transmission 275 The current image cannot be output to the Web The setup screen cannot be output to the Web This message is displayed on the Web screen 276 Image data currently being created Unable to perform key operation Try again a little later This message is displayed on the Web screen 277 Could not output screen to Web Failed to create the image This message is displayed on the Web screen IM 04L02A01 01E 12 3 BunooyseqnoiL Ey 12 1 A List of Messages e Errors related to FTP client For information regarding the FTP client function of the DX200 see the DX100 DX200 Communication Interface User s Manual IM 04L02A01 17E Code Message 280 IP address is no
23. 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to enable or disable the automatic switching of the displayed groups Displaying or clearing the numerical display section on the trend screen This operation is carried out on the Trend screen 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu Trend is selected 2 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key 3 Select DIGITAL ON or DIGITAL OFF using the up and down keys The one that is selectable is displayed in the sub menu IM 04L02A01 01E 4 9 su 19 uodo BulyoyMs g 4 3 Using the Trend Digital and Bar Graph Screens A TREND gt it DIGITAL OFF 4 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays clears the numerical display section To close the menu without displaying clearing the numerical section press the ESC key Switching the trend digital and bar graph screens The following two methods are available Switch between trend digital and bar graph from the screen menu The operating procedure is the same as Displaying the screen on page 4 5 Switching the trend digital and bar graph screens using the arrow keys 1 The displayed screen changes in the order trend digital bar graph trend and so on by pressing the down arrow key on the trend digital and bar graph screens 2 By pressing the up arrow key the displayed screen changes in the reverse order Starting the waveform display of the trend screen st
24. IM 04L02A01 01E 14 9 14 5 Specifications of Communication Functions Connection Protocols FTP client functions FTP server functions Ethernet 10BASE T TCP IP Automatic file transport from the DX200 FTP client protocol File transport on request by host computer FTP server protocol Directory operation file output and file delete on the external storage medium Files can be transported Display data file event data file and report data file Real time monitor function Monitor the measured computed data on the DX200 YOKOGAWA private protocol is used E mail transmission function Web server function E mail is automatically transmitted at the following times Alarm activation release recovery from a power failure memory end detection occurrence of error related to the external storage medium and FTP client at the specified time and report creation Destination Specify two groups of destinations Displays the DX200 screen on the Internet Explorer browser Browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 0 to 5 5 e Monitor screen Screen for monitoring Operator screen Switch the screen from the browser Modify and write messages e Set access control user name and password on each screen 14 10 IM 04L02A01 01E 14 6 Specifications of Optional Functions Alarm Output Relays AR1 AR2 A3 A4 A5 An alarm signal is output from the rear panel as a relay contact signal
25. IM 04L02A01 01E 8 11 winipa y eBbe10jg jeus9 xq 0 Burnes pue uoljsinboy eead el 8 5 Acquiring Display Data This operation is performed when the type of data acquired is set to Display or E D For setting the data acquisition method see sections 8 10 and 8 11 Procedure Start data acquisition To begin data acquisition press the START key The icon in the status display section will change accordingly icon GROUP 1 PETTE ed OS I Shou 176 E Stop data acquisition 1 Press the STOP key A confirmation window opens On models with the computation option the confirmation window displays the following choices Mem Math terminate acquisition and all computations Memory terminate acquisition and Cancel For models with the batch function BT1 option that has the batch function enabled see section 10 13 the batch information is also displayed A J No 2 Select Yes Mem Math or Memory for models with the computation function using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key to stop the data acquisition The icon in the status display section changes to a stop icon Note When the memory area becomes full or the number of files exceeds 16 existing data will be overwritten starting with the oldest data When a power disruption occurs the file is closed When the power resumes data are written to a new file The START STOP operation also starts stops the report function When
26. Key lock 10 3 Enables or disables key lock when key lock is in use Logout 10 5 Logout when being logged in while key login is in use Trigger 8 6 8 11 Starts acquiring event data when Key Trigger is set as a trigger to start acquiring event data Math START STOP 11 3 Starts stops computation when the computation function M1 is equipped Math reset 11 3 Clears computed results when the computation function M1 is equipped and the computation is suspended Math ACK 11 3 Clears the computation dropout display when the computation function M1 is equipped and the computation dropout occurs Snapshot 9 6 Saves the screen image data to the external medium Log 10 7 Displays log screens or the system information screen FTP test Execute FTP test 4Panel 7 15 Register 4 screen display s name when a 4 screen display is displayed Save Display Save Event 8 7 Stores the display data or event data to the external storage medium only when the display data or event data free mode are being acquired to the internal memory E Mail START STOP Starts stops E mail transmission E Mail test Executes E mail test Modbus master Displays the Modbus status screen Fieldbus Displays the fieldbus status screen 1 See the DX100 DX200 Communication Interface User s Manual IM 04L02A01 17E 2 See the Fieldbus Communication Interface User s Manual IM 04L02A01 18E 3 8 IM 04L02A01 01E 3 4 Run
27. Note During the Trigger mode Full is displayed when data acquisition to all blocks is complete When Full is displayed event data are no longer acquired even if the trigger condition is met Terminate data acquisition with a key operation in sync with the termination of the display data acquisition when acquiring the display data and the event data 1 Press the STOP key A confirmation window opens On models with the computation option the confirmation window displays the following choices Mem Math terminate acquisition and all computations Memory terminate acquisition and Cancel For models with the batch function BT1 option that has the batch function enabled see section 10 13 the batch information is also displayed 2 Select Yes Mem Math or Memory for models with the computation function using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key to stop the data acquisition The icon in the status display section changes to a stop icon Note The maximum number of files that can be stored in the internal memory is the specified number of blocks When a power disruption occurs the file is closed When the power resumes data are written to a new file The START STOP operation also starts stops the report function When the computation is stopped it is started with the START key 8 14 IM 04L02A01 01E 8 7 Saving the Data in the Internal Memory to the External Storage Medium This operatio
28. Press MENU Press 5 soft key to display the Save Load Clear data menu screen Press 3 Save data soft key to save the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium Ja e o y Sa eae ee The data in the internal memory cannot be saved to the external storage medium while data acquisition or computation is in progress Name of the directory to which to save the data The name of the directory to which to save the data is the specified name Axx where xx is the sequence number Each time carrying out the key operation and the data are saved the sequence number of the directory name increments by one Example When the specified directory name is DATAO the first set of data are saved to DATAO A00 and the second set of data are saved to DATAO A01 IM 04L02A01 01E ejeq Bulzijeniuy pue saji4 Guibeuey el 9 3 Viewing Display Data in the External Storage Medium Procedure Loads the display data saved in the external storage medium and displays the waveform on the historical trend screen This operation can be carried out when the acquisition of display data is set Display or E D in section 8 11 See section 4 6 for the use of the historical trend These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate position Press ew Press 5 soft key to display the Save Load Clear data menu screen Press 4 so
29. Setting on a computation channel option 1 First CH Last CH Ge Zone Lower 83 Upper 100 Graph Division 18 Bar graph Normal Scale position 1 Partial On Off ftiu 2 Expand 5a 13 Boundary 8 008 4 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels For the channels set here Zone and Graph are also simultaneously set 2 On Off When On is selected the Expand and Boundary boxes are displayed On Use the partial expanded display Off Not use the partial expanded display 7 20 IM 04L02A01 01E 7 11 Using Partial Expanded Display Trend 3 Expand Boundary displacement position Set the position to which a particular value the boundary see step 4 in the display span is to be moved as a percentage of the display span Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter the position and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 The range for the position 1 to 99 4 Boundary This is a value within the display span By moving the value within the display span to another position see step 3 the area on either side of the boundary is expanded or compressed Enter the boundary using the
30. These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press wew Press the soft key oom Setting on a measurement channel To display the setting screen press the soft key Oox Setting on a computation channel option To display the setting screen press the soft key O r Color CH CH Color CH Color 1 jil 11 E Red 21 Red 2 E 12 E Green 22 E Green 3 E 13 E Blue 23 E Blue 4 E 14 E B Violet 24 E B Violet 5 E 15 E Brown 25 E Brown 6 16 Orange 26 Orange 7 17 Y Green 27 Y Green 8 18 LightBlue 28 LightBlue 9 19 Violet 29 Violet 18 o 28 E Gray 38 E Gray The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Channel display color Move the cursor to the desired channel and set the channel display color select from 16 colors Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Initial Settings
31. move the cursor and scroll the screen Number of the alarm information in the internal memory Tag Channel no Alarm No 1 2 3 4 Type H L h I R r T t Date amp Time Date amp Time Alarm activated Alarm released i i 828 128 Channel Type Alarm IN Time Alarm OUT Time TAG 43 21 Jan 81 2688 62 39 31 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2688 62 39 68 Jan 01 2888 62 39 28 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2888 82 38 21 Jan 01 2008 62 38 46 TAG 83 21 Jan 1 2888 82 37 58 Jan 1 2688 62 38 18 m TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2688 62 37 19 Jan 1 2888 62 37 39 TAG 83 21 Jan 1 2888 82 36 48 Jan 1 2688 62 37 68 TAG 83 21 Jan 61 2888 82 36 17 Jan 1 2688 62 36 37 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2888 82 35 46 Jan 01 2808 62 36 86 TAG 83 21 Jan 61 2888 02 35 15 Jan 1 2688 62 35 35 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2688 62 34 44 Jan 1 2888 62 35 84 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2088 82 34 13 Jan 01 2088 82 34 33 TAG 83 21 Jan 1 2888 82 33 42 Jan 1 2688 62 34 62 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2688 82 33 11 Jan 1 2888 62 33 31 TAG 83 21 Jan 1 2888 82 32 48 Jan 1 2088 62 33 68 TAG 83 21 Jan 61 2688 62 32 89 Jan 81 2888 62 32 29 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2888 82 31 38 Jan 01 2888 62 31 58 TAG 83 21 Jan 1 2888 82 31 87 Jan 1 2688 62 31 27 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2688 62 38 36 Jan 01 2888 62 30 56 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2888 82 38 85 Jan 01 2008 62 38 25 TAG 83 21 Jan 1 2888 82 29 34 Jan 1 2688 62 29 54 Mark see section 6 1 Recalling the historical trend at the time the alarm occurred This operation is car
32. 29 Conditions of the remote control terminals D01 to D08 The conditions of the remote input signal can be assigned to 1 and O and used in the equations Enter the data as D01 to D08 the number following the letter D is the remote terminal number in the equations The correlation between the conditions of the remote input signal and the value 1 and 0 are shown below Type of Status 1 or 0 the remote input signal Contact close 1 open 0 Open collector Voltage level is Lo at the remote terminal 1 Voltage level is Hi at the remote terminal 0 The unit corresponding to the measured computed data in the equation is not compensated In computations measured and computed data are handled as values without units For example if the measured data from channel 01 is 20 mV and the measured data from channel 02 is 20 V the computed result of 01 02 is 40 Order of precedence of the operators The order of precedence of the operators in the equation is as follows The operators are placed in order from the highest precedence Type Operator higher precedence Functions ABS SQR LOG EXP TLOG MAX TLOG MIN TLOG P P TLOG SUM TLOG AVE Power XxX Logical negation NOT Multiplication and division x Addition and subtraction Greater than less than GT LT GE LE Equal not equal EQ NE Logical AND AND Logical OR exclusive OR OR XOR lower precede
33. 61 2608 68 14 16 Jan 61 2608 68 14 48 17 Stop _ Jan 1 2088 00 11 24 Jan 1 2008 00 12 54 46 Stop Jan 81 2608 68 10 48 Jan 61 2008 68 11 04 9 Stop 2 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu 3 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key g B fy i INFOR MATION gt JUMP TO HISTORY 4 Select JUMP TO HISTORY using the up and down arrow keys 5 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the historical trend To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key IM 04L02A01 01E 4 17 su 19 UO1 e19dQ BulyoyMsS g 4 5 Using the Information Screen Alarm Summary Message Summary and Memory Summary Report Data M1 option Date and time thet report was created The index number of the report data currently displayed The number of report data sets in the internal memory Report type Date and time the report started Index 2 2 Kind Hourly Start Jan 81 2000 00 10 46 Timeup Jan 1 2008 88 11 01 Channel Unit Sts Ave Hax Hin Sum CH1 v 8 008 8 008 8 008 A a00000E 88 CHa2 Y 4 008 4 008 8 008 A BAAOAAE 0A CHAS Y 0 196 8 964 0 743 3 916080E 88 CHad Y 4 008 4 008 8 008 A BAABHAE 0A CHES v Gaana 8 888 4 088 8 008 A 808008E 80 CHOG Y 4 132 0 186 6 026 2 648000E 0A CHO v a 8 128 8 174 0 012 2 391088E 80 CHES Y 0 110 0 164 8 001 2 202000E 00 CHES Y 8 101 8 155 0 007 2 829888E 8
34. 7 8 Bar graph direction vertical horizontal 7 13 Number of scale divisions applies also to trends 7 10 Bar graph base position 7 10 LCD Background color white or black 7 13 Brightness 7 14 Backlight saver specifications 7 14 Settings related to data storage Item Setting Mode Basic Setting Mode Data acquisition 8 11 Types of data to be acquired Event data Sampling interval Mode Free Trigger Rotate Number of blocks number of memory divisions Data length file size Pretrigger position Type of trigger to use IM 04L02A01 01E 3 11 suoleiodg uoWwWOD epoy UNY SUeg JO SoWeN el 3 5 Configuring the Functions Setting Mode and Basic Setting Mode Item Setting Mode Basic Setting Mode Channel selections for data acquisition 8 10 Measurement channels that data are to be acquired applies also to measurement channels for which to display the trend Computation channels option that data are to be acquired applies also to computation channels for which to display the trend Storage media Name of the directory to which data are to be saved 8 9 File header string 8 9 Range of data to be saved during manual save 8 9 Auto save interval during auto save 8 8 Save method to the storage media auto save or manual save 8 11 Memory timeup 8 12 Memory end alarm Minimum remaining amount of internal
35. AR1 and AR2 includes remote control functions R1 Relay contact rating 250 VAC 50 60 Hz 3 A 250 VDC 0 1 A for resistance load Terminal configuration SPDT NO C NC Energized at alarm de energized at alarm AND OR hold non hold and reflash actions are selectable Batch Function BT1 Information added to the measured computed data Serial number of the DX200 Application name Supervisor name Manager name Batch number Lot number Comment information Displaying information Displays the application name supervisor name manager name batch name and comment when data acquisition to the internal memory is stopped Identifying operators users by using the key login function User names that are already registered cannot be specified the combinations of user IDs and passwords that are identical to those that have been registered by any user in the past cannot be specified Messages Messages 1 through 3 can be changed in the operation mode Confirming the stored data Batch information can be shown on the memory information display Serial Communication Interface C2 C3 This interface allows the host computer to control and make settings for the DX200 as well as receive data from the DX200 Connection EIA RS 232 C2 or RS 422 485 C3 Protocols YOKOGAWA private protocol Modbus protocol Synchronization method Start stop asynchronous transmission Connection method RS 422 485 4 wire half duplex multi drop con
36. Ba pee A2 E Alarm mark E EE T This area is displayed E E 0 361 using the channel color H E 8 2 0 y Trip line Scale Messages message mark time message Trend Display Vertical K T A Jy y i fin ail L Lit Le L ae Scale avin Iuli mg wulu hn Ihlis pa Lulun ui 1 6 0 9 0 3 Ww 0 3 0 9 1 6 jpu fi tit shutita td pah WB Lilith Imin div se Trip line 18 45 MESSAGE1 Message 1 t 18 43 HESSAGES gt Rirl V 0 643 v Unit oo 0 644 y 0 644 V Tag Channel no Alarm mark Measured computed value Updating the Waveform and Updating the Numerical Display One division along the time axis consists of 30 dots on the LCD The displayed waveform is updated at an interval corresponding to one dot This interval is determined by the time period corresponding to one division referred to as the display update rate The relationship between the display update rate and the speed of movement of waveforms is as follows Display Update 15s 30s 1min 2min 5min 10min 20min 30min 1h 2h 4h 10h Rate div Speed of movement 2376 1188 594 297 119 59 30 20 10 5 25 1 0 of waveforms approximate value mm h for DX204 and DX208 only Note _ _ The speed of movement of the trend display along the time axis is derived from the following equation given the dot pitch of the LCD 0 33 mm The speed of movement of the trend display along the time axis 30 dots x 0 33 mm x 60 min display update ra
37. Date and time to save data 0 00 everyday 7 19 13 10 7 20 0 00 7 21 0 00 7 22 0 00 Start Event data During the free mode The event data in the internal memory is saved to the external storage medium at the specified interval data length see section 8 11 or the specified date and time see section 8 12 8 10 IM 04L02A01 01E 8 4 Function that Saves the Data in the Internal Memory to the External Storage Medium During trigger or rotate mode After acquiring the data to the internal memory over the specified period data length see section 8 11 the event data in the internal memory are saved to the external storage medium The following figure shows the operation when the acquisition area in the internal memory is divided using the trigger mode Data save to the external storage medium First block Second block Last block Data acquisition Data acquisition Data acquisition MN i MN Trigger wait Trigger wai i Trigger wait gt Trigger activated gt Trigger activated S Trigger activated Stop Manual sampled data The first time manual sample is executed a manual sampled data file is created on the external storage medium The data are appended to this file for each successive manual sample operation Note When auto save is selected and there is no medium in the drive at the time when manual sample is ececuted all unsaved data are saved the first time when manual
38. Except the maximum number of data points is 30 000 Event data only 1 200 000 bytes number of measurement channels x 2 number of computation channels x 4 Except the maximum number of data points is 120 000 This logic is explained in more detail below 1 When acquiring display data only If we assume that the number of measuring channels is 20 the number of computing channels is 10 and the display rate is 30 min div 60 sec sampling interval then Number of data per channel 1 200 000 bytes 20 x 4 bytes 10 x 8 bytes 7 500 data Maximum number of data points is 100 000 Sampling length per file 7 500 x 60 sec 450 000 sec approx 5 days 2 When acquiring event data only If we assume that the number of measuring channels is 20 the number of computing channels is 10 and the sampling interval is 1 sec then Number of data per channel 1 200 000 bytes 20 x 2 bytes 10 x 4 bytes 15 000 data Maximum number of data points is 120 000 Sampling length 15 000 x 1 sec 15 000 sec approx 4 hours 3 When acquiring both display data and event data The sampling length is calculated by defining the capacity for display data as 900 000 bytes and the capacity for event data as 300 000 bytes The method of calculation is the same as shown above Except the maximum number of data points is 75 000 for display data and 30 000 for event data 14 6 IM 04L02A01 01E 14 3 Data Storage Spec
39. Expression Alarn Constant is Nath set2 Tag TLOG Rolling average Alarm Delay Batch set Next 1 Range Alarn 2 Tag Moving average Alarm Save Load Clear data Time Ek 4 Display 5 6 9 8 Delay Trend Save interval Nessage File User key Next 2 2 Display menu Dipa r Display 1 Group set Trip line 2 Color 3 Zone Graph Partial 4 View Direction LCD 5 Nath Color 6 Nath Zone Graph Partial To Display menu on the next page To Save Load Clear data menu on the next page 3 14 IM 04L02A01 01E 3 5 Configuring the Functions Setting Mode and Basic Setting Mode Save Load Clear data menu 2 8 4 5 Save Load Clear data Save settings Load settings Save data Load display data Load event data 6 File list 7 Delete 8 Format 9 Clear data fi 4 5 6 Next 172 Soft key Settings in the setting mode Title Item 1 Range 5 1 to 5 7 Input type Measurement range Upper and lower limits of span Reference channel for difference computation Upper and lower limits of scale Unit Alarm 6 2 Alarm type Alarm value Output relay On Off Output relay number 2 Tag 7 1 Tag name Filter 5 8 Filter time constant Off DX204 DX208 Moving average 5 8 Number of samples for the moving average Off DX210 DX220 DX230 Alarm delay time 6 3 3 Tren
40. IM 04L02A01 01E 11 9 Setting the Timer Basic Setting Mode Procedure Up to three timers can be specified The timers specified here are used to determine the interval for the TLOG computation In addition all the data of measurement and computation channels can be stored at the interval determined by the timers These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press w Press ane for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears To display the setting screen press the soft key 5 Timer lt TLOG No Node Interval Ref time Reset Action 1 J th ja off H off 2 Relative 01 00 off Off 3 Off 1 5 2 6 7 3 8 4 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure Setting the relative timer 1 Mode Select Relative Interval Reset and Action are displayed 2 Interval Set the time to the next timeout Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter the time Enter the time 00 01 to 24 00 and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related
41. In these cases the unit of the data measured over the scan interval is converted to match the unit of the input values and the computation is performed IM 04L02A01 01E 11 23 uondo uolouny pod y uoneyndwog Ey 11 11 Overview of the Report Function For example if the scan interval is 2 s and the input value is 100 m min a simple summation would add 100 every 2 s resulting in 3000 after one minute However if the sum unit is set to min then 2 s 60 s is multiplied every scan interval before the value is added giving a result that has a m min unit The following equations are applied The scan interval unit is in seconds Off gt measured value Is measured value x scan interval min measured value x scan interval 60 h gt measured value x scan interval 3600 day gt measured value x scan interval 86400 For the setting procedure see section 11 13 If power is lost while the report function is in progress If a power disruption occurred while the report function was in progress the report function will resume after the power is restored The exact operation will vary depending on whether the power is restored before or after the scheduled time to create a report Time of Recovery Report Operation After the time to create the Report data are created immediately after power is restored The report measured computed data up to the time of the power disruption are used For the next scheduled report
42. QS ATA flash memory card The data that have been saved to an external storage medium can be displayed on a PC using the standard software that comes with the package The data can also be loaded into the DX200 to be displayed By using the Ethernet interface that comes standard with the DX200 the data can be transferred to a server on a network client function The data stored on the DX200 s external storage medium can also be read from a PC on the network server function DX200 DX200 Primary Secondary This manual does not cover the communication functions using the Ethernet network or serial interface See the DX100 DX200 Communication Interface User s Manual IM 04L02A01 17E IM 04L02A01 01E SUOI OUNZ JO MAIAJBAQ 1 2 Functions of the Input Section Number of Measurement Channels Scan Interval The number of measurement channels and scan intervals for different models are listed in the table below For the procedure related to setting the scan interval see section 5 9 Model Number of Measurement Channels Scan interval DX204 4 channels 125 ms or 250 ms DX208 8 channels 125 ms or 250 ms DX210 10 channels 1sor2s DX220 20 channels 1sor2s DX230 30 channels 1sor2s Input Type and Computation You can select the input type of a measurement channel from DC voltage thermocouple resistance temperature detector RTD and digital input contact signal or voltage signal
43. Select the desired channels 2 Math On Off If On is selected a box for the equation will appear When not using computation select Off 3 Calculation expression Enter the equation up to 40 characters Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter an equation Enter the equation using the following key operations and press the DISP ENTER key For writing equations see Rules for writing an equation common items in section 11 2 First CH J B ee Nath range Math On Off Calculation exi Math alarm Constant Kal 2 ker f ee f oo f ae ft K 5 i z k KB6 fi K12 fi K18 fi K24 fi K308 fi Del Bs Ins 1 11 10 IM 04L02A01 01E 11 4 Setting Computation Channels Left and right arrow key Select the input position Character number input key Enter computing elements Use the 1 M soft key to switch the function of the character number input key between number input and computing element input See the explanation DEL soft key Delete the character at the cursor position BS soft key Delete the character before the cursor position INS soft key Switch between insert and overwrite Each time the INS soft key is pressed insert and overwrite switches The selected function is displayed to the right of the soft key display section Over Overwrites the cursor position Ins Inserts at the cursor position 1 M sof
44. Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press wew To display the setting screen press the soft key owt First CH Last CH Jar jar Range 1 5 Span Node Type Range Lower Upper volt 2 000 2 000 Scale Lower Upper Unit 6 88 288 68 J 2 3 4 6 7 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure Note First channel and last channel Select the desired channels Mode Set the mode to Scale Type Select the input type from Volt TC RTD and DI Range Select the input range using the soft keys according to the input type Upper and lower limits of span Set the upper and lower limits of the display span Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter a value in the allowed range and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 Span lower limit and span upper limit cannot be set to the same value IM 04L02A01 01E sBunjes jouueyy juswoinseoyy eo 5 5 Scaling Setting 6 Upper and lower limits of scale Set the upper and lower limits of the scale Enter a value in the allowed range using the same method as step 5 Allowed ran
45. The range cannot be changed while data acquisition or computation is in progress Procedure These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press To display the setting screen press the soft key owt j First CH Last CH jar al Range Span Node Range Lower Upper R a Jf 1760 0 ene 3 4 2 First CH Last CH jar Jar Range Span Hode Range Lower Upper RTD Pm 2 0 600 0 _ 2 3 4 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels 2 Mode Set the mode to TC thermocouple or RTD resistance temperature detector 3 Range Set the type of thermocouple or RTD IM 04L02A01 01E 5 3 sBunjes jouueyy juswoinseoyy eo 5 2 Thermocouple TC Resistance Temperature Detector RTD Setting 4 Note Upper and lower limits of span Set the upper and lower limits of the display span Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter
46. You can also perform computation on the measured data such as the EEN difference square root and scaling The input type and computation are configured as an input mode on the DX200 For the procedure related to setting the different modes see sections 5 1 to 5 7 Input Mode Notation Description DC voltage Thermocouple Resistance temperature detector Digital input Difference Square root Scaling Skip Volt TC RTD DI Delta Sqrt Scale Skip Measures a DC voltage in the range 20 mV to 50 V Measures the temperature corresponding to the appropriate range for R S B K E J T N W L and U Measures the temperature corresponding to the appropriate range for Pt100 JPt100 Cu10 and CU25 Displays the contact input or voltage input signals by correlating them to 0 or 100 of the display range Contact input Closed contact is 1 Open contact is 0 Voltage input Less than 2 4 V is 0 Greater than or equal to 2 4 Vis 1 When the input type is set to DC voltage thermocouple RTD or digital input the value obtained by subtracting the measured value of another channel this channel is called a reference channel from the input signal of the channel set to compute the difference is displayed as the measured value of that channel When the input type is set to DC voltage the square root of th
47. data after the power recovery are used Before the time to create After power is restored report data are created at the time of the the report next normally scheduled report All measured computed data excluding the power disruption period are used How the measured computed data are handled when there is an abnormality in the data Type of Abnormal Data Report Data Average value Maximum Minimum value Sum value Positive over not used used not used Negative over not used used not used Error not used not used not used over range for measurement channels or computation overflow for computation channels Displaying the report Report data display The reports can be displayed from the Information Memory Summary menu in the operation mode See section 4 5 Status display If the data of a measurement or a computation channel enter any of the conditions listed below within the relevant time period one hour for hourly reports and one day for daily reports for example status is output to the report For the displayed position see the report data output example in section 4 5 Power Failure Time Change Status Power failure P Time change Cc 11 24 IM 04L02A01 01E 11 11 Overview of the Report Function Data Condition Status Common to measurement and computation channels Measurement error or computation error E For measurement channels Positive over ran
48. depending on whether power is restored before or after the scheduled time to create the TLOG data Time of Recovery TLOG Computation Operation After the time to create TLOG data are created immediately when power is the TLOG data restored The measured computed data up to the time of the power disruption are used At the next scheduled TLOG computation time data will be used from the point in time after the power was restored Before the time to create After power is restored TLOG data are created at the normally the TLOG data scheduled time to perform the TLOG computation All measured computed data excluding the power disruption period are used How the measured computed data are handled when there is an abnormality in the data Type of Abnormal Data Report Data AVE MAX MIN P P SUM Positive over not used used not used Negative over not used used not used Error not used not used not used over range for measurement channels or computation overflow for computation channels IM 04L02A01 01E 11 17 uondo uolouny pod y uoneyndwog Ey 11 8 Setting the Timer Number and Sum Scale for TLOG Computation Procedure Set the number of the timer used by the channel computing the TLOG Also set the sum scale that is used when determining the sum in TLOG SUM These are set in the setting mode The timer specifications are set in the basic setting mode These procedures are carrie
49. file formats of ASCII files Index Note This manual covers information regarding DX200s that have a suffix code for language 2 English viii IM 04L02A01 01E How to Use this Manual Conventions Used in this Manual Unit Kiraz Denotes 1024 Example 768 KB File capacity K vsonts Denotes 1000 M Denotes 1024K Example 1 44 MB Storage capacity of floppy disks B seit Bytes Example 1 44 MB Storage capacity of floppy disks Symbols The following symbols are used in this manual A Affixed to the instrument Indicates danger to personnel or instrument and the operator must refer to the User s Manual The symbol is used in the User s Manual to indicate the reference WARNING Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent injury or death to the user CAUTION Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent minor B or moderate injury or damage to the instrument Note Provides important information for the proper operation of the instrument Notation regarding procedures On pages that describe the operating procedures in Chapter 3 through 11 the following symbols are used to distinguish the procedures from their explanations ie EE Represents contents that are displayed on the screen Example Volt t 9 Joe Denotes the soft key that is used to make a selection on the setting and basic setting menus Follow the steps indicated
50. for the date and time entered Pressing the right arrow key shifts the cursor to the DST box Select Summer or Winter by the soft key and press the DISP ENTER key The window closes To cancel the setting and close the window press the ESC key before pressing the DISP ENTER key 3 24 IM 04L02A01 01E Chapter 4 Switching Operation Screens 4 1 Operation Screens This chapter describes the screen operation screen used to display the measured computed data GROUP 1 spa pE 5008 ee EVENT Status display section Data display section eT TmT S m Sub menu Screen menu Displayed by pressing the DISP ENTER key The screen consists of the status display section and the data display section The operation screen includes trend digital bar graph alarm summary message summary memory summary report option historical trend and 4 screen display The arrow keys and the DISP ENTER key are used to switch the screen Screen menu Displayed when the DISP ENTER key is pressed Sub menu Displayed when the right arrow key is pressed while the screen menu is displayed The following operations are possible For trend digital and bar graph screens the displayed group can be automatically switched Recalling the historical trend at the time the alarm selected in the Alarm Summary occurred or the message sele
51. s Manual aN N Exceeded the number of channels which can be set See Communication Interface User s Manual aN ao A channel number cannot repeat in a group See section 7 6 A oa There is no character string saved in the clipboard Copy a character string to the clipboard aN O The character string saved in the clipboard is too long Paste a character string with the specified number of characters 61 There is no channel specified by the MATH expression See section 11 4 62 MATH expression grammar is incorrect See section 11 2 63 MATH expression sequence is incorrect See section 11 2 64 MATH upper and lower span values are equal See section 11 4 70 The range of the MATH constant is exceeded See section 11 4 71 Set range of the MATH constant is exceeded See section 11 6 81 All space or quit string cannot be specified See section 10 6 83 Duplicate used combination of user ID and password See section 10 6 when BT1 is equipped 85 The login password is incorrect See section 10 5 86 The key lock release password is incorrect See section 10 3 87 This key is locked See section 10 3 88 This function is locked See section 10 3 89 Press FUNC key to login See section 10 5 IM 04L02A01 01E 12 1 BunooyseqnoiL Ey 12 1 A List of
52. the Saved Data during Manual Save Procedure File header Up to 32 alphanumeric characters can be used to write a header comment to the display data event data manual sampled data TLOG data option and report data option Directory name When saving data to the external storage medium you can specify the name of the directory to which the files are to be saved All data other than the setup data display data event data manual sampled data TLOG data option report data option and screen image data are saved to this directory Setup data are saved to the root directory During auto save data is saved to the directory specified here During manual save data is saved to the directories with names consisting of the character string specified here followed by a sequence number see section 8 7 When saving the data residing in the internal memory to the external storage medium through key operation data is saved to the directories with names consisting of the character string specified here followed by A sequence number see section 9 2 Saved data during manual save When using manual save you can select whether to save all the data residing in the internal memory or only the data that have not previously been saved to the storage medium These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed
53. 008 8 088 8 AB900E 00 Hes v 8 196 8 964 8 743 3 9160006400 chad v 8 008 8 008 8 008 4 8060006 00 Has v 8 098 8 098 8 003 G B6000E 20 CHB v 8 132 8 186 8 026 2 6489006400 CHB v 8 128 8 174 8 012 2 391800E 08 Hes v 8 118 164 8 001 2 202000E 00 cHas v B 101 8 155 0 007 2 8290006408 CHIB v 8 098 8 144 8 018 1 793000E 86 CHIL v 8 286 8 282 8 299 5 718000E 08 CH12 v 0 293 0 289 0 297 5 8670006 00 cHI3 v 0 301 8 297 0 305 6 829000E 0 cHid v 0 307 0 304 0 311 6 147000E 88 CHIS v 8 312 8 308 8 315 6 235000E 08 CHIE v 0 315 0 312 0 313 6 3840006408 CH1 v 8 322 8 318 8 325 6 4470006 00 cHIB v 0 328 8 325 0 332 6 5680006 08 CH19 v 8 333 8 330 8 337 6 669800E 08 CH2 v 0 341 0 338 0 344 6 8210006408 CH21 v 8 325 8 322 8 329 6 5850006 00 CH22 v 8 332 8 329 0 336 6 6450006 08 CH23 v 8 339 8 336 0 343 6 7710006 00 CH24 v 0 347 0 344 0 351 6 932000E 00 CH25 v 0 351 8 349 0 356 7 8250006400 CH26 v 0 355 8 352 0 359 7 097000E 0A CH2 v 8 362 8 359 0 366 7 23200E 00 CH28 v 0 368 0 365 0 372 7 351000E 00 CH29 v 8 372 8 370 0 377 7 448000E 00 CH3 v 8 379 8 376 8 384 7 588000E 0A Status of data see section 11 11 IM 04L02A01 01E 1 3 Display Function 4 Screen Display Up to four different display formats can be displayed at once The following formats can be displayed Trend digital bar graph
54. 01E 3 1 suoleiodg uowWOD epoyy UNy SHed JO SoWeN el 3 1 Names of Parts and Functions 6 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 START key Used to start the data acquisition to the internal memory and display the waveform on the trend display Also starts computation and the report function when the computation function M1 is equipped STOP key Used to stop the data acquisition to the internal memory It also stops the updating of the waveform on the trend display If the model has the optional computation function M1 the report is stopped For computation you can select whether or not to stop the operation when the STOP key is pressed ESC key Used to cancel an operation Also used to return to thd peration mode from the setting mode MENU key Used to enter the setting mode Also used to return to the operation mode from the setting mode USER key Executes the action assigned to this key FUNC key Used to execute various functions in the operation mode For the functions that you can execute see section 3 4 Also used to enter the basic setting mode from the setting mode Soft keys When the FUNC key is pressed the functions are assigned to the soft keys and displayed at the bottom of the screen During the setting basic setting modes the parameters are assigned to the soft keys and displayed at the bottom of the screen Character number input key Used when entering characters and n
55. 1 m First CH Last CH DE Jar r Zone Lower a3 Upper 100 3 r Graph Division IM a2 Bar graph Normal 3 Scale position 1 1 4 Partial On Off Off The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure IM 04L02A01 01E 7 15 Ae dsiq oy Buiyesodo pue Buras 7 10 Setting the Scale Division Bar Graph Base Position Bar Graph and Scale Position Trend 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels For the channels set here Zone and Partial are also simultaneously set Setting the number of divisions for the scale 2 Division This is the number of scale divisions The scale is equally divided and scale marks are displayed at the divided position Select the number of divisions from 4 to 12 and C10 C10 The scale is equally divided into 10 sections by main scale marks and scale values are indicated at 0 30 50 70 and 100 positions For bar graph display Only the main scale marks are displayed For trend display See Explanation Setting the bar graph s base position 3 Bar graph base position of the bar graph Select normal or center Note When the bar graph is displayed vertically see section 7 13 the base position is fixed to Normal the bottom of the bar graph is the base position Setting the scale position on the trend screen 4 Scale position The Scale positi
56. 1 3 11 25 OVOMOW saat ee ee eR See 11 3 OVi eW Sree niir aa a aE ER NTA 1 10 P panel CUTOUT siren ecient iin relent 14 20 partial expanded display 0 0 0 0 eee cece eee eeereeneeeeeeees 1 8 password key lock password key login Mi periodic maintenance eseieeieeriisreiseriierrirerrriserr rnes 13 1 physical format e arenae eero des Nive eaaeo aat eenaa aiian eae 9 11 PNG ioniese we 9 13 PNE Ach seeseies eaten sna aac ase 9 1 Power computation 2 0 2 cece cette ee eeee eee teeeeeteteeeettteeeetaee 11 1 p wer Supply ieii se csecseciensnatedecsertessiecoscuactendecaedeczcures 2 18 2 19 power supply for transmitter 0 ee eeeeeeee eee eeeeeee 1 33 POWeOr SWITCH iit rinisin evecare 3 2 power terminals i 3 3 pretrigger ee 8 5 protective ground terminal cceceeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaees 3 3 Q QUICK ie E E EEE A EA E 9 11 R Ri EE EEE A EEE EEE 6 7 aaa a a Ds Eee tS E E T E 6 7 range computation channel eseeeeeeeeereeersrererees 11 11 jange Scaling i eraan ecdecoceccascussoedendesuctusbseenvect eres Eea E E E apa eae reducing the time axis a reference channel csccsecssesssseesseecseecesscsseesetesecsssoneseee reference junction COMPENSATION sssesseererreerrerrerrerrrr re 1 3 rofa S a aeaeaei eaa relational computation relative mode s releasing the alarm sessssesesssissssssssrsesrsrsrisnsrrrnesrnrnerensr
57. 11 10 On Off Sampling interval Number of samples 3 12 IM 04L02A01 01E 3 5 Configuring the Functions Setting Mode and Basic Setting Mode Other settings Item Setting Mode Basic Setting Mode Time Enter the current time 3 7 User key Action assignment 10 2 Key lock 10 4 Use Not use key lock Password Keys to lock enable disable the key lock Key login 10 6 Use Not use key login Auto logout On Off Use Not use user ID User name User ID Password Allow Prohibit basic setting mode Remote control option 10 9 Action assignment on remote terminals Report option 11 13 Report types Date Time of creation Report channel assignments Sum scale Display language 10 10 Select the display language Daylight savings time 10 14 Date Time to switch Temperature 10 15 Temperature unit Time zone 10 16 Time difference from GMT Batch option Application name 10 12 Supervisor name 10 12 Manager name 10 12 Batch number 10 12 Lot number 10 12 Use Not use batch function 10 13 Auto increment of batch number 10 12 Switching batch name time indication on memory summary 10 12 File management and data clearing Operations related to the internal memory Item Setting Mode Basic Setting Mode Initialization of settin
58. 2 000000E 04 3 000000E 04 Status Various events that occur while creating the report data are saved as status data and output in the report The positions of the various statuses in the report are fixed E Error an error is detected O Over an over range computation overflow is detected P Power failure a power disruption has occurred C Change the time has been changed Data size Size of the header section The following equation can be used to derive the size of the header section Title carriage return line feed serial number carriage return line feed file header carriage return line feed channel tag 8 19 x number of channels that are output carriage return line feed unit 6 9 x number of channels that are output carriage return line feed The size of the title varies depending on the report type as follows For hourly reports HOURLY 45 bytes For daily reports DAILY 44 bytes For weekly reports WEEKLY 45 bytes For monthly reports MONTHLY 46 bytes The size of the serial number is fixed to 38 bytes The size of the file header is fixed to 49 bytes The size of the carriage return line feed is fixed to 2 bytes Calculation example Monthly data for 30 channels 46 2 38 2 49 2 8 19 x 30 2 6 9 x 30 2 997 bytes IM 04L02A01 01E App 11 xipueddy Ea Appendix 2 Data Formats of ASCII Files Size of the data section of one report data set T
59. 2300 VAC or more for the signal wires on which a voltage of more than 30 VAC or 60 VDC is to be applied For all other wires use basic insulated wires dielectric strength of 1350 VAC To prevent electric shock attach the terminal cover after wiring and make sure not to touch the terminals CAUTION To prevent fire use signal wires having a temperature rating of 70 C or more Use the following circuit voltage for the connection to the alarm output terminal e When the connection is to Mains Circuits primary AC power source circuits 150 V or less When the connection is to circuits derived from Mains Circuits secondary circuits 250 V or less Mains Circuits voltage is less than 300 V and connection must be used by isolation transformer 1 Turn OFF the DX200 and remove the cover for the option terminal 2 Connect the alarm output cables to the terminal The terminal arrangement will be one of the figures shown on pages 2 10 and 2 11 depending on the alarm output relay option number of outputs and the F1 option 3 Replace the terminal cover and fasten it with screws Alarm Terminal Position Enclosed in parentheses are the relay numbers assigned to each option terminal Option Terminal 1 101 to 106 Option Terminal 2 111 to 116 Option Terminal 3 121 to 126 Option Terminal 4 131 to 136 2 10 IM 04L02A01 01
60. 4 screen display is trend all channel trend excluded digital bar graph overview alarm summary message summary and memory summary The following information is not displayed on the 4 screen display Measured computed values alarm type and cursor in the overview screen Scale on the trend screen Measured computed values upper lower limit of the display span and unit on the bar graph screen Cursor in the alarm summary message summary and memory summary Channel numbers are used on the following screens assigned to a quadrant even if the tag name is specified Trend screen in vertical waveform display Trend screen in hirizontal waveform display when the seven or more channels are assigned to the group Bar graph screen Expanding one of the screens Display one screen on the entire screen 1 w Pressing the DISP ENTER key selects one screen the title section is displayed in dark blue of the four screens Select the screen to be expanded using the arrow keys Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu Select EXPAND using the up and down arrow keys or Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu EXPAND is selected in the sub menu Eel sl al Pressing the DISP ENTER key expands the specified screen To close the menu without expanding the screen press the ESC key IM 04L02A01 01E 4 27 su 19 uodo BulysyMsS a Chapter 5 Measurement Channel Settings 5 1 Volt
61. 5 4 2 status messages we 12 8 STOP kyin aen a ee s ee 3 2 Storage TUNCHON ikisin dsa ea ane eal anal eta 1 20 storage medium drive ceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeteeeeenaeeees 3 2 style number SUD MENU M A A AE AEE T 4 1 sumscale report ssnin anni 11 23 s m scale TEOG sinnn n a a a a 11 16 SUMMETWIN ET scesa huria supervisor name SYST EOTS ci eeraa r aa bd acarstenededadencisecaadesstsaeasenvans SyStEM SrO ann e a e a aain T temperature Unitiec2 ce Ae eee 1 33 thermocouple 4 vec kapesi gd thal aes Bale A 1 2 time zone WING EE T S MEUP sssseeesesssiessisssritssiitertissttin ttit eee caeeeeeeaeeesneaeeeenaeeeee TLOG computation 11 16 TLOG data we 1 21 8 1 trond SCEO quriisnau bce 1 6 tigger iro a na e Aen aiden en eet 8 4 trigger remote signal eeeeseeieeeeeseserinrrrenerererrrnernes 1 32 trip line eee troubleshooting U UNit COMPUTATION sses 11 11 nit Scale rraren ar e einai ania 7 19 unit scaling s 5 10 unit square root computation 5 12 unit handling cece eee we 11 2 updating bar graph cece eee eceeeceeeesaeeeeeeeeaes 1 10 updating digital assisi unas ira 1 9 updating overview Updating trend 1 6 upper limit alarm ssie wee 1 22 upper limit on rate of change alarm esescceeeeeee 1 23 usage condition internal Memory eeeseseeeeeeerrerereere 4 3 user ID ni USE
62. 54 VA for DC 106 VA 240 V 76 VA for AC Note Do not use a supply voltage in the range 132 to 180 VAC as this may have adverse effects on the measurement accuracy applies to all models except the ones with the P1 option 2 18 IM 04L02A01 01E 2 9 Power Supply Wi ring Wiring Procedure 1 Turn OFF the DX200 and remove the transparent power terminal cover 2 Connect the power supply wires and the protective ground wire to the power terminals The proper torque for tightening the screw is 1 4 to 1 5 Nem 12 4 13 2 inchelbs except for P1 model for P1 model 100 240V AC 24V DC E 54VA MAX 50 60Hz 106VA MAX 24V AC 50 60Hz76VA MAX L N L NC Protective ground wire Power supply wires 3 Replace the power terminal cover and fasten it with screws For the Desktop Type A Except for P1 Model Precautions to Be Taken When Wiring the Power Supply To prevent electric shock and damage to the DX200 observe the following warnin to gs Before connecting the power cord ensure that the power supply voltage matches the voltage rating for the instrument and that it is within the maximum rated voltage for the power cord itself Confirm that the power is turned OFF before connecting the power cord To prevent electric shock and the possibility of fire use only the power cord for t
63. 6 On the all channel display the waveform of all channels that are set to display the trend see section 8 10 are displayed over the current group display See Explanation in section 4 3 This operation is carried out on the Historical Trend screen 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu TREND HISTORY is selected Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key Select ALL CHANNEL or GROUP CHANNEL using the up and down arrow keys fiz TREND HISTORY ALL CHANNEL Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key IM 04L02A01 01E 4 21 su 19 UO1 e19dQ BulyoyMsS g 4 6 Using the Historical Trend Changing the group on the display screen If all channel display is selected waveforms for all channels that are registered to display the trend see section 8 10 are displayed even when the group is changed 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu TREND HISTORY is selected 2 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key 3 Select the group using the up and down arrow keys 4 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the selected group To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key Expanding reducing the time axis The time axis can be expanded or reduced with respec
64. 6 000 V 20 00 to 20 00 V 50 00 to 50 00 V 0 0 to 1760 C 32 to 3200 F 0 0 to 1760 C 32 to 3200 F 0 0 to 1820 C 32 to 3308 F 200 0 to 1370 C 328 to 2498 F 200 0 to 800 C 328 0 to 1472 0 F 200 0 to 1100 C 328 0 to 2012 0 F 200 0 to 400 C 328 0 to 752 0 F 0 0 to 1300 C 32 to 2372 F 0 0 to 2315 C 32 to 4199 F 200 0 to 900 C 328 0 to 1652 0 F Pt100 4 200 0 to 400 C 200 0 to 600 C 328 0 to 752 0 F 328 0 to 1112 0 F JPt100 4 DCV input TTL 200 0 to 550 C 328 0 to 1022 0 F OFF less than 2 4 V ON more than 2 4 V Contact input Contact ON OFF 1 R S B K E J T N IEC584 1 1995 DIN IEC584 JIS C1602 1995 2 W W 5 Re W 26 Re Hoskins Mfg Co ASTM E988 3 L Fe CuNi DIN43710 U Cu CuNi DIN43710 4 Pt100 JIS C1604 1997 IEC751 1995 DIN IEC751 1996 JPt100 JIS C1604 1989 JIS C1606 1989 5 Measuring current i 1 mA A D Integration Time Thermocouple Burnout Filter Selectable from 20 ms 50 Hz 16 7 ms 60 Hz 100 ms 50 60 Hz for DX210 220 230 or AUTO automatic selection from 20 ms and 16 7 ms by detection of power supply frequency Burnout upscale downscale function can be switched ON OFF for each channel Burnout upscale downscale selectable DX204 DX208 Signal damping On off selectable for each channe
65. FOUNDATION Fieldbus interface For models with CF1 DAQSTANDARD IM 04L41B01 61E Included in the accompanying CD ROM User s Manual Describes the functions and operating procedures of DAQSTANDARD that comes with the package Control of Pollution IM 04L01A01 92C Gives a description of pollution control Caused by the Product Notes This manual describes the DX200 style number S4 For functions that have been added or changed on the DX200 style number S4 see appendix 3 The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of continuing improvements to the DX200 s performance and functions Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents However should you have any questions or find any errors please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Copying or reproducing all or any part of the contents of this manual without YOKOGAWA s permission is strictly prohibited The TCP IP software used in this product and the documentation for that TCP IP software are based in part on BSD Networking Software Release 1 licensed from The Regents of the University of California Trademarks e vigilantplant and DAQSTATION are registered trademarks of Yokogawa Electric Corporation Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Adobe and Acrobat are regis
66. Measurable Range You can select the Input range that is appropriate for the input signal for DC voltage Thermocouple RTD and digital input For example R S B K E J T N W L and U are available input ranges for Thermocouple For each Input range a measurable range is defined for example the measurable range for R of Thermocouple is O 0 C to 1760 C For details see section 14 1 Burnout When measuring temperature using a thermocouple and the thermocouple burns out you can specify the measurement result to be set to positive over range or negative over range Burnout can be set on each measurement channel The initial setting is set so that burnout is not indicated For the setting procedure see section 5 9 1 Positive over range is a condition in which the input signal is over the upper limit of the measurable range The measured value is indicated as xXxxXxx 2 Negative over range is a condition in which the input signal is below the lower limit of the measurable range The measured value is indicated as kxxxx Reference junction compensation RJC When measuring the temperature using a thermocouple the reference junction compensation can be used You can select whether to use the reference junction compensation provided by the DX200 or external reference junction compensation If you are using external reference junction compensation you will also set
67. Messages Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref section 90 No permission to enter to the SETUP mode See sections 10 5 and 10 6 91 Password is incorrect See sections 10 3 and 10 5 92 Press ESC key to change to the operation mode Press the ESC key 93 String including space or all space cannot be specified Spaces are not allowed in the Web user name and password 94 More than one address cannot be specified Multiple addresses cannot be specified Only a single sender is allowed 100 IP address doesn t belong to class A B or C See Communication Interface User s Manual 101 The result of the masked IP address is all Os or 1s See Communication Interface User s Manual 102 SUBNET mask is incorrect See Communication Interface User s Manual 103 The net part of default gateway is not equal to that of IP address See Communication Interface User s Manual 104 FTP client failed because the memory mode is manual See Communication Interface User s Manual e Execution Errors Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref section 150 This action is not possible because sampling is in progress See sections 8 5 and 8 6 151 This action is not possible during sampling or calculating See sections 8 5 8 6 and 11 3 152 This action is not possible because saving is in progress Wait till the saving ends 153 This action is not possible because formatting i
68. Mode Other key operations e START STOP Starts stops acquiring measured computed data For the operating procedure see sections 8 5 and 8 6 The waveform on the trend display also starts stops When the computation function M1 is equipped computation and the report function also start stop For the operating procedure see sections 11 3 and 11 12 USER Executes the assigned function See section 10 1 Character number input key Enters passwords to release key lock or to login See sections 10 3 and 10 5 Enters a name for the 4 screen display See section 7 15 Functions of the Setting and Basic Setting Modes Configure functions using the arrow keys the DISP ENTER key the soft keys and the character number input keys See 3 5 Configuring the functions and chapters 5 through 11 for detail Also see section 9 1 to save the setup data IM 04L02A01 01E 3 9 suoleiodg uoWWOD epoyy UNy SHed JO SOWeN el 3 5 Configuring the Functions Setting Mode and Basic Setting Mode Setting Mode and Basic Setting Mode Basic Setting Mode The basic setting mode is used to change the basic configuration of various functions The basic setting mode cannot be entered while data acquisition or computation is in progress or the storage medium is being accessed Setting Mode The setting mode is used to change the functions for each channel and the display specifications All items except the ones listed below can be changed whi
69. On models with the optional BT1 batch function the date and time and batch number and lot number are alternately displayed every 5s when Use batch function see section 10 13 is being set 4 ON OFF state of the measured computed data acquisition A and B are displayed alternately Data acquisition in progress or waiting for the event data trigger C Data acquisition is suspended Note For event data that starts acquiring data upon receiving a trigger the indicator indicates that the data acquisition is in progress even when it is in the trigger wait state The trigger wait state can be identified using the bar graph described in item 6 IM 04L02A01 01E 4 2 Using the Status Display Section 5 The usage condition of the display data storage area in the internal memory This is displayed when display data acquisition is enabled Bar graph Displays the used space of the display data storage area Time period The remaining time for acquiring the display data When the remaining time is less than one hour the time is displayed in units of minutes Remaining time Unit Note Greater than or equal to 100 days Percentage of the remaining area with respect to the display data storage area Greater than or equalto 100 hours days unit less than one day is rounded off less than 100 days Greater than or equal to 60 minutes hours unit less than one hour is rounded off less than 100 hours Le
70. This function allows only certain users to access the DX200 The users are distinguished by their name user IDs and passwords You can select whether or not to use User IDs In addition you can set whether or not to allow operations in the basic setting mode for each user Up to 7 users can be registered For the key login function with Batch function BT1 option see section 1 7 For the setting and operating procedure see section 10 6 and 10 5 respectively A list of phenomena that occurred can be displayed in the order of occurrence for the following items Error messages 50 most recent messages A log of key login and logout 50 most recent logins A log of communication commands 200 most recent commands A log of file transfers using the FTP client function 50 most recent transfers A log of e mail transmissions the 50 most recent transmissions A log of Web operations the 50 most recent operations For details related to the display format see section 10 7 Error Log Example Displays the date and time of the error occurrence error code number and the message The number of the log displayed at the last line of the screen total number of logs Date and time of occurrence Error code cial message 805 085 Time No Nessage Jan 12 2008 00 36 47 281 Not enough free space on media Jan 12 2088 00 36 19 218 Media has not been inserted Jan 11 2888 84 15 38 885 The input numerical value exceed
71. Zip disk ATA flash memory card Note If the key lock function for the storage medium is engaged the Zip disk cannot be ejected even if the eject button is pressed Release the key lock before attempting to eject the Zip disk See section 10 4 Procedure when the Zip disk cannot be ejected If the Zip disk cannot be removed by performing the steps given in the Removing the storage medium section carry out the following steps to remove it 1 Open the front cover by pressing down on the knob that is located in the center of the upper section of the cover and pulling forward 2 Inserta pin of approx 1 mm in diameter into the eject button hole and press slowly This will cause the Zip disk to be ejected N Zip disk eject hole S Eject button Insert a pin Explanation Formatting external storage media Format the external storage medium before use The external storage medium is formatted to the following types using the DX200 Format type Floppy disk 2 HD 1 44 MB Zip disk FDISK 1 partition hard disk format ATA flash memory card FDISK 1 partition hard disk format External storage media formatted on other devices can be used as long as the format type is the same as those indicated above 3 6 IM 04L02A01 01E 3 4 Run Mode There are three run modes on the DX200 operation setting and basic setting This section describes the functions and relationships of the three modes Mode Types Power ON
72. a numerical value Enter a value in the allowed range and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 Span lower limit and span upper limit cannot be set to the same value Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Explanation Measurable range The following table shows the mode range and measurable range Mode Range Measurable Range C Measurable Range F Note TC R 0 0 to 1760 0 C 32 to 3200 F IEC584 DIN IEC584 JIS C1602 1995 S 0 0 to 1760 0 C 32 to 3200 F IEC584 DIN IEC584 JIS C1602 1995 B 0 0 to 1820 0 C 32 to 3308 F IEC584 DIN IEC584 JIS C1602 1995 K 200 0 to 1370 0 C 328 to 2498 F IEC584 DIN IEC584 JIS C1602 1995 E 200 0 to 800 0 C 328 0 to 1472 0 F IEC584 DIN IEC584 JIS C1602 1995 J 200 0 to 1100 0 C 328 0 to 2012 0 F IEC584 DIN IEC584 JIS C1602 1995 T 200 0 to 400 0 C 328 0 to 752 0 F IEC584 DIN IEC584 JIS C1602 1995 N 0 0 to 1300 0 C 32 to 2372 F IEC584 DIN IEC584 JIS C1602 1995 WwW 0 0 to 2315 0 C 32 to 4199 F W 5 Re W 26 Re Hoskins Mfg Co ASTM E988 L 200 0 to 900 0 C 328 0 to 1652 0 F Fe CuNi DIN 43710 U 200 0 to 400 0 C 328 0 to 752 0 F Cu CuNi DIN 43710 RTD Pt10
73. and thus this relay is de energized also upon power off including a power failure Relay Behavior De energized on failure NO c NC NO c NC NO c NC Normal Failure Power off NO C and NC denote normally opened common and normally closed respectively Operation at Memory End This function activates the relay output when the remaining space time in the internal memory or the external storage medium becomes small The relay is energized if the memory end is detected The relay action cannot be reversed to de energized on memory end When the relay is energized save the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium during manual save or use another external storage medium during auto save The memory end detection operates as follows When using auto save When using auto save and the storage medium is inserted the relay is energized when the remaining space on the storage medium falls to 10 At this point the icon of the external storage medium on the status display section on the screen turns to red from green See section 4 2 When using manual save When the type of data to be acquired is display data only or display data and event data When the remaining time for storing the display data in the internal memory falls to the specified time the relay is energized When the type of data to be acquired is event data only In the Free mode the relay is energized when the remaining time for storing the event
74. are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press ew Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears To display the setting screen press the soft key OB Keylock aP Use Not HFE i Password 2 START Free STOP Free MENU Free _ USER Free DISP ENTER Fre 3 Alarm ACK Free _ Nath Free Write memory Free Message Nai Manual sample Nedia Free The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Use Not Select Use or Not If Use is selected various parameters are displayed Use Use key lock Not Do not use key lock 2 Password Set the password used to release the key lock in the operation mode Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a string Enter the string up to 6 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 3 For each parameter select whether or not to enable the key lock Free Disable Lock Enable Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 10 4 IM 04L02A01 01E 10 4 S
75. batch function Not Do not use the batch function Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key IM 04L02A01 01E 10 21 suonoun 13410 2 10 14 Using the Daylight Savings Time Adjustment Function Procedure When the specified time is reached at which the daylight savings time adjustment is to be enabled the time set at Summer the DX200 automatically sets the clock ahead by one hour Example If the time is set to 9 o clock on June 1 the time is set ahead to 10 o clock June 1 When the specified time is reached at which the daylight savings time adjustment is to be disabled the time set at Winter the DX200 automatically sets the clock back by one hour Example If the time is set to 9 o clock on December 1 the time is set back to 8 o clock December 1 The daylight savings time adjustment function is set using year month day and time Set the time for every year The year is specified using the lower two digits 00 to 79 represent year 2000 to 2079 80 to 99 represent 1980 to 1999 Setting the time at which the daylight savings time adjustment is to be enabled disabled These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate p
76. below to replace the fuse 1 Turn OFF the power switch 2 Disconnect the DX200 from the main power supply 3 While pressing the fuse carrier located to the right of the power switch turn it counterclockwise approximately 45 degrees The carrier and the fuse will slide out 4 Replace with a new fuse insert the carrier in the fuse holder and turn it clockwise while pressing the carrier to fix it in place 13 2 IM 04L02A01 01E 13 3 Calibration To maintain the measurement accuracy we recommend the DX200 be calibrated once a year Calibration service is also provided by YOKOGAWA dealers For details contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Required Instruments For calibrating the DX200 calibration instruments with the following resolution are necessary Recommended Instruments DC voltage standard YOKOGAWA Model 2552 or equivalent Main specifications Accuracy of output in the range 20 mV to 20 V 0 005 Decade resistance box Yokogawa M amp C Model 2793 01 or equivalent Main specifications Accuracy of output in the range 0 1 to 500 Q 0 01 2 mQ Resolution 0 001 Q To purchase these instruments contact the supplier of the DX200 Calibration procedure 1 Connect the DX200 and the calibration instruments as shown in the following figure and allow the instruments to warm up adequately The warm up time for the DX200 is at least 30 minutes 2 Che
77. by Remote Control function is turned ON See section 10 9 Alarm trigger The trigger condition is satisfied when any of the alarms occur IM 04L02A01 01E 8 5 wnip n eabe10jg jeusa xq 0 Burnes pue uoljsinboy eead el 8 2 Function to Acquire Display Data and Event Data Number of data points that can be acquired and sampling length the maximum auto save interval for display data the maximum data length for event data This section describes the number of data points of the display data event data that can be acquired and the sampling length Use the information when determining the amount of time it takes for the internal memory to become full or when deciding the channels to be acquired or the sampling interval The possible range of menus of the auto save interval of display data and the data length of event data is displayed in the soft keys based on the information described here Data format The display data have minimum and maximum values for each sampling interval Event data consists of instantaneous values The number of data bytes per channel is shown in the following table Data Type Measurement Channel Computation Channel Display data 4 bytes channel 8 bytes channel Event data 2 bytes channel 4 bytes channel Example Data format when the data of measurement channels 1 to 4 and a computation channel 31 are acquired Display data 1st scan CH1 CH1 CH2 CH2 CH3 CH3 CH4 CH4 CH31 CH31 min imax
78. ch External storage 1 Floppy disk medium 2 100 MB Zip disk ATA flash memory card Language 250 MB Zip disk Options English deg F DST DAQSTANDARD Software included AR1 Alarm output relay 2 relays remote control AR2 Alarm output relay 4 relays remote control A3 Alarm output relay 6 relays A4 Alarm output relay 12 relays A5 Alarm output relay 24 relays BT1 Batch function C2 RS 232 interface C3 RS 422 485 interface CF1 Fieldbus Communication Interface D5 VGA output IFA FAIL memory end output relay H2 Clamped input terminal H5 J Desktop type M1 Computation function report function included N1 Cu10 Cu25 RTD input 3 terminal isolated RTD N2 3 terminal isolated RTD P1 24 VDC AC power supply R1 Remote control 24 VDC Power supply for transmitter 4 loops 24 VDC Power supply for transmitter 8 loops 1 AR1 AR2 A3 A4 and A5 cannot be specified simultaneously 2 If F1 is specified A5 cannot be specified 3 H5 Can only be specified when P1 is simultaneously specified H5D UL CSA cable H5F VDE cable H5R SAA cable H5J BS cable 4 N2 can only be specified on DX210 DX220 and DX230 models 5 C2 C3 and CF1 cannot be specified simultaneously 6 If CF1 is specified make sure to specify M1 7 TPS4 TPS8 and A5 cannot be specified simultaneously 8 If TPS8 is specified A4 and F1 cannot be specified 9 This prod
79. channel Output relay number for the computation channel Constant 11 6 Constants K01 to K30 8 Tag 7 1 Tag names of the computation channels TLOG 11 8 Timer number used in TLOG sum unit Rolling average 11 10 Turn On Off the rolling average Sampling interval and the number of samples for the rolling average Alarm delay time 6 3 11 Batch set 10 12 Application name Supervisor name Manager name Batch number Lot number Auto increment of batch number Switching batch name time indication on memory summary 3 16 IM 04L02A01 01E 3 5 Configuring the Functions Setting Mode and Basic Setting Mode The menu screen and items of the basic setting mode The menu screen and items of the basic setting mode are as follows Enclosed in parentheses are reference sections Basic setting mode Alarm A D Temperature Erm Henory Memory and trend Memory timeup Keylock Key login Oou Save Load Initialize Option To Save Load Initialize menu below a Communi cation DS a7 Web E tai l End End 8 AUX Time zone See the DX100 DX200 Communication Interface User s Manual Basic setting mode 3 Keylock Key login 4 Save Load Initialize 5 Option 6 Communi cation 7 is Eng Next 2 2 Save Load Initialize menu Save Load Initialize Web E Hai See the DX100 DX200 BE 2x Tine zone Com
80. channel is turned Off Timer Mode and Action Timer mode There are two timer modes absolute mode and relative mode Absolute mode Timer expires at times determined from the reference time and the interval The reference time is specified by the hour 00 to 23 Example 1 Reference time 14 00 Interval 12 h The expiration time is set to 2 00 2 00 AM and 14 00 2 00 PM Example 2 Reference time 00 00 Interval 10 min The expiration time is set to 0 00 0 10 0 20 23 40 and 23 50 For example if the computation is started at 9 36 the time expiration will occur at 09 40 09 50 10 00 and so on Relative mode The timer is started when the computation is started The timer is repeated at each interval The timer is suspended while the power is lost Example Interval 00 15 The timer expires every 15 minutes after the computation is started Setting timers Timers are set in the basic setting mode For detail see section 11 9 Setting the timer No for TLOG computation The number of the timer used by the channel computing the TLOG is selected from 1 2 and 3 in the setting mode For the setting procedure see section 11 8 About the sum scale of the TLOG SUM In the sum computation TLOG SUM of time series data are summed over the scan interval However for flow values that have units s min or h a simple summation results in the actual value not matching the computed result because the scan interval and the u
81. checked An alarm occurs when the amount of decrease becomes greater than or equal to the specified value 2 Can be specified only on measurement channels Upper limit on rate of change alarm Lower limit on rate of change alarm va R alarm 7 Measured Measured value T2 value Variati Variation ariation TT IT2 T1 LE Lak Tr 4 l f ka sr alarm t t2 Time gt t ta Time gt gt Interval Interval te t te ti The interval is defined by the following equation and is set in terms of the number of measured data points Interval scan interval x number of measurements 1 23 SUOI OUNZ JO MAIAJBAQ a 1 5 Alarm Function Alarm Hysteresis This applies to upper H and lower L limit alarms on measurement channels A width hysteresis can be specified on the value used to set or release the alarm This prevents the alarm from being set or released repetitively when the measured value is fluctuating around the alarm value The hysteresis is fixed to 0 5 of the display span display scale if the range is set to Scale The initial setting is ON Upper Limit Alarm H Alarm occurrence i Alarm set point 1V Hysteresis approx 0 5 Alarm release Measured value Lower Limidt Alarm L Alarm release Measured value 1v Hysteresis approx 0 5 L Alarm set point Alarm occurrence Alarm Output Rela
82. coarser than the value derived using a span of 100 Because the display becomes rough set this value so that it is greater than 100 6 Unit Set the unit Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a character string Enter the unit up to 6 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select YES using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key For the range and measurable range see section 5 1 Voltage Input Setting Computing equation The DX200 uses the following square root computation Using the following definitions e Vmin Lower limit of span Vmax Upper limit of span Fmin Lower limit of scale Fmax Upper limit of scale Vx Input voltage Fx Scaling value ET E T ea V max Vmin When the value inside the square root is negative when Fmin lt Fmax xxxxx or when Fmin gt Fmax x is displayed 5 12 IM 04L02A01 01E 5 7 Skip Setting These channels will not be measured or displayed The range cannot be changed while data acquisition or computation is in progress Procedure These procedures are carried out in the
83. data you will be able to manage the stored data By using the key login function in combination with this function the operators that are allowed to store data on the DX200 can be restricted and identified Adding Batch Information to the Measured Computed Data Display Data and Event Data The following information can be added to the display data and event data acquired to the internal memory For the setting procedure see section 10 12 The operator can change the batch number lot number and comment for each lot In addition the lot number can be automatically increased by one when one lot is complete Serial number of the DX200 the number written on the name plate of the DX200 Application name up to 16 characters Supervisor name up to 16 characters Manager name up to 16 characters Batch name Batch number up to 16 characters Lot number 0 to 9999 Start information Start date and time and user name up to 16 characters Only when the key login function is used Stop information Stop date and time and user name up to 16 characters Only when the key login function is used Comment information Comment up to 32 characters x 3 lines The date and time when comment was written User name of the user who wrote comment up to 16 characters Only when the key login function is used Identifying Operators Users by using the Key Login Function By using the key log
84. data in the internal memory falls to the specified time In the Trigger or Rotate mode the relay is not energized There is no memory end output IM 04L02A01 01E 1 31 SUO OUNZ JO MAIAJBAQ a 1 8 Other Functions Relay behavior Energized on memory end NO Cc NC NO c NC NO c NC Normal Memory end Power off NO C and NC denote normally opened common and normally closed respectively For the setting procedure see section 10 8 Remote Control Function R1 option When a contact or open collector signal is applied to the remote control terminal a predetermined action is carried out Arbitrary actions can be assigned to the eight remote control terminals The available actions are listed below For the setting procedure see section 10 9 Name of Action Remote Signal Action None No operation Start Stop Edge Start stop acquiring data to the internal memory Sections 8 5 and 8 6 Trigger Trigger Trigger to start acquiring event data to the internal memory valid only when event data are specified to be acquired to the internal memory and the trigger used to start the acquisition is set to external trigger Section 8 11 Alarm ACK Trigger Release alarm display relay output valid only when the operation of the alarm display or output relay is set to hold Section 6 4 Time adj Trigger Adjust the internal clock to the nearest hour Computation Math Edge Start stop co
85. data of the file LOAD 1 PNL LOAD 2 PNL or LOAD 3 PNL that is saved in the external storage medium are loaded for use The file LOAD 1 PNL LOAD 2 PNL or LOAD 3 PNL must be created and saved to the external storage medium beforehand Writing messages Message1 to Message8 Remote input Trigger 250 ms or more e Displays a message at the position corresponding to the time when the signal was applied on the trend screen The displayed message is also written to the internal memory When the data acquisition to the internal memory is stopped messages cannot be displayed or written Applying a remote signal produces no effect Snapshot Snapshot Remote input signal Trigger 250 ms or more Saves the current screen image data to the external storage medium The snapshot function operates in all modes operation mode setting mode and basic setting mode Error messages even if they are displayed are not saved Remote input signal The above operations are carried out on the rising or falling edge of the remote signal edge or the ON signal lasting at least 250 ms trigger Rising Falling edge Trigger Rising Falling gt 250 ms or more For contact inputs the remote signal rises when the contact switches from open to closed and falls when the contact switches from closed to open For open collector signals the remote signal rises when the collector signal voltage level of the re
86. data to the external storage medium the Auto save interval box is displayed under Time div Auto save interval is the interval at which the display data residing in the internal memory are saved to the external storage medium The selectable values for Auto save interval vary depending on the Time div setting For the setting procedure see section 8 8 The display data sampling interval and the speed of movement of waveforms along the time axis The following table shows the display update rate display data sampling interval and the speed of movement of waveforms along the time axis Display Update 15s 30s 1min 2min 5min 10min 20min 30min 1h 2h 4h 10h Rate div Display data 05 1 2 4 10 20 40 60 120 240 480 1200 sampling interval s Speed of movement 2376 1188 594 297 119 59 30 20 10 5 25 1 0 of waveforms approximate value mm h for DX204 and DX208 only IM 04L02A01 01E Ae dsiq oy Buiyesodo pue Buras 7 4 Using Message Strings Trend Arbitrary character strings can be registered They can be displayed on the trend screen or stored along with the display event data Number of messages 8 Number of characters Up to 16 alphanumeric characters A list of messages can be displayed on the message summary screen See section 4 5 For models with the batch function BT1 option messages 1 2 and 3 can be altered from the operation screen to be used Note When data acquisition to the
87. electromagnetic fields close to the DX200 Operating the DX200 in strong magnetic fields can cause errors in the measurements Bad angle for viewing the screen Because the DX200 uses a 10 4 TFT color LCD it is difficult to view the display from an extreme angle Please install the DX200 so that the monitor can be viewed from the front IM 04L02A01 01E 2 3 00ZXd y Buisp 310499 s 2 2 Installing the DX200 Installation Procedure Panel Mount Type The DX200 should be mounted on a steel panel of thickness 2 mm to 26 mm 1 Insert the DX200 from the front side of the panel 2 As shown in the figure below mount the DX200 to the panel using the mounting brackets that came with the package Use two brackets to support the top and bottom or the left and right sides of the case Remove the seal that is covering the holes for the mounting brackets beforehand The proper torque for tightening the mounting screws is 0 7 to 0 9 Nem e Mount the DX200 to the panel according to the procedure below First attach the two mounting brackets and temporarily fasten the attachment screws Next fix the DX200 in place by tightening the attachment screws with the appropriate torque When the DX200 is approximately perpendicular to the panel as you fasten the screws press the mounting bracket against the case so that they are in contact with each other CAUTION Tightening the screws too much can deform the case or damage
88. error message is returned via the communication interface It is not displayed on the screen Code Message 360 Output interface must be chosen from Ethernet or RS by using XO command 361 The memory data is not saved for the communication output 362 There are no data to send NEXT or RESEND 363 All data have already been transferred e Maintenance and Test Communication Command Errors An English error message is returned via the communication interface It is not displayed on the screen Code Message 390 Command error 391 Delimiter error 392 Parameter error 393 No permission 394 No such connection 395 Use quit to close this connection 396 Failed to disconnect 397 No TCP control block Other Communication Errors An English error message is returned via the communication interface It is not displayed on the screen Code Message 400 Input username 401 Input password 402 Select username from admin or user 403 Login incorrect try again 404 No more login at the specified level is acceptable 420 Connection has been lost 421 The number of simultaneous connection has been exceeded 422 Communication has timed out Note __ For information regarding the communication function of the DX200 see the DX100 DX200 Communication Interface User s Manual IM 04L02A01 17E IM 04L0
89. excluding a delay of 1 second maximum caused each time the power is turned on A built in lithium battery backs up the setup parameters battery life approximately ten years at room temperature ON OFF and password can be set Power on with log out mode and all key operations are not permitted User name User ID and password are required to enter the operation mode Each terminal to ground terminal 20 MQ or greater at 500 VDC IM 04L02A01 01E 14 7 General Specifications Dielectric strength Safety and EMC Standards CSA UL CE EMC Low voltage C Tick Power supply to ground terminal 1500 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 minute except for P1 model Power supply to ground terminal 500 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 minute for P1 model Contact output terminal to ground terminal 1500 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 minute Measuring input terminal to ground terminal 1500 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 minute Between measuring input terminals 1000 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 minute except for b terminal of RTD input of DX210 DX220 and DX230 Between remote control terminal to ground terminal 500 VDC 1 minute Certified by CSA22 2 No 61010 1 Installation category II Pollution degree 2 Measurement category II Certified by UL61010 1 CSA NRTL C Certified by UL61010 1 models with H5 are excluded Complies with EN61326 Emission Class A Immunity Annex A Complies with EN61000 3 2 Complies with EN61000 3 3 Complies w
90. hold Activated Displays alarm information Mark Red Released Mark Green Hold Activated Displays alarm information Mark Blinks in red Stops blinking with alarm ACK Released Mark Blinks in green Stops blinking with alarm ACK Alarm output relay option Relay Hold Non Hold Alarm Alarm Indication Non hold Activated Active Released Idle Hold Activated Active temporarily suspend with alarm ACK Released Idle with alarm ACK Non hold Hold Alarm ACK Alarm ACK Activated i Alarm Released H 2r Activated Alarm output Lp L relay Released Note When the basic setting mode is entered the activated released condition of the previous alarm output relay is held Alarm detection is not carried out in the basic setting mode and you cannot release the alarm output relay 6 4 IM 04L02A01 01E 6 2 Alarm Setting This section describes the procedures related to setting the alarm specification on each channel The auxiliary alarm function are set in the basic setting mode See section 6 4 Note Set the measurement range before setting the alarm All of the alarm settings of a channel are canceled in the following cases When the input type is changed Volt TC etc When the input range is changed When the upper and lower limits of the span or scale are changed on channels that are set to scaling or square root computation including changes in the decimal point position Ifthe range setting is set to Skip alarm s
91. image data Trigger Key operation communication command or remote input signals R1 option Data format png format Output External storage medium or communication interface 14 8 IM 04L02A01 01E 14 4 Alarm Function Specifications Number of alarms Up to four alarms for each channel Alarm types Upper and lower limits delay upper and lower limits difference upper and lower limits and upper limit and lower on rate of change Alarm delay time Selectable from 1 s to 3600 s for each channel Interval time of rate of change alarms The scan interval times 1 to 15 common to all channels Display The alarm status type is displayed in the numerical value display area upon occurrence of an alarm A common alarm indication is also displayed in the status display section The alarm indication behavior non hold or hold type can be selectable for common to all channels Hysteresis On 0 5 of display span off selectable applied to upper and lower limits alarms common to all measurement channels Relay outputs option Number of points 2 4 6 12 or 24 points Relay action Energized de energized hold non hold AND OR reflash actions selectable The alarm relay condition is held even in the basic setting mode Alarm information The date and time of alarm occurrences recoveries alarm types etc Up to 120 latest alarms are stored in the internal memory Displayed on the alarm summary screen suoneoyiseds z
92. internal memory is stopped messages cannot be displayed or written For Models without the Batch Function BT1 Option Procedure Displaying a message on the trend screen Writing a message to the internal memory Operation using the FUNC key This operation is carried out in the operation mode 1 Press the FUNC key to display the soft keys 2 Press the Message soft key Eight soft keys for the messages and a window containing a list of messages are displayed Message C 3 Press the soft key corresponding to the message you wish to display A message mark time and the message are displayed on the trend screen Hessage list Hessagel Hessage2 Hessage3 Hessaged Hessage5 Hessage6 Hessage Hessage8 Nessagel Nessage2 Nessage3 Messaged Hessaged Message6 Next 1 2 Operation using the USER key This is an operation carried out when one of Message1 to Message8 is assigned to the USER key 1 Press the USER key to display a message on the trend screen and write a message to the internal memory 7 4 IM 04L02A01 01E 7 4 Using Message Strings Trend For Models with the Batch Function BT1 Option Procedure Displaying a message on the trend screen Writing a message to the internal memory Changing message strings Operation using the FUNC key This operation is carried out in the operation mode 1 Press the FUNC key to display the soft keys 2 Press the Message soft ke
93. key operation to activate the trigger turn this parameter On External When using remote control function option to activate the trigger turn this parameter On Alarm When using alarms as triggers turn this parameter On If the Alarm parameter is turned On trigger is activated if any one of the alarms occurs If Alarm parameter is turned On and the alarm was already activated when the START key is pressed trigger is also activated OR logic applies to the Key External and Alarm parameters If any one of the conditions that are turned On is met the trigger is activated Acquiring display data and event data 2 Note If Auto auto save is selected in step 1 and E D is selected in step 2 set the auto save interval for the display data See section 8 8 Data type Select E D 8 24 IM 04L02A01 01E 8 11 Setting the Method of the Display Event Data Acquisition Basic Setting Mode Explanation Boxes used to set the method for event data acquisition are displayed The procedures used to set each parameter are the same as those described for Acquiring only the event data In step 4 Free is not selectable Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Choices for the data length The m
94. last channel Set the channels that will measure the difference Mode Set the mode to Delta Type Select the input type from Volt TC RTD and DI Range If the type is Volt enter the input range If it is TC or RTD enter the type of TC or RTD If it is DI enter Level or Cont Upper and lower limits of span Set the upper and lower limits of the display span Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter a value in the allowed range and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 For TC or RTD input the display span cannot exceed the difference between the maximum and the minimum of the input range Example For TC type L the measurable range is 200 0 to 900 0 C The maximum display span is 1100 0 C For DC voltage input the display span cannot exceed the measurable range The upper limit and the lower limit cannot be set to the same value IM 04L02A01 01E 5 7 sBunjes jouueyy juowoinseoyy eo 5 4 Difference Computation Delta Setting Explanation 6 Ref CH Set the reference channel see Explanation Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys a
95. min max min max min max min max 2nd scan CH1 CH1 CH2 CH2 CH3 CH3 CH4 CH4 CH31 CH31 min imax min max min max min max min max CH1 CH1 CH2 CH2 CH3 CH3 CH4 CH4 CH31 CH31 min imax min max min i max min max min max 2 bytes binary data Event data 1st scan CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH31 2nd scan CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH31 to nth scan CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH31 2 bytes binary data Internal memory capacity The capacity of the internal memory that is used for data storage is 1 2 MB The internal memory is allocated depending on the acquired data as follows Data being acquired Internal Memory Capacity Display data only 1 2 MB Display data and event data Display data 0 9 MB Event data 0 3 MB Event data only 1 2 MB 8 6 IM 04L02A01 01E 8 2 Function to Acquire Display Data and Event Data Maximum number of data points per channel that can be acquired The following table shows the maximum number of data points per channel that can be acquired Data being acquired Maximum number of data points per channel Display data only 1 200 000 bytes number of measurement channels x 4 number of computation channels x 8 Except the maximum number of data points is 100 000 Display data and event data Display data 900 000 bytes number of measurement channels x 4 number of computation channels x 8 Except the max
96. names or channel numbers are to be displayed on the operation screen trend screen digital screen etc The initial setting is channel number display Tag names are set in the setting mode These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears To display the setting screen press the soft key 8 Press Press AUX Tag Channel 1 Henory alarm th Language English Partial Use The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Tag Channel Select Tag or Channel Tag Display tag names Channel Display channel numbers Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Note _____ If a channel is set to display the tag but the tag name is not entered the channel will display the channel number IM 04L02A01 01E 7 3 Setting the Display Update Rate Trend Procedure Explanati
97. oOo Setting on a measurement channel To display the setting screen press the soft key ol Setting on a computation channel option To display the setting screen press the soft key 6 1 First CH Last CH Jar Jar r Zne _ Lower Mi Upper 10 2 _ 2 r rah Division 18 Bar graph Normal Scale position 1 r Partial On Off Off The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels For the channels set here Graph and Partial are also simultaneously set 2 Zone upper limit and lower limit The waveform is displayed between the Upper and Lower limits The Upper and Lower limits are set as percentages of the display span Lower 0 to 95 Upper 5 to 100 Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter a value and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 IM 04L02A01 01E 7 13 Ae dsiq oy Buiyesodo pue Buras 7 9 Using Zone Displays Trend Note Lower must be a smaller value than Upper The width of the zone upper limit lower limit must be greater than or equal to 5 Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER k
98. of data points 30 000 data points When the event data sampling interval is 1 s Sampling length 30 000 data points x 1 s 30 000 s approx 8 hours Measurement channel 12 computation channel 6 Data Maximum number of data points and sampling length Display data Maximum number of data points 900 000 12 CH x 4 bytes 6 x 8 bytes 9 375 When the display update rate is 30 min div 60 s sampling interval Sampling length 9 375 data points x 60 s 562 500 s approx 6 5 days Event data Maximum number of data points 300 000 12 CH x 2 bytes 6 x 4 bytes 6 250 When the event data sampling interval is 1 s Sampling length 6 250 data points x 1 s 6 250 s approx 1 7 hours 8 8 IM 04L02A01 01E 8 3 Function to Acquire Other Data Manual sampled data When the manual sample key is pressed the instantaneous values of all channels excluding the measurement channels that are set to Skip and the computation channels that are turned Off are acquired Up to 50 data sets can be stored in the internal memory When this number is exceeded data are overwritten from the oldest data Note The number of manual sampled data in the internal memory can be confirmed with the memory summary Section 4 5 TLOG data option TLOG data are acquired at each time interval set by timers Up to 400 data sets can be stored in the internal memory When this number is exceeded data are overwritten
99. of the screen 4 22 IM 04L02A01 01E 4 6 Using the Historical Trend Cursor Move the cursor using the arrow keys The cursor position becomes the Display all the data Displays the display reference position see below entire display data in the file Date and time of the cursor position 2 000 2 000 C Display reference position 2 Move the cursor to select the displayed position using the up and left and right up and down arrow keys 3 Pressing the down left arrow key switches to the historical trend screen with shifted waveforms Display the current trend data and the historical trend data This is possible only when the historical trend of the display data is being displayed Displays the current display data on the upper right half of the screen and the historical trend on the lower left half of the screen Enclosed in parentheses are for the vertical trend display 1 Pressing the down left arrow key displays the current trend and the historical trend To return to the previous screen press the up arrow key Historical trend Current trend Data from the current trend 0 684 amma 1 147 PT O D LA IM 04L02A01 01E 4 23 su 19 5 uodo HulyIymsS g 4 6 Using the Historical Trend Background color of the historical trend The background color of the historical trend is either black or white opposite of the background color displayed for the current t
100. of web operation the newest 50 A record of e mail transmission the newest 50 If the number exceeds the limit entries are deleted starting with the oldest one The number of input points capacity of the internal memory options MAC address and the firmware version number of the DX200 can be displayed on the screen for confirmation Display the log screen system screen 1 Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu 2 Press the Log soft key The types of logs that can be displayed and the system screen are assigned to the soft keys and displayed 3 Press a soft key to display the log or the system screen Error soft key Displays a log of error messages Login soft key Displays a log of key login logout Commu soft key Displays a log of communication commands that have been executed FTP soft key Displays a log of file transfers made using the FTP client function Web soft key Displays a log of operations on the Web screen E Mail soft key Displays a log of e mail transmission System soft key Displays the system screen 4 Use the up and down keys to scroll through the log Returning to the operation screen To return to the operation screen from the log screen or the system screen press the DISP ENTER key to display the screen menu select the desired screen using the up and down arrow keys and then press the DISP ENTER key Error message log The number of the log displayed at the last line
101. on the trend s waveform display area by dividing the display span into 4 to 12 sections The interval at which the displayed group is automatically switched on the trend digital and bar graph screens can be specified The displayed group rotates from group 1 to group 4 You can increase the number of digits of the scale values by one digit on the trend display These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press uw Press the soft key oOo To display the setting screen press the soft key Oom View Direction Trend menm 1 Bar graph Vertical 2 Background White 3 Trend line 2 dot 4 Trip line 2 dot 5 Grid 10 diy 6 Scroll time 5s md Scale digit Normal 8 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure Set the display direction of the trend 1 Direction Trend Select Horizontal Vertical or Horizon2 Set the display direction of the bar graph 2 Direction Bar graph Select Horizontal or Vertical IM 04L02A01 01E 7 23 Ae
102. or changed on the batch screen You can also enter comments Procedure These procedures are carried out in the operation mode Opening the batch screen 1 Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu 2 Press the Batch soft key to display the batch screen The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure Change the batch number up to 16 characters Cannot be changed while data are being acquired to the internal memory 3 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the batch number box Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys enables entering the batch number and displays other boxes in gray The current batch number is displayed Change it and press the DISP ENTER key The batch number is confirmed Procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 Changing the lot number up to 4 numerical digits Cannot be changed while data are being acquired to the internal memory 4 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the lot number box Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys enables entering the lot number and displays other boxes in gray The current lot number is displayed Change the number and press the DISP ENTER key The lot number is confirmed Procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 IM 04L0
103. over range Blank Average value MAX MIN When all data are measurement errors Blank Maximum value Positive over range 99999 minimum value Negative over range 99999 SUM When all data are measurement errors or over range Blank Sum value When the sum value exceeds 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 When the sum value is below 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 Computation channel Item Data Condition of Computation Channels Displayed value AVE Average value When all data are computation errors or over range Blank MAX MIN Maximum value minimum value When all data are computation errors When the maximum value exceeds 99999999 When the minimum value is below 9999999 Blank 999999999 99999999 The decimal position that was specified when the span for the equation was specified is reflected in the maximum and minimum values For example if the span setting of the equation is 200 0 then 99999999 is output when the value exceeds 99999999 9 and 99999999 is output when the value is below 999999 9 SUM Sum value When all data are computation errors or computation overflow When the sum value exceeds 3 4E 38 When the sum value is below 3 4E 38 Blank 9 999999E 99 9 999999E 99 Storing to the internal memory and Saving to the external storage medium Report data are stored to the internal memory at the
104. overview alarm summary message summary and memory summary The data of different groups can be displayed in quadrants that are showing the trend digital or bar graph The display condition of the 4 screen display can be registered up to four configurations The registered configuration can be recalled to the screen The initial setting is as follows Display Name Displays Shown MIX Trend group 1 digital group 1 bar graph group 1 and overview ALL TREND All trend displays groups 1 through 4 ALL DIGITAL All digital displays groups 1 through 4 ALL BAR All bar graph displays groups 1 through 4 For the operating procedure see section 4 7 Example of a MIX Display Digital display of group 1 Overview display TL 1 Bar graph display of group 1 Trend display of group 1 IM 04L02A01 01E suonouny JO MIIAIBAQ a 1 3 Display Function Historical Trend The display data and event data of the measured computed data stored in the internal memory or external storage medium are displayed as a historical trend For details related to the display data see Trend Display in this section For details related to the event data see section 1 4 Alarms and scales are not displayed on the historical trend display Methods Used to Display the Historical Trend The following four methods are available in displaying the historical trend of the display data or event da
105. procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Group number Select the group number 1 to 4 2 On Off Move the cursor to the desired trip line and press the On soft key On Use the trip line The Position and Color boxes appear Off Not use the trip line 3 Position display position Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter the display position Enter a numerical value 1 to 100 and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 4 Color Select the color of the trip line from 16 colors 7 10 IM 04L02A01 01E 7 7 Setting the Trip Line Trend Explanation Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Initial colors of the trip lines Trip line No 1 Red Trip line No 2 Green Trip line No 3 Blue Trip line No 4 Yellow Available colors for the trip line Red green blue blue violet brown orange yellow green light blue violet gray limes cyan dark blue yellow silver and purple IM 04L02A01 01E 7 11 Ae dsiq oy Buiyesodo pue Buiyes 7 8 Setting the Channel Display Colors Trend Bar Graph Procedure Explanation
106. same method as step 3 The range for the boundary The minimum value of the span 1 digit to the maximum value of the span 1 digit when the range is not set to scaling The minimum value of the scale 1 digit to the maximum value of the scale 1 digit when the range is set to scaling Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Note The partial expanded display is turned OFF for all channels if the partial expanded display setting use not use in the basic setting mode is changed and stored When the range setting of the channel is set to Skip or when the span width is less than or equal to 1 digit the partial expanded display cannot be specified The box is grayed in this case IM 04L02A01 01E 7 21 Ae dsiq y Buiyesodo pue Buas 7 12 Setting Whether or Not to Use the Partial Expanded Display Basic Setting Mode Set whether or not to use the partial expanded display The initial setting is Not disabled The display specifications of the partial expanded display are set in the setting mode Procedure These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The possible selections are displayed at the b
107. sample is ececuted after the storage medium is reinserted into the drive TLOG data The first time TLOG data is acquired a TLOG data file is created on the external storage medium The data are appended to this file at each time interval When the number of TLOG data sets exceeds 400 a new file is created Note When auto save is selected and there is no medium in the drive at the time when data are supposed to be saved all unsaved data are saved the first time when the interval time expires after the storage medium is reinserted into the drive Report data The first time report computation is executed a report data file is created on the external storage medium A file is created for each type of report such as hourly daily weekly and monthly reports The data are appended to this file at each time interval Note When auto save is selected and there is no medium in the drive at the time when data are supposed to be saved all unsaved data are saved the first time when the report data is created after the storage medium is reinserted into the drive Dividing report files The report files are divided at the following times When data acquisition is stopped For hourly reports When the 0 00 report is created every day When the number of data sets in the file reaches 25 For daily reports When the report for the first day of the month is created every month When the number of data sets in the file reaches 32
108. save data 3 Key lock 10 4 Use Not use key lock Password Keys to lock enable disable the key lock Key login 10 6 Use Not use key login Auto logout On Off Use Not use user ID User name User ID Password Allow Prohibit basic setting mode 4 Save Load Initialize 4 1 Save settings Save setup data to the external storage medium 9 1 4 2 Load settings Load setup data from the external storage medium 9 1 4 3 Delete Delete files on the external storage medium 9 5 4 4 Format Format the external storage medium 9 5 4 5 Initialize Initialize the setup data in the internal memory and clear measured computed data 9 8 5 Remote 10 9 Action assignment on remote terminals Report 11 13 Report types Date Time of creation Report channel assignments Sum scale Timer TLOG 11 9 Timer mode absolute time relative time Interval Reference time for the absolute timer Turn On Off reset at each interval Turn On Off data storage 6 Communications 6 1 Ethernet Serial 6 2 FTP client 6 3 Control login timeout 7 Web E Mail 7 1 Web 7 2 Basic E Mail settings 7 3 Alarm E Mail settings 7 4 Scheduled E Mail settings 7 5 System E Mail settings 7 6 Report E Mail settings 8 Aux Switch between tag display and channel display 7 2 Minimum remaining amount of internal memory at which to generate the alarm 10 8 Set the displayed language 10 10 Use Not use partial e
109. setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press w To display the setting screen press the soft key Ooa ol 1 First CH Last CH jar EE Range Hode 2 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels 2 Mode Set the mode to Skip Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key IM 04L02A01 01E 5 13 sBunjes jouueyy juewoinseoyy eo 5 8 Input Filter and Moving Average Setting Procedure Explanation Set the input filter for DX204 DX208 low pass filters or the moving average of the input for DX210 DX220 DX230 These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select
110. settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Acquiring the data of all channels to the internal memory at each interval setting at the Action box If DataSave is specified in the Action box the instantaneous values of every channel can be acquired to the internal memory at the specified interval When saving to the external storage medium the data are saved to the TLOG data file DTG extension For details related to the data acquisition of TLOG data to the internal memory and the saving to the external storage medium see the explanation on the TLOG data in chapter 8 Note ___ TLOG data are stored to the internal memory at the interval determined by the timer when the timer is specified 11 20 IM 04L02A01 01E 11 10 Using the Rolling Average Procedure A rolling average can be specified as the moving average on the computed results of each computation channel Set the sampling interval and the number of samples The maximum sampling interval is 1 hour the maximum number of samples is 64 The rolling average can be used to suppress fluctuations in the computed results These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed
111. the reports are not created for channels that are set to Skip or those that have the computation turned Off Sum scale sum unit Select Off s min h or day See section 11 11 Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Date Day of the week This is the date for monthly reports or the day of the week for weekly reports The report is created at the specified time on the specified date or day of the week Time This is the time at which daily weekly and monthly reports are created Hourly reports are created every hour on the hour 11 28 IM 04L02A01 01E Chapter 12 Troubleshooting 12 1 A List of Messages Occasionally error codes and messages appear on the screen while using the DX200 The entire list of messages is given below Error codes and messages related to communications are also listed here The messages are displayed in the language that you have chosen For the procedures regarding language selection see section 10 10 Errors Related to Parameter Settings Setting Errors Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref section System error Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Incorrect date or time setting See section 3 7 A disabled channel is selected
112. the DX200 to detect the existence of an external storage medium in the drive If the storage medium is detected an external storage medium icon is displayed in the status display section of the screen Floppy disk Zip disk ATA flash memory card Note Keep the front cover closed during operation except when accessing the power switch and the external storage medium This will protect the storage medium and the drive from foreign particles such as dust Removing the storage medium Floppy disks and ATA flash memory cards can be removed from the drive regardless of whether the DX200 is turned ON or OFF Zip disks cannot be removed when the DX200 is turned OFF 1 If the DX200 is turned ON check that the storage medium is not being accessed Note The access lamp is lit while the storage medium is being accessed A message Data are being saved to the medium is displayed while measured computed data are being saved to the medium IM 04L02A01 01E 3 5 suoleiodg uowWwOD epoyy UNy SHed JO SoWeN el 3 3 Inserting Removing the External Storage Medium 2 Open the front cover by pressing down on the knob that is located in the center of the upper section of the cover and pulling forward Push the eject button to remove the storage medium 3 Close the front cover If the DX200 is turned ON the external storage medium icon in the status display section disappears see the figure of the icon on the previous page Floppy disk
113. the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate position Press w Press 5 soft key to display the Save Load Clear data menu screen Press 2 soft key to display the Load settings screen pLoad settings File name Tine TEST PNL 2000 01 01 02 05 1 A list of setup files in the storage medium appears Select the file to be loaded The extension of setup files is PNL To cancel the operation and return to the Save Load Clear data menu press the ESC key 2 Press the DISP ENTER key to load the file After loading the screen returns to the operation mode The loaded setup data take effect Note If the loaded data does not take effect refer to the error log For the procedure related to displaying the error log see section 10 7 IM 04L02A01 01E 9 1 Saving oading setup data Saving setup data in the basic setting mode Saves the setup data set in both the setting mode and the basic setting mode to the external storage medium The created file has the same parameters as the file created in the setting mode Procedure These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate position Press w Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears Press soft key to display the Save Load Initialize menu screen Press soft key to display the S
114. the number of manual sampled data TLOG data option and report data option residing in the internal memory are displayed For models that have the alarm output relays option the ON OFF state of the relays are also listed For details related to the data residing in the internal memory see section 1 4 By selecting the display data file or event data file using the arrow keys the historical trend display can be recalled For a description on the historical trend display see Historical Trend in this section For the operating procedure see section 4 5 Number of data sets in the internal memory The maximum number of data sets the internal memory can hold Date sh li the last data were acquired F Status of alarm output relays g 00000 Red Activated Green Released Selection of the file type to be displayed display data files or event data files H SAMPLE DATA 03 58 Jan 1 2008 88 12 48 RELAY 1 00000 TLOG DATA 000 400 3 00008 REPORT DATA 04 40 Jan 81 2000 00 14 58 SAMPLE DATA DISPLAY DATA C EVENT DATA Start Time End Time Data Factor Jan 01 2008 00 25 04 Jan 1 2008 80 27 54 86 Sampling Jan 01 2088 00 15 94 Jan 1 2008 80 25 62 388 Auto Save Jan 1 2088 00 14 16 Jan 01 2000 80 14 48 17 Stop mb Jan 01 2000 08 11 24 Jan 01 2000 88 12 54 46 Stop Jan 01 2088 00 10 48 Jan 1 2008 80 11 04 9 Stop Jan 1 2688 00 05 44 Jan 81 2000 00 10 48 149 Stop i Date and time the data F
115. the reference voltage The initial setting is set so that the reference junction compensation provided by the DX200 is used For the setting procedure see section 5 9 Filter and Moving Average The filter and moving average are used to suppress the effects of noise that is riding on the signal Filtering is provided on the DX204 and DX208 Moving average is provided on the DX210 DX220 and DX230 The filter or moving average can be set on each channel For the setting procedure see section 5 8 Filter Function DX204 and DX208 Suppresses the effects of noise above the frequency determined by the specified time constant The time constant can be set to 2 s 5 s or 10s The filter is initially turned OFF Effects of using filter Output response fot a step input 63 2 of the output value Output response curve when using the filter 2 5 10 s time constant the time it takes to reach 63 2 of the output value IM 04L02A01 01E 1 3 SUOI OUNZ JO MAIAJBAQ 1 2 Functions of the Input Section Moving Average DX210 DX220 and DX230 The input signal of the measurement channel is set to the averaged value of the m most current data points the number of moving averaged data points acquired at the scan interval The number of moving averaged data points can be set in the range 2 to 16 The moving average is initially turned OFF The figure below shows an example indicating the operation of the buffer for the moving av
116. to 38 8 channels Channels 31 to 38 8 channels Channels 31 to 60 30 channels Channels 31 to 60 30 channels Channels 31 to 60 30 channels Types of Computations The following types of computations can be performed Type Description Four arithmetical operations Addition subtraction multiplication x and division SQR Computes the square root ABS Determines the absolute value LOG Determines the common logarithm EXP Determines the exponent Relational computation Determines lt lt gt of two elements and outputs 0 or ag Logical computation Determines the AND logical product OR logical sum XOR exclusive logical sum of two elements NOT negation of an element and outputs 0 or 1 Statistical computation TLOG Determines the average AVE maximum MAX minimum MIN sum SUM and maximum minimum P P at specified time intervals for the specified channels You can specify the interval For detail see section 11 7 Rolling average Determines the moving average of the computed result at scan intervals for the channel for which the equation is specified The sampling interval and the number of samples are specified for each channel The maximum sampling interval is 1 hour the maximum number of samples is 64 The initial setting is set so that the rolling average is disabled The followin
117. to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 3 Reset On Reset the TLOG value when the timer expires Off Do not reset the TLOG value when the timer expires 4 Action DataSave Store the instantaneous values of all measurement computation channels to the internal memory when the time expires Off Do not store the measured computed data IM 04L02A01 01E 11 19 uodo uolouny Wodsey uolneyndwoyg Ey 11 9 Setting the Timer Basic Setting Mode Explanation Setting the absolute timer 1 Mode Select Absolute Interval Reset Ref time and Action are displayed 5 Interval Set the time to the next timeout from 19 choices below 1 min 2 min 3 min 4 min 5 min 6 min 10 min 12 min 15 min 20 min 30 min 1h 2h 3h 4h 6h 8h 12h 24 h 6 Ref time Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter the time Enter the time on the hour 00 to 23 and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 7 Reset On Reset the TLOG value when the timer expires Off Do not reset the TLOG value when the timer expires 8 Action DataSave Store the instantaneous values of all measurement computation channels to the internal memory when the time expires Off Do not store the measured computed data Confirming operation To confirm the new
118. uolouny Wodsay uolneyndwoyg Ey 11 10 Using the Rolling Average Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Explanation While the number of samples acquired is less than the specified number of samples the average of acquired data is computed The computation error data are not included in the rolling average computation If the computed data exceeds the upper or lower limit the data is clipped at the upper or lower limit and the moving average is computed The upper and lower limit is 100000000 excluding the decimal point The decimal point position is the same as that of the specified value for the span lower limit 11 22 IM 04L02A01 01E 11 11 Overview of the Report Function This function is used to create hourly daily weekly and monthly reports The report data can be displayed on the screen The report data are saved to the external storage medium in ASCII format For data formats see appendix 2 Data Formats of ASCII Files Types of reports and specifications Types of reports Hourly report On every hour on the hour the average maximum minimum and sum values of the specified channels are determined from an hour of data up to the current hour and stored to the internal memory Daily report At t
119. use the power cord supplied by YOKOGAWA The main power plug must be plugged into an outlet with a protective grounding terminal Do not invalidate protection by using an extension cord without protective grounding Protective Grounding Make sure to connect the protective grounding to prevent electric shock before turning ON the power Necessity of Protective Grounding Never cut off the internal or external protective grounding wire or disconnect the wiring of the protective grounding terminal Doing so poses a potential shock hazard Defect of Protective Grounding Do not operate the instrument when the protective grounding or the fuse might be defective Also make sure to check them before operation Fuse To prevent fire only use a fuse that has a rating voltage current and type that is specified by the instrument When replacing a fuse turn OFF the power switch and unplug the power cord Never short the fuse holder Do Not Operate in Explosive Atmosphere Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable liquids or vapors Operation of any electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a safety hazard Do Not Remove Covers Some areas inside the instrument have high voltages Do not remove the cover if the power supply is connected The cover should be removed by YOKOGAWA s qualified personnel only External Connection Connect the protective grounding before connecting to the item under measurement or cont
120. user key For details of actions see section 10 2 Alarm ACK see chapter 6 is assigned as the initial value O O Cc O O O C Tac USER key Executing the action that has been assigned Procedure For the operating procedure see sections listed below Assigned action soft key Reference section None Trigger 8 6 AlarmACK 6 1 Math 11 3 Math rst 11 3 M sample 8 13 Message1 to Message8 7 4 Snapshot 9 6 IM 04L02A01 01E 10 1 suoloun 19410 2 10 2 Assigning an Action to the USER Key Procedure These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press wew To display the setting screen press the soft key OB User key Action AlarmACK 1 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Action Selecting the action to be assigned Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow ke
121. using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press w To display the setting screen press the soft key Ooa ol 1 First CH Last CH Jer jar Range Span Hode Range Lower Upper lee aa f The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels 2 Mode Set the mode to DI 3 Range Select Level or Cont Contact 4 Upper and lower limits of span Set the upper and lower limits of the display span Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter 0 or 1 and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 Note Span lower limit and span upper limit cannot be set to the same value IM 04L02A01 01E 5 5 sBunjes jouueyy juewoinseoyy eo 5 3 Digital Input DI Setting Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Explanation Measurable range The following table shows the mode range and measurable range Mode Range Measurable Ran
122. 0 200 0 to 600 0 C 328 0 to 1112 0 F JIS C1604 1989 JIS C1606 1997 IEC751 1995 DIN IEC751 1996 JPt100 200 0 to 550 0 C 328 0 to 1022 0 F JIS C1604 1989 JIS C1606 1989 Cu1 200 0 to 300 0 C 328 0 to 572 0 F CU10 Q GE1 Cuid based on a particular manufacturer CUu2 200 0 to 300 0 C 328 0 to 572 0 F CU10 Q L amp N Cuid based on a particular manufacturer CU3 200 0 to 300 0 C 328 0 to 572 0 F CU10 Q WEED Cuid based on a particular manufacturer CU4 200 0 to 300 0 C 328 0 to 572 0 F CU10 Q BAILAY Cuid based on a particular manufacturer CU5 200 0 to 300 0 C 328 0 to 572 0 F CU10 Q a 0 00392 at 20 C CU6 200 0 to 300 0 C 328 0 to 572 0 F CU10 Q a 0 00393 at 20 C CU25 200 0 to 300 0 C 328 0 to 572 0 F CU25 Q a 0 00425 at 0 C Cu1 to 6 and Cu25 are options For the setting procedure of the reference junction compensation and the burnout for the thermocouple input see section 5 9 5 4 IM 04L02A01 01E 5 3 Digital Input DI Setting To measure the digital input follow the procedures below to set the input range The range cannot be changed while data acquisition or computation is in progress Procedure These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select
123. 01 LT ABS 02 EXAMPLE 02 LT 03 The computed result will be 1 if the measured value of channel 2 is less than the measured value in channel 3 otherwise the value will be 0 02 GT 03 The computed result will be 1 if the measured value of channel 2 is greater than the measured value in channel 3 otherwise the value will be 0 02 EQ 03 The computed result will be 1 if the measured value of channel 2 is equal to the measured value in channel 3 otherwise the value will be O 02 NE 03 The computed result will be 1 if the measured value of channel 2 is not equal to the measured value in channel 3 otherwise the value will be O 02 GE 03 The computed result will be 1 if the measured value of channel 2 is greater than or equal to the measured value in channel 3 otherwise the value will be 0 02 LE 03 The computed result will be 1 if the measured value of channel 2 is less than or equal to the measured value in channel 3 otherwise the value will be 0 Logical Computation The computation is performed using e1 and e2 which are identified as either zero or non zero The types of data that can be used in equations are measured data computed data constants KO1 to K30 communication interface data C01 to C30 and the remote control terminal conditions D01 to D08 You can specify a computing equation that performs logical computation on a computing elemen
124. 1 1 231 1 597 computed value IM 04L02A01 01E 1 9 suonouny JO MIIAIBAQ a 1 3 Display Function Overview Screen Updating of the Bar Graph and the Numerical Display Measured computed values are updated every second However when the scan interval on the DX210 DX220 DX230 is 2 s the display update rate is also 2 s Displayed Information The following Information can be displayed Information Description Display direction The bar graphs can be displayed horizontally or vertically Section 7 13 Base position When the bar graph is displayed horizontally the starting point of the bar base position can be set to the minimum edge of the measurement scale or to the center position Section 7 10 Displayed color The displayed color of the channels are common with the trend display Section 7 8 Scale display The number of divisions of the scale can be set to a value in the range 4 to 12 Section 7 10 common with the trend display A list of measured computed values and alarm conditions of all measurement computation channels is displayed You can move the cursor to select a channel and display the trend or bar graph of the group containing the selected channel For the procedure used to display the overview see section 4 4 Measured computed value The area corresponding to a channel on which Cursor an alarm is occurring is displayed in red Tag
125. 1 3 Display Function The waveform can be scrolled along the time axis using the cursor keys The time axis can be expanded or reduced The entire data of the file that is being displayed on the historical trend can be displayed at the top section of the screen right section if the trend display is vertical You can specify the position to be displayed on the historical trend display using a cursor The specified position becomes the display reference position All data display Cursor 8 551 2 000 8 584 2 000 te TAG 82 0 034 2 000 8 069 2 000 LZH TAG 83 8 483 2 000 8 449 2 000 TAG B4 8 969 2 000 6 938 2 000 nv 39 2 608 2 000 pH 1 714 2 080 1 636 B80 y Display reference position The memory information of the file being displayed on the historical trend can be displayed For models with the batch function BT1 option information such as the batch number and lot number are also displayed File name and data type Serial number of the instrument that sampled the data Start stop time and user name user name is displayed only when the key login function is used Half Screen Display Only when displaying the historical trend of the display data Displays the historical trend of the display data on the left half of the screen lower half if the trend is vertical and the current display data on the right half of the screen upper half if the trend is ve
126. 10 Group Number DX220 DX230 1 2 3 4 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 IM 04L02A01 01E Ae dsiq oy Buiyesodo pue Buras 7 7 Setting the Trip Line Trend Procedure A line to indicate a particular value of interest trip line can be displayed on the trend display The maximum number of trip lines that can be displayed in one group is four The position of the trip line is specified as a percentage of the display span You can specify the thickness of the trip lines See section 7 13 These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press mew Press the soft key oOo To display the setting screen press the soft key ol Group number EE 1 Group set Group name GROUP 1 CH Set Oi 02 63 04 05 06 07 68 89 18 Trip line Position Color On 108 BJ Red The numbers in front of the operating
127. 11 13 setting Constants icicceciicta e gt EO Mee ated etna eae tas 11 15 TLOG Computationss c isaoei ieee ninety 11 16 Setting the Timer Number and Sum Scale for TLOG Computation cceeeeeee 11 18 Setting the Timer Basic Setting Mode 0 eceeceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeeeeeeteeenaeeeeeeeea 11 19 Using the Rolling Average 0 00 eeeeeesseeceenneeeneeeeeenaeeeeenaeecaeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeesseeeensaeeeenaeensneeees Overview of the Report Function Using the Report Function ce ceecscceeessecesneeeeenneeeeenaeeesneeeeesaeeeeeaeeesneeeensaeeesenaeersneeees Setting the Report Function Basic Setting Mode ceeceeecceeseeceeeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeaeeeeeeeea 11 27 Chapter 12 Troubleshooting 12 1 12 2 A Listo Messages noisier eaat 12 1 Troubleshooting Flow Chart sesssssesseeerssissississtrssissrnstistrnsrustttrntnntn ntn ntuntnn tennene nentet 12 9 xii IM 04L02A01 01E Contents Chapter 13 Maintenance 13 1 13 2 13 3 13 4 Periodic Maintenance iii e a Sin hitce tei pee dae Eel ee 13 1 Replacing the Fusari iiine e a a a R aa 13 2 Calibration EEEE ET A E Aes 13 3 Recommended Replacement Periods for Worn Parts sesesereeerissrriesrreerrrrrrnsrne 13 5 Chapter 14 Specifications 14 1 Input Specification Sirnaning A RE G AE eid 14 1 14 2 Display Specifications eisses i e aai ataa at 14 3 14 3 Data Storage Specifications eee ecccceeeeeeeeteeeeeeceeeeceaeeeeeeceneeeaeseeeesaeseaeeeneee
128. 1500 VAC 50 60 Hz for one minute between output terminals and the ground terminal For details related to the switching of energized de energized state of the alarm relays see section 6 4 2 12 IM 04L02A01 01E 2 5 FAIL Memory End Wiring F1 Option Wiring Procedure To prevent electric shock ensure the main power supply is turned OFF If avoltage of more than 30 VAC or 60 VDC is to be applied to the FAIL Memory End output terminal use ring tongue crimp on lugs with insulation sleeves on all terminals to prevent the wires from slipping out when the screws become loose Furthermore use double insulated wires dielectric strength of 2300 VAC or more for the signal wires on which a voltage of more than 30 VAC or 60 VDC is to be applied For all other wires use basic insulated wires dielectric strength of 1350 VAC To prevent electric shock attach the terminal cover after wiring and make sure not to touch the terminals CAUTION To prevent fire use signal wires having a temperature rating of 70 C or more Use the following circuit voltage for the connection to the FAlL Memory End output terminal When the connection is to Mains Circuits primary AC power source circuits 150 V or less When the connection is to circuits derived from Mains Circuits secondary circuits 250 V or less Mains Circuits voltage is less than 300 V and connection must be used by isolation transformer 1 Turn O
129. 1540 DEV SANPLE 0016 10462068 DEV SANPLE 013 16462696 DEV SANPLE 014 1AAR012A NEU containing the event data to be loaded A list of files in the selected directory is displayed in the right column Root directory is denoted by 2 Press the right arrow key to move the cursor on to the file list Press the up or down arrow key to select the event data file to be loaded To move back to the Directory name column press the left arrow key 3 Press the DISP ENTER key to display the waveform on the historical trend screen To return to the Save Load Clear data menu screen without displaying the historical trend press the ESC key IM 04L02A01 01E eyeq Bulzijeniuy pue saji4 Guibeuey el 9 5 Managing files Displaying free space on the external storage medium Displays a list of files and the amount of free space on the external storage medium in the setting mode only Deletes files and directories on the external storage medium Formats the external storage medium Display the list of files and the free space on the external storage medium in the setting mode Procedure A list of files on the external storage medium can be displayed In addition the amount of free space is also displayed These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate position Press w Press soft key to dis
130. 200 Do not remove the external storage medium while the access lamp is lit Doing so can destroy the data on the medium If you are using a commercially available compact flash card on DX200s in the ATA flash memory card drive be careful of static electricity The DX200 may not operate properly if you touch the compact flash card that is inserted into the DX200 when your body is charged with static electricity Handling the CF Card and Adapter Insert the CF card into the adapter as shown in the figure below The card should remain in the adapter when removing it from the card slot on the DX200 does not seem to fit make sure you are inserting it right side up CF card CAUTION Don t expose the floppy disk drive or Zip drive to vibration or shocks as it may damage the drives 2 2 IM 04L02A01 01E 2 2 Installing the DX200 Installation location Install the DX200 indoors in a location that meets the following conditions See also the normal operating conditions described in section 14 7 General Specifications Instrument panel The DX200 is designed for panel mounting Well ventilated location To prevent overheating install the DX200 in a well ventilated location For the panel mount type see Panel Cutout in section 14 8 Dimensional Drawings For the desktop type a space of 50 mm or more from the right left and top surface of the DX200 is recommended Minimum mechanical vi
131. 26 CH24 CH22 CH29 CH27 CH25 CH23 CH21 CH21 Al a CH22 Note RTD input terminals A and B are isolated on each channel Terminal b is shorted internally across all channels However for options N1 Cu10 Cu25 RTD input 3 terminal isolated RTD and N2 3 terminal isolated RTD input b is isolated for each channel 2 8 IM 04L02A01 01E 2 3 Input Signal Wiring Wiring Diagram DC Voltage and DI Input B g o Resistance Temperature Detector Input Leadwire resistance 10 Q max wire The resistance of the three wires should be approximately equal DC voltage input Thermocouple Input Extension leadwire DC Current Input DC current input Shunt resistor NOTE For a 4 to 20 mA input use a shunt resistor of 250 Q 0 1 IM 04L02A01 01E 2 9 oozxa y Buisp 310499 D 2 4 Alarm Output Wiring AR1 AR2 A3 A4 A5 Option A AN Wiring Procedure To prevent electric shock ensure the main power supply is turned OFF If a voltage of more than 30 VAC or 60 VDC is to be applied to the alarm output terminal use ring tongue crimp on lugs with insulation sleeves on all terminals to prevent the wires from slipping out when the screws become loose Furthermore use double insulated wires dielectric strength of
132. 2A01 01E 10 17 suonoun 19410 2 10 11 Checking or Changing Batch Lot Numbers and Entering or Changing Comments BT1 Option Entering comments up to 32 characters x 3 lines The comment the name of the user that entered the comment only when the key login function is enabled and the date and time when the comment was entered are written to the internal memory along with the measured computed data The comment is cleared when the data acquisition to the internal memory is stopped 5 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the first line in the comment box Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys enables entering the comment and displays other boxes in gray Enter the comment and press the DISP ENTER key The comment is confirmed Enter comments in the second and third lines in the similar fashion Procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 The date and time at which the DISP ENTER key is pressed after entering the last comment is written to the internal memory as the date and time when the comment was entered Note You can enter the comment once while data acquisition is in progress However if you had entered a comment before you started data acquisition you cannot reenter the comment while data acquisition is in progress Comments are not saved to the setup file Clearing the batch screen Press the DISP ENTER key or the ESC key to close t
133. 2A01 01E 12 7 BunooyseqnolL D 12 1 A List of Messages Status Messages Code Message 500 Execution is complete 501 Please wait a moment 503 Data are being saved to media 504 File is being loaded from media 505 Formatting 506 Memory save to media was interrupted 507 Exchange media to continue the saving operation 510 Range cannot be changed during sampling or calculating 511 MATH expression cannot be changed during sampling or calculating 512 Because memory save is manual mode FTP is not available 520 Connecting to the line 521 The data file is being transferred 551 FTP test is being executed Cautions Code Message Ref section 600 Measured data and Settings have been initialized 601 Measured data have been initialized 610 This username is already registered See section 10 6 611 There is no user who can enter to the SETUP mode See section 10 6 System Errors Servicing is required when a system error occurs Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs Code Message 901 ROM failure 902 RAM failure 910 A D memory failure for all input channels 911 Channel 1 A D memory failure 912 Channel 2 A D memory failure 913 Channel 3 A D memory failure 914 Channel 4 A D memory failure 921 Channel 1 A D calibration value error 922 Channel 2 A D calibratio
134. 3 Select the group using the up and down arrow keys 4 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the selected group To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key Changing the group on the display screen using the arrow keys 1 The displayed group changes in the order Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 1 and so on by pressing the right arrow key on the trend digital and bar graph screens 2 By pressing the left arrow key the displayed group changes in the reverse order Automatically switch the displayed groups stop the automatic switching The displayed group on the trend digital and bar graph screens can be automatically switched at the specified interval In each screen the displayed group rotates from group 1 to group 4 You can select 5 s 10 s 20 s 30 s or 1 min for the switch interval For the procedure related to setting the switch interval see section 7 13 1 On the trend digital and bar graph screens press the DISP ENTER key to display the screen menu 2 Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu To close the sub menu that you opened press the left arrow 3 To enable automatic switching select AUTO SCROLL ONJ using the up and down arrow keys To disable automatic switching select AUTO SCROLL OFF using the up and down arrow keys The one that is selectable is displayed in the sub menu 27 DIGITAL ll BAR gt He mi PE tt AUTO SCROLL ON MMmEERN AUTO SCROLL ON
135. 3 21 Jan 81 2008 82 36 48 Jan 01 2088 62 37 88 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2008 82 36 17 Jan 01 2888 62 36 37 TAG 83 21 Jan 01 2008 82 35 46 Jan 01 2088 62 36 06 TAG 83 21 Jan 01 2088 02 35 15 Jan 01 2088 62 35 35 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2008 82 34 44 Jan 01 2088 62 35 84 TAG B3 21 Jan 81 2088 82 34 13 Jan 01 2088 62 34 33 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2008 82 33 42 Jan 1 2088 62 34 82 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2088 82 33 11 Jan 01 2088 62 33 31 TAG B3 21 Jan 81 2008 82 32 48 Jan 01 2088 62 33 00 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2088 02 32 09 Jan 01 2888 62 32 29 TAG 83 21 Jan 01 2008 82 31 38 Jan 01 2088 62 31 58 TAG 83 21 Jan 61 2088 82 31 87 Jan 1 2088 62 31 27 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2088 02 30 36 Jan 01 2088 62 38 56 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2008 02 30 05 Jan 01 2088 62 38 25 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2008 82 29 34 Jan 01 2088 62 29 54 Mark see section 6 1 The historical trend of the data containing the selected alarm display data example r 2 00 aso 2 060 Rate a d EAA 0 03 2 00 aes 2 00 LAH 8 48 2 00 Bg 2 000 cn TAG B4 a 2 00 a 2 00 nv 1309 2 000 1 2 00 pH 1 714 2 00 Le 2 00 Y IM 04L02A01 01E SUOI OUNZ JO MAIAJBAQ a 1 3 Display Function Message Summary The messages that were entered in the trend display and the times when they were entered message information are displayed in a list By scrolling the screen using arrow keys up to 100 incidents can be displayed By selecting a message from the list using arr
136. 34 34 TAG 44 na 44 Number of the alarm information displayed at the bottom of the screen Number of the alarm information in the internal memory Tag Channel no Alarm no 1 2 3 4 Type H L h I R r T t Date amp Time Date amp Time alarm occurred alarm released 820 128 Channel Type Alarm IN Tine Alarm OUT Time TAG B3 21 Jan 81 2888 82 39 31 TAG B3 21 Jan 01 2008 02 39 00 Jan 01 2088 62 39 20 TAG B3 21 Jan 61 2008 82 38 21 Jan 01 2088 62 38 46 TAG B3 21 Jan 81 2008 82 37 58 Jan 81 2008 82 38 18 Cursor m TAG 03 21 Jan 81 2008 82 37 19 Jan 01 2088 62 37 39 TAG 83 2l TAG B3 2l D TAG B3 2l Jan 81 2000 62 36 48 Jan 61 2888 82 36 17 Jan 01 2088 62 35 46 Jan 81 2888 62 37 88 Jan 81 2888 82 36 37 Jan 01 2888 62 36 06 t Mark see section 6 1 Number of Alarms You can set up to four alarms for each channel Alarm Conditions The following eight conditions are available Upper limit alarm H An alarm occurs when the measured value exceeds the alarm value Lower limit alarm L An alarm occurs when the measured value falls below the alarm value Upper limit alarm Lower limit alarm Measured computed data Alarm release Alarm occurrence an value a Alarm release L alarm value Alarm occurrence Measured computed data IM 04L02A01 01E 1 5 Alarm Function Delay upper limit alarm T An alarm occurs when the measured value re
137. 4 19 su 19 uodo BulyoyMsS a 4 6 Using the Historical Trend Operation Flow Diagram HISTORICAL TREND 4 gt Moving the cursor Screen menu A Screen menu Sub menu al by a n gt v al ly Memory information Changing groups Group channels ALARM SUMMARY 4 All channels MESSAGE SUMMARY Expanding reducing MEMORY SUMMARY the time axis Load display data Load event data Screen menu Sub menu DISP ENTER key av lt 4 Arrow keys Procedure There are 6 methods in displaying the historical trend screen From the alarm summary See section 4 5 From the message summary See section 4 5 From the memory summary See section 4 5 From Load display data See section 9 3 From Load event data See section 9 4 Recall from the screen menu Described in this section Displaying the historical trend screen from the screen menu Of the data being sampled the display data existing before the execution of this operation are displayed as a historical trend 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu 2 Select TREND HISTORY using the up and down arrow keys 3 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key NOTO me Even if the display data are not configured to be acquired to the internal m
138. 440 MB or CF card 32 to 512 MB adapter required 3 Zip disk 100 MB or 250 MB This product is no longer produced Manual or automatic selectable Data saving by inserting external storage medium Display data Periodic saving 10 min to 31 days to external storage medium Event data In case of trigger free Periodic saving 3 min to 31 days to external storage medium In case of using trigger Save the data when data acquisition is finished Display data Linked with the waveform display update rate Event data Linked with the specified sampling interval Sampling Interval for Event Data cannot be specified File types Modes for event data Sampling length A sampling interval that is faster than the scan interval DX204 DX208 Selectable from 125 250 500 ms and 1 2 5 10 30 60 120 300 600 s DX210 DX220 DX230 Selectable from 1 2 5 10 30 60 120 300 and 600 s The following two file types can be created Event data file stores instantaneous values acquired periodically at a specified sampling interval Display data file stores the maximum and minimum values for each sampling interval from among measured data acquired at scan intervals Files can be created in the following combinations Event data file only for trigger mode display data file Display data file only Event data file only Data format Binary Data size per channel Display data Measurement data 4 bytes da
139. 5 mA Cu10 a 0 00392 at 20 C 328 0 to 572 0 F Cu10 a 0 00393 at 20 C Cu25 a 0 00425 at 0 C Measuring accuracy For measuring accuracy of other input types see section 14 7 Input type Cu10 GE Accuracy guaranteed range Measuring accuracy 70 to 170 C 75 to 150 C Cu10 WEED 200 to 260 C Cu10 L amp N Cu10 BAILEY Cu10 a 0 00392 at 20 C Cu10 a 0 00393 at 20 C Cu25 a 0 00425 at 0 C 0 4 of rdg 1 0 C 200 to 300 C 0 3 of rdg 0 8 C Pt100 Jpt100 3 terminal Isolated RTD Input N2 A B b terminals are of isolated input type Can be specified only for DX210 DX220 and DX230 A B b terminals of DX204 and DX208 are isolated as standard 24 VDC AC Power Supply P1 Powered by 24 VDC or 24 VAC For related specifications see Power Supply Normal Operating Conditions Effects of Operating Conditions and Other Specifications in section 14 7 Rated power supply Allowable power supply voltage range Dielectric strength 0 3 of rdg 0 6 C Measuring range 24 VDC AC suonesiyiseds z 21 6 to 26 4 VDC AC Power supply to ground terminal 500 VAC 50 60 H2 1 minute Rated power supply frequency 50 60 Hz for AC Allowable power supply frequency range 50 60 Hz 2 for AC IM 04L02A01 01E 14 13 14 6 SPECIFICATIONS OF OPTIONAL FUNCTI
140. 600s Numerical value Batch set Application name Character string Initial setting is all space Supervisor name Character string Initial setting is all space Manager name Character string Initial setting is all space Batch number Character string Initial setting is all space Lot number 0 to 9999 o O Numerical value Auto increment lon Off Disp information Batch Time IM 04L02A01 01E App 3 xipueddy Ea Appendix 1 Parameters and Initial Settings Basic setting mode Initial settings are thick framed Temperature unit Parameters Menu Notes Alarm Reflash Relay AND 101 102 101 103 Up to model types 101 104 101 105 101 106 101 111 101 112 101 113 101 114 101 115 101 116 101 121 101 122 101 123 101 124 101 125 101 126 101 131 101 132 101 133 101 134 101 135 101 136 Action Behavior Indicator Rate of change Increase 3 Decrease 7 8 11 12 15 Hysterisis Integrate Initial setting is 50 Hz for models with P1 100 ms is for DX210 DX220 DX230 Scan interval DX204 DX208 DX210 DX220 DX230 Burnout set Down RJC Volt uV Numerical value
141. 8 CHI v 6 898 8 144 0 018 1 793888E 88 CHIL v 8 286 0 282 0 290 5 718000E 00 H12 Y 8 293 0 289 0 297 5 867000E 00 CHI3 v 0 301 0 297 0 305 6 029000E 00 CHI4d Y 0 307 0 304 0 311 6 147000E 00 CHIS v 8 312 0 308 0 315 6 235000E 00 CH16 v 8 315 0 312 0 319 6 304000E 00 CHI v 0 322 0 318 0 326 6 447000E 00 CH18 v 0 328 0 325 0 332 6 568000E 00 CHIS Y 0 333 0 330 0 337 6 669000E 00 CH20 v 0 341 0 338 0 344 6 821000E 00 CH21 Y 0 325 0 322 0 329 6 505000E 00 CH22 v 0 332 0 329 0 336 6 645000E 00 CH23 Y 0 339 0 336 0 343 6 771000E 00 CH24 v 0 347 8 344 0 351 6 932000E 00 CH25 Y 0 351 0 349 0 356 7 025000E 00 CH26 Y 0 355 0 352 0 359 7 097000E 00 CH27 Y 0 362 0 359 0 366 7 232000E 00 CH28 v 0 368 0 365 0 372 7 351000E 00 CH29 v 0 372 6 370 0 377 7 448000E 00 CH38 v S 8 379 0 376 8 384 7 588000E 00 Status of data see section 11 11 Procedure Displaying the report data This operation is carried out on the Message Summary screen For detail of the report data see section 11 11 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu 2 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key 3 Select REPORT DATA using the up and down arrow keys JUMP TO REPORT 4 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the report data To close the menu without displaying the report data press the ESC key E mee a
142. 9 IP65 and NEMA No 250 TYPE4 except External Icing Test 288 W x 288 H x 247 1 D mm DX204 approx 6 6 kg DX208 approx 6 8 kg DX210 approx 6 6 kg DX220 approx 6 9 kg DX230 approx 7 3 kg Measuring Accuracy DC voltage The following specifications apply to operation of the DX200 under standard operation conditions Temperature 23 2 C Humidity 55 10 RH Power supply voltage 90 to 132 or 180 to 250 VAC Power supply frequency 50 60 Hz 1 Warm up time At least 30 minutes Other ambient conditions such as vibration should not adversely affect the operation of the DX200 Max resolution of digital display 10 uV 10 uV 100 uV 1mvV 1 mV 10 mV Measuring accuracy digital display 0 1 of rdg 2 digits TC Excluding the 0 1 of rdg 3 digits 10 mV 0 15 of rdg 1 C However R S 3 7 C at 0 to 100 C 1 5 C at 100 to 300 C B 2 C at 400 to 600 C Accuracy at less than 400 C is not guaranteed reference junction compensation 0 15 of rdg 0 7 C However 0 15 of rdg 1 C at 200 to 100 C suoneayioeds z accuracy 0 15 of rdg 0 5 C 0 15 of rdg 0 5 C However 0 15 of rdg 0 7 C at 200 to 100 C 0 15 of rdg 0 7 C c r s z Alc m x 0 15 of rdg 1 C 0 15 of rdg 0 5 C However 0 15 of rdg 0 7 C at 200 to 100 C
143. A01 01E 7 15 Assigning a Name to the 4 Screen Display Procedure This operation is carried out on the 4 screen display 1 2 Pressing the FUNC key displays the soft key menu Pressing the 4Panel soft key displays the soft keys and a list of 4 screen display names Pressing one of the soft keys displays the window used to enter the screen name 4Panel name list 4Panel 1 MIX 4Panel 2 ALL TREND 4Panel 3 ALL DIGITAL 4Panel 4 ALL BAR 4Panel 1 4Panel 2 4Panel 3 4Panel 4 Enter the screen name up to 16 alphanumeric characters For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering characters on page 3 22 R oo Pressing the DISP ENTER key validates the specified screen name and return to the 4 screen display To discard the specified screen name and close the window used to enter the screen name press the ESC key or the FUNC key IM 04L02A01 01E 7 27 Ae dsiq oy Buiyesodo pue Buras Chapter 8 Data Acquisition and Saving to External Storage Medium 8 1 Data Types to be Acquired and Saved Data Types and File Names Data type The types and the contents of the data that are acquired are as follows Beside those data listed below the setup data see section 9 1 and the screen image data see section 9 6 can be saved to the external storage medium Type Content Display data Waveform data that are used to display trends on the LCD screen T
144. AG line and the UNIT line are rewritten after a carriage return line feed and followed by manual sampled data When the measurement channel is switched from some setting other than Skip to Skip When the measurement channel is switched from Skip to some other setting When the computation channels are turned On or turned Off When the unit is changed Four lines from the bottom of the file example shows the output when the unit for channel 31 is changed from mV to V App 10 IM 04L02A01 01E Appendix 2 Data Formats of ASCII Files Data format of the report file The hourly daily weekly and monthly reports are output in ASCII format using values and strings that are separated by commas The channel ag unit average value maximum value minimum value and sum value are not output for channels in which the input range is set to Skip or for which the computation is turned OFF Example The following example is the daily report for four channels DAILY REPORT START TIME 2000 01 31 20 00 Model Serial No XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX File Header AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA CH TAG CHO1 CHO2 CHO3 CH04 s UNITY SV VMN 2000 01 01 00 00 EOPC EOPC EOPC EOPC AVE 0 00 0 10 0 20 0 30 MAX 0 00 1 00 2 00 3 00 MIN 0 00 1 00 2 00 3 00 SUM 0 000000E 01 1 000000E 04
145. AND Selection of a quadrant To other screens Assignment of screens Sub menu DISP ENTER key 4 lt 4 gt Arrow keys Displaying the 4 screen display 1 2 3 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu Select 4 PANEL using the up and down arrow keys Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key Select one of the 4 screen displays to display using the up and down arrow keys Pe Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key Switching the 4 screen display 1 In the 4 screen display pressing the right arrow key switches the display in the order 4 Panel 1 4 Panel 2 4 Panel 3 4 Panel 4 4 Panel 1 and so on By pressing the left arrow key the displayed group changes in the reverse order IM 04L02A01 01E 4 25 su 19 5 UuOl e19dQ BulyoyMs g 4 7 Using the 4 Screen Display GROUP 1 OVERVIEW Displays the screen TAG 81 TAG B4 name or group name 0 603 0 599 HHLL v CO y lass f s Different screens can E 0 7 602 E 0 599 be assigned to each TAG 83 TAG 06 area quadrant 0 601 597 Rr V GROUP 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 Changing the screen to be assigned to the 4 Screen display This operation is carried out on the 4 screen display 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER key selects one screen the title sect
146. Channel no TAG at a TAG 11 m al TAG 8 149 a Pek a G 2 ist bes J4 m Le ra e Alarm mark TAG i TAG 28 isn a Ba A BT TAG 40 MG 1 597272 BEE Updating of the Numerical Display Measured computed values are updated every second However when the scan interval on the DX210 DX220 DX230 is 2 s the display update rate is also 2 s IM 04L02A01 01E 1 3 Display Function Alarm Summary A list of the most recent alarms can be displayed By scrolling the screen using arrow keys up to 120 incidents can be displayed By selecting an alarm from the list using arrow keys the historical trend of the display data or event data containing the alarm can be recalled For a description on the historical trend display see Historical Trend in this section For the operating procedure see section 4 5 Number of the alarm information displayed at the bottom of the screen Number of the alarm information in the internal memory Tag Channel no Alarm No 1 2 3 4 Type H L h I R r T t Date amp Time Date amp Time alarm activated alarm released 828 128 Channel Type Alarm IN Time Alarm OUT Time TAG a3 21 Jan 81 2088 82 39 31 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2008 02 39 00 Jan 01 2088 62 39 28 TAG 83 21 Jan 01 2088 82 38 21 Jan 01 2088 62 38 46 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2088 82 37 58 Jan 01 2088 62 38 18 Cursor mm TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2088 82 37 19 Jan 01 2088 62 37 39 TAG 8
147. Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key For models without the batch function BT1 option Ifthe user name already exists a confirmation message This user name is already registered is displayed At this point the user name is registered If necessary change the user name to be registered For models with the batch function BT1 option Ifthe user name already exists an error message This user name is already registered is displayed The user name entry box stays yellow and the user name is not registered Change the user name to be registered If the combination of the user ID and password that are identical to those that have been registered by any user in the past an error message Duplicate used combination of user ID and password is displayed Change the combination of the user ID and password to be registered To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key IM 04L02A01 01E 10 9 suonouny 19410 2 10 7 Displaying the Log Screen System Screen Procedure Explanation The following list is displayed on the log screen Error messages the newest 50 A record of key login logout the newest 50 A record of communication commands the newest 200 A record of file transfers made using the FTP client function the newest 50 A record
148. E 2 4 Alarm Output Wiring AR1 AR2 A3 A4 A5 Option Terminal Arrangement Only the position of the alarm output terminals is indicated When the relay is not energized NC is closed and NO is open C is the common terminal AR1 AR1 F1 Option Terminal 1 AR2 AR2 F1 Option Terminal 1 A3 A3 R1 06 05 02 01 Option Terminal 1 Option Terminal 2 A4 A4 R1 Option Terminal 1 Option Terminal 2 IM 04L02A01 01E 2 11 oozxa y Buisp ai0jog s 2 4 Alarm Output Wiring AR1 AR2 A3 A4 A5 Option A4 F1 A4 R1 F1 Option Terminal 1 No alarm terminals Option Terminal 2 Option Terminal 3 A5 A5 R1 Option Terminal 1 Option Terminal 2 Option Terminal 3 Option Terminal 4 G 8 34 33 Contact Specifications Item Specification Output type Relay transfer contact energize de energize switchable Output capacity 250 VAC 50 60 Hz 3A 250 VDC 0 1 A resistive load Dielectric strength
149. F OvERVIEW gt CURSOR OFF FF VERVIEW CURSOR ON 4 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays or clears the cursor To close the menu without displaying clearing the cursor press the ESC key Switching to the trend or bar graph screen of the channel selected with the cursor 1 Move the cursor to select the channel using the arrow key 2 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu 3 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key 4 Select JUMP TO TREND or JUMP TO BAR using up and down arrow keys zin Z overview OVERVIEW JUMP TO TREND D Ea ED JUMP TO BAR 5 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key 4 12 IM 04L02A01 01E 4 4 Using the Overview Screen Overview Screen Alarm type Measured computed value The area corresponding to a channel on which an alarm is occurring is displayed in red See section 6 1 The area corresponding to a channel on which an alarm is not occurring is displayed in green See section 6 1 Cursor can be moved using the arrow keys TAG gi Be TAG P 03 576 781465 Ey 1 985892 mi 2 TAG 78 TAG 48 7 a p AG 2 TAG 31 UG Tag Channel no ato See section aes Sy 42 Gare 71nd 72 58 IM 04L02A01 01E 4 13 su 19 5 uoe do HulyIymsS g 4 5 Using the I
150. FF the DX200 and remove the cover for the option terminal 2 Connect the FAIL Memory End output cables to the terminal The terminal arrangement for the FAIL Memory End output option is as follows Terminal Position Option Terminal 1 F1 Terminal Arrangement Only the position of the FAIL Memory End output terminals is indicated When the relay is not energized NC is closed and NO is open C is the common terminal FAIL Memory End 3 Replace the terminal cover and fasten it with screws Note FAIL output is a de energize relay de energized on failure and the memory end output is an energize relay energized on memory end Contact Specifications The contact specification is the same as that for the alarm output See section 2 4 For details related to the FAIL Memory End output see section 10 8 IM 04L02A01 01E oozxa y Buisp 310499 s 2 6 Remote Control Wiring R1 Option A To prevent electric shock ensure the main power supply is turned OFF A CAUTION To prevent fire use signal wires having a temperature rating of 70 C or more Wiring Procedure 1 Turn OFF the DX200 and remove the cover for the option terminal 2 Connect the remote control signal cables to the terminal The terminal arrangement for the remote control option is as follows Terminal Position
151. Functions R1 Option Basic Setting Mode Various actions can be assigned to the eight remote control terminals The assigned action can then be executed by applying a remote input signal to the corresponding terminal Procedure These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press uw Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears To display the setting screen press the soft key o The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Action Assign actions to Remote numbers 1 to 8 For the functions that can be assigned see the explanation Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Explanation Actions that can be assigned Enclosed in parentheses are soft key expressions None None No action is assigned IM 04L02A01 01E 10 13 suonouny 19410 2 10 9 Setting the Remote Control Functions R1 Option Basic Setting Mode
152. Jan 81 2000 00 25 02 388 Auto Save Jan 1 2008 00 14 16 Jan 61 2008 60 14 48 17 Stop Jan 1 2008 00 11 24 Jan 61 2088 60 12 54 46 Stop Jan 01 2008 00 10 48 Jan 61 2088 60 11 04 9 Stop Jan 1 2068 00 05 44 Jan 61 2008 60 10 48 149 Stop Date and time the data File status acquisition ended Date and time the data acquisition started Number of data in the file file can be displayed in place of the date and time the data acquisition ended Selecting the type of file display data or event data to display in the Memory Summary This operation is carried out on the Memory Summary screen 1 Select display data or event data using the left and right arrow keys The selected file type is indicated by a green circle to the left of DISPLAY DATA or EVENT DATA Information about the selected file is displayed Status of alarm output relays On models with the optional BT1 batch function the batch number and lot number for each Opening the display event data file from Memory Summary recalling the historical trend 1 Select the file using the up and down arrow keys Selected file M SAMPLE DATA 3 58 Jan 1 2088 60 12 48 RELAY 1 000000 2 2080008 TLOG DATA 800 488 3 008008 REPORT DATA 84 48 Jan 1 2008 80 14 58 SAMPLE DATA DISPLAY DATA EVENT DATA Start Time End Time Data Factor Jan 61 2688 68 25 64 Jan 61 2008 68 27 54 86 Sampling Jan 81 2008 68 15 64 Jan 61 2008 88 25 62 388 Auto Save Jan
153. Maximum number of data points and sampling length Display data Maximum number of data points 1 200 000 2 CH x 2 bytes 0 x 4 bytes 300 000 However since 120 000 data points is the limit Maximum number of data points 120 000 When the event data sampling interval is 1 s Sampling length 120 000 data points x 1 s 120 000 s approx 33 hours Measurement channel 12 computation channel 6 Data Maximum number of data points and sampling length Event data Maximum number of data points 1 200 000 12 CH x 2 bytes 6 x 4 bytes 25 000 When the event data sampling interval is 1 s Sampling length 25 000 data points x 1 s 25 000 s approx 7 hours IM 04L02A01 01E winipa y eabe10jg jeus9 xq 0 Hulaes pue uoljsinboy eead el 8 2 Function to Acquire Display Data and Event Data Display data and event data Measurement channel 2 computation channel none Data Maximum number of data points and sampling length Display data Maximum number of data points 900 000 2 CH x 4 bytes 0 x 8 bytes 112 500 However since 75 000 data points is the limit Maximum number of data points 75 000 When the display update rate is 30 min div 60 s sampling interval Sampling length 75 000 data points x 60 s 4 500 000 s approx 52 days Event data Maximum number of data points 300 000 2 CH x 2 bytes 0 x 4 bytes 75 000 However since 30 000 data points is the limit Maximum number
154. Numerical value Upper 5 tol 100 Math partial On Off On Off oO Expand 1 to 99 Numerical value Boundary App 2 IM 04L02A01 01E Appendix 1 Parameters and Initial Settings Parameters Menu Notes Math Graph Division 4 5 6 7 8 9 fo 12 C10 Bar graph Normal Center Scale position aO 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 Off Save Load Save settings Clear data Load settings Save data Load display data Load event data File list Delete Format Clear data Time set YY MM DD HH MM SS Numerical value DST Summer Winter Math set Math range On Off On Off O Bea Equation for computation Span Lower Numerical value Span Upper Unit Character string Math alarm On Off On Type H L T t Value Numerical value Relay On Off On Off Number 101 to 106 111 to 116 121 to 126 131 to 136 Up to model types Constant K01 to K30 Numerical value Initial setting is 1 Tag Tag Character string Initial setting is all space TLOG TimerNo 1s f2 3 Sum scale Off o s min h Rolling On Off On Off O average Interval is 2s 3s 4s 5s 6s 10s 12s 15s 20s 30s 1 min 2 min 3 min 4 min 5 min 6 min 10 min 12 min 15 min 20 min 30 min 1h Number 1 to 64 Numerical value of samples Alarm delay time 1sto 3
155. ONS Rated power consumption 54 VA for DC 76 VA for AC Power consumption Supply voltage Backlight saving mode Normal Max 24 VDC 34 VA 35 VA 54 VA 24 VAC 50 60H2 50 VA 53 VA 76 VA Effects on measured value With variation within 21 6 to 26 4 V 50 60 Hz 1 digit or less With variation of 2 Hz from rated power supply frequency at 24 VAC 0 1 of rdg 1 digit or less Remote Control R1 This option allows the following functions to be controlled remotely by a contact or an open collector input up to eight inputs Alarm acknowledgment trigger 250 ms or longer Start stop of data acquisition rising and falling edge Trigger for event data acquisition trigger 250 ms or longer Time adjustment adjusting the internal clock to the nearest hour upon remote signal trigger 250 ms or longer hh 00 00 to hh 01 59 Cut off reading of less than one minute e g 10 00 50 is corrected as 10 00 00 Round up reading of less than one minute e g 10 59 50 is corrected as 11 00 00 hh 02 00 to hh 57 59 No process is to be performed hh 58 00 to hh 59 59 Start stop of computation rising and falling edge M1 option Reset of computation data trigger 250 ms or longer M1 option Manual sampling trigger 250 ms or longer Writing messages Up to 8 different messages can be set trigger 250 ms or longer Load of setting parameters Up to 3 setup data files can be set trigge
156. Operation mode MENU Operation screens END soft key DISP ENTER MENU or ESC Setting mode Menu screen Basic setting mode Pressing FUNC for 3 seconds Soft key Menu screen MENU or ESC Soft key ESC Setting screens Setting screens Mode Type Description Possible Operations Operation mode This mode is used for daily operation This mode is entered when the power is turned ON Monitoring operation Data acquisition Setting mode This mode is used to configure the DX200 operation such as input range and alarms This mode is entered by pressing the MENU key in the operation mode Measured data cannot be displayed in this mode Operations such as measurements alarm detection and data acquisition are continued Setting the operation Operation related to the file on the external storage medium Basic setting mode Setup mode This mode is used to configure the basic environment of the DX200 such as the input format and the data storage format This mode is entered by pressing the FUNC key for three seconds at the setting mode menu This mode cannot be entered while data acquisition or computation is in progress Operations such as measurements alarm detection and data acquisition are stopped Basic settings of the functions Operation related to the
157. PACE EAEE E E EE IE S 3 22 soft keys software specifications 24 VDC power supply for transmitter eee 14 14 24 VDC AC power SUPDIy 00 eeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeens 14 13 3 terminal isolated RTD input 14 13 alarm output relays i batch fUNCtION sinen cece etre aniei clamped input terminal s es communication Ethernet 7 Computation FUNCTIONS cc eeen eena Cu10 Cu25 RTD input eee eceeeeceteeeeeeeeeeeeeees Gata StOLa Qe iss csccceccestesseecedsesetecesicusssesecsessteeseseodsesdeerdes desktop typa siisii aii a dimensional drawings z GIS PIAY aaa E SET ETT FAIL memory end output sses fieldbus communication interface general MPU anaona aes ue normal operating conditions POWEY SUPPLY oo ee ee irnir aiiai remote Control seese serial communication interface standard operation conditions 4 VGA CUPU a a aas speed of movement of waveforms sesers 1 6 7 3 SQithncsidiSecteestd edie dcsctens tenets ti EET square root square root COMPUTATION eee cece cette ee teteeeeeeeeeteeaees 5 12 SlACKS 227 Soci 5 ae et AS eta ei cee ST 11 7 START KY innein daa a iced 3 2 start stop computation remote control 10 14 start stop data acquisition remote control 10 14 Statistical COMPUTATION cece cece ceteeeeeeeeteeeeeteeeeeetneaees 11 1 Status repOrt aasre aeon a aera daaa ears asana daa saanee liada 11 24 status display section 1
158. Procedure Enabling key lock This operation is carried out in the operation mode 1 Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu 2 Press the Keylock soft key The key lock function is enabled Keylock Note If a locked key is pressed when the key lock function is engaged a message This key is locked is displayed A key lock icon appears in the status display section when the key lock is enabled See section 4 2 Releasing the key lock This operation is carried out in the operation mode 1 Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu 2 Press the Keylock soft key A window appears for you to enter the password 3 Enter the password and press the DISP ENTER key The password is set in the basic setting mode See section 10 4 For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 The key lock is released 10 3 IM 04L02A01 01E suonouny 19410 2 10 4 Setting the Key Lock Function Basic Setting Mode Procedure Select whether or not to enable the key lock on the individual keys and the external storage medium The initial setting is Free disabled on all parameters These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed
159. Procedure Initializes the setup data in the internal memory Also Clears display data event data manual sampled data TLOG data option report data option and logs from the internal memory The DX200 returns to the operation mode For the initial settings of the setup data see Appendix 1 These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Press Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears Press soft key to display the Save Load Initialize menu screen Press 5 soft key to display the Initialize screen ef Initialize Kind j Initialize contents Clearl Setup settings Settings Measure amp ath data Clear2 Settings Neasure amp Hath data Clear3 Measure amp lath data 1 Select the type of initialization to set in the Type box To cancel the operation and return to the Save Load Initialize menu press the ESC key Clear 1 Initializes the settings in the basic setting mode settings in the setting mode and clears the internal memory Clear 2 Initializes the settings in the setting mode and clears the internal memory Clear 3 Clears the internal memory 2 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays a confirmation window Pressing the DISP ENTER key initializes the settings and returns to the operation mode IM 04L02A01 01E 9 15 ejeq Bulzijeniuy pue saji4q Guibeuey el Chapter 10 Other Functions 10 1 USER Key An action can be assigned to the
160. R KEY ioios rori gaa erdira eee eles 1 29 3 2 Ser NAME saet ienaa a e a aa ae 10 9 V version NUMDET nsssssrssieissisiinineinisindii nidii VGA output seneesa VGA output terminal VIDEO OUT terminal Index 4 IM 04L02A01 01E Index viewing display data viewing event data volume NAME ou ee eee ceee cee eeee cece eeeaeeeeeeaeeeteaeeeeeeaeeeteeaeeeteeaees W WAVEMOIM NINES ceicccccssssuscvccccosccetsioseecovecacaseccsteesuainestesesecctanes weekly report iss ceil aa anian enaa a ene ais wiring alarm output 0 eee eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeteeeees wiring FAlL memory end wiring input signal cece eee eeeee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeee Wiring power SUPPLY ceeeeeeeceeeeeeteeeseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeneaeeees wiring remote control eeeeeeeeeeeeeee cece eee tees eeeseeeeneaeeees wiring transmitter power supply ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteene eee 2 16 writing messages remote Control eect 10 15 Z Ajan E AEE E T ATA 3 5 ZONG CiSPlay innii ne deter vueaeness 1 8 IM 04L02A01 01E Index 5
161. R1 Option Basic Setting Mode 0 10 13 Setting the Displayed Language Basic Setting Mode ccceeeeeeceseeseeeeeeteeeseeeneeeens 10 16 Checking or Changing Batch Lot Numbers and Entering or Changing Comments BT1 Optlon sche eters ta AA aa Aneta a ede aaa tes A destegemgs tia T 10 17 Setting the Batch Information BT1 Option c eecceeceeseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeetaeeeneenaes 10 19 Setting Whether or Not to Use the Batch Function BT1 Option Basic Setting Mode 10 21 Using the Daylight Savings Time Adjustment Function cccceeceeeeeesteeeeetieeeeeeenaes 10 22 Setting the Temperature Unit Basic Setting Mode eecceccceeeteeeeeeeneeeeeeetteeteeeenaes 10 24 Setting the Time Zone Basic Setting Mode e ceccceeeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeneeeeeseeeettaeeeeeenaes 10 25 Chapter 11 Computation Report Function Option 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 11 6 11 7 11 8 11 9 11 10 11 11 11 12 11 13 Overview of the Computation Function ccceeeeceeeteeteceeeeceeeeaeeeeeeetaeteeeesieeeteeeneeeea 11 1 Explanation of Computing Equations ccccccccceeesceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeeceneeeaeeeeeesneeseeeneees 11 4 Using the Computation FUNCTION 0 0 0 eee eee ee eeee teeter cee sees cesses snes see eteetneetaeeeaenaaes 11 8 Setting Computation Channels cee eee eee eee eee seer terete tees tant tee tee taeteaetnennaee 11 10 Setting the Alarms sccasiace aaieiwnciinwil nati e A E N OA
162. Rate of change Decrease The time interval is specified using a number of sampling times number of measurements see section 1 5 Select the limit from 1 to 15 using the soft key Setting the alarm hysteresis 7 Hysteresis Select On or Off using the soft key On The hysteresis is 0 5 of the display span or scale Off No hysteresis Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Alarm output relay option A contact signal is generated when an alarm occurs The number of output relays is 2 to 24 points depends on the specification Reflash When multiple alarms are set to one alarm output relay this function notifies the succeeding alarms after the first alarm that causes the relay operation When a succeeding alarm occurs the output relay temporarily turns OFF The reflash alarm function is set only to output relays 101 102 and 103 The initial setting is Off Relays 111 112 113 are used for models without 101 to 106 223 lt assuming 101 is assigned Channel 1 i 1 assuming 101 is assigned Alarm status Channel 2 l 1 i i assuming 101 is assigned Channel 3 I E I I l l I 1 101 output Alarm relay status Output relay l l reflash on option Approx 500 ms Approx 500
163. T arithmetical operations AS GUMIG na i e ATA flash memory card PUTO NOGOUUS 552 asvcace E EE T TE T AUTO SAVES EREE ET ET auto save interval eee automatic increment of the lot number automatic switching of displayed group cece eee B DACKGFOUMGICOIOF c025cssscsesscaceesseassassesbsassssedtanstpsssonsssectes 1 19 backlight Savet is s 5 slaseveiecdceesinacslaseyecs cesecransensauadues ite 1 19 7 25 Dar graph SCIOON scscccssesascccsstesessecccnsstesssedacscrssesssedarsevass 1 9 base position basic setting mode eccceece ee eteeeteeteeeteeaeeetneeeeeeee 3 7 3 10 batch function c ccc ccccceeeeeceeeceseeneeeeeeesceseeteaeeeeseseenenees 1 27 batch information batch name Batch NUMDET vassis R 1 27 DOCK nn n ETS 8 4 8 24 BriGhtMGSS riia a 1 19 DUPINOUE ssesssinicdevcesin aie scecdedsdasendeacy aa adpan eera daa arasa adnan aar Eoia arias 1 3 C Calibration isisisi nasisa anian iadaaa capacity internal Memory sesesesesieeerieerirerrieerrieerrrrernn Carrying handle ossoa aai cautions messages C lSUS iarna channel assignment group channel display area ccssssscsscssesssesseccesssessssecseceseessees channel display color sesseessseseersesrerrirrrerrnrrrernnrreernnrrens channel number display channels to acquire the data channels to display the trend Ss character number input Key ccccecceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaee
164. The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press uw Press the soft key Next 1 2 To display the setting screen press the soft key os 1 C_ First CH Last CH 31 EE r Tag Alarm Delay Tag Time s r TLOG Timer No 1 Sum scale Off Rolling average On Off iim 2 Interval 18s 3 Number of samples 1 4 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels For the channels set here the Tag TLOG and Alarm Delay Time are also simultaneously set 2 On Off On Use rolling average Off Do not use rolling average If On is selected Interval and Number of samples are displayed 3 Interval Select the interval from the selections below However when the scan interval is set to 2 s even if the sampling interval is set to 1s 3 s 5 s or 15 s the sampling will be performed at 2 s 4 s 6s or 16s 1s 2s 3s 45 55 6s 10s 12s 15s 20 s 305 1 min 2 min 3 min 4 min 5 min 6 min 10 min 12 min 15 min 20 min 30 min 1h 4 Number of samples This is the number of data points used to compute the rolling average Set an integer value between 1 and 64 IM 04L02A01 01E 11 21 uondo
165. X Or 3 4E 38 in the middle of computation KXKKKKK An error is detected error XXKKKKXKX When the following computation is specified a computation error occurs X 0 SQR X LOG X When a skipped channel No is entered in the equation The number of stacks see section 11 2 error XXKKXKKK in the equation exceeds 17 The moving average of the computed result of the equation specified for the computation channel is determined and the result is displayed as computed data for that channel The sampling interval and the number of samples can be specified for each channel The maximum sampling interval is 1 hour the maximum number of samples is 64 The initial setting is OFF do not perform moving average For the setting procedure see section 11 10 You can set up to 4 alarms on each computation channel The alarm types are upper limit alarm H lower limit alarm L delay upper limit alarm T and delay lower limit alarm t The hysteresis is fixed to 0 For the procedures to set the alarms see section 11 5 For the alarm indication see sections 4 2 and 6 1 Acquiring the computed data Display data and event data The computed data from the computation channels can be acquired as the display data and event data in the same manner as for the measurement channels See chapter 8 Manual sampled data The instantaneous values of all computation channels excluding the computation channels that are tur
166. XP Computations The types of data that can be used in equations are measured data computed data constants K01 to K30 communication interface data C01 to C30 and the remote control terminal conditions D01 to D08 You can nest a computing element inside the parentheses of another computing element EXAMPLE Power xx 01 xx02 Raises measured value of channel 1 to the power of measured value of channel 2 Square root SQR SQR 01 Returns the square root of the measured value of channel 1 Absolute value ABS ABS 01 Returns the absolute value of the measured value of channel 1 Logarithm LOG LOG 01 Returns the common logarithm of the measured value of channel 1 Exponent EXP EXP 01 Raises e to the power of the measured value of channel 1 Note The natural logarithm is not directly provided but can be obtained by using the following logex logiox logi0 as logpx logax logab Therefore to calculate the natural logarithm of the value of channel 01 set KO1 1 Then the expression will become LOG 01 LOG EXP K01 IM 04L02A01 01E 11 2 Explanation of Computing Equations Relational Computation The types of data that can be used in equations are measured data computed data constants KO1 to K30 communication interface data C01 to C30 and the remote control terminal conditions D01 to D08 You can specify a computing equation that performs relational computation on a computing element Example
167. a Event data Scan interval gt _ Sampling inteval for event data 1 20 IM 04L02A01 01E 1 4 Storage Function Manual Sampled Data Every time a given key operation is carried out all measured computed data instantaneous values at that point are acquired to the internal memory However this excludes measurement channels that are skipped and computation channels that are turned OFF For the action of acquiring data and the operating procedure see sections 8 1 8 3 and 8 12 TLOG Data Only on models with the optional computation function M1 All measured computed data instantaneous values can be acquired to the internal memory at predetermined intervals However this excludes measurement channels that are skipped and computation channels that are turned OFF For the action of acquiring data see sections 8 1 and 8 3 Report Data Only on models with the optional computation function M1 The average maximum minimum and sum can be computed for the specified channels at predetermined intervals and the result can be acquired to the internal memory You can select one hour hourly report one day daily report one hour one day hourly and daily report one day one week daily and weekly reports or one day one month daily and monthly reports for the interval For the action of acquiring data see sections 8 1 and 8 3 Saving Data to the External Storage Media External Storage Media Var
168. a in the External Storage Medium Loads the event data saved in the external storage medium and displays the waveform on the historical trend screen This operation can be carried out when the acquisition of Procedure event data is set Event or E D in section 8 11 See section 4 6 for the use of the historical trend These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate position Press Press 5 Press 5 Load event data Directory name soft key to display the Load event data screen File name Time DATA23 DATA23 1 HS2 DATA21 DATA22 TRASH 18401546 DEV 2000 01 04 81 56 10402068 DEV 2000 01 04 82 09 10402090 DEV 2000 01 04 02 11 18482138 DEV 2000 01 04 82 13 10402198 DEV 2000 01 04 62 20 18402210 DEV 2000 01 04 62 21 10482211 DEV 2000 01 04 82 24 10482258 DEV 2000 81 04 62 28 For models with the batch function BT1 option press the Time soft key when soft key to display the Save Load Clear data menu screen displaying the date and time of file creation and the Batch soft key when displaying the batch number and lot number 1 The directories in the external storage medium are displayed in the Directory name column Press the up or down arrow key to select the directory File name Batch name No 1040
169. abet a gt numbers 1 3 22 IM 04L02A01 01E 3 6 Common Key Operations Explanation Character number input key The relationship between the character number input keys and the available characters is shown below asc 200 3am 4 2 5mo rar Zsu 8wx 9x Ow minus sign decimal point aD ctv J Upper case alphabet Lower case alphabet Symbols Key Pressed once Twice Three times Four times 1 asc A a B b C c 2 er D d E e F f 3am Gig H h K i 4a J4 K k L I 5mo M m N n O 0 Gran P p Q q R r Zsu S s T t U u 8 wx V v W w X x 9 yz Y y Z z i i i O we s ey Copying clearing character strings Procedure When entering a character string in the basic setting mode or the setting mode you can copy and paste a preexisting string You can also clear a selected string The soft keys used to perform these operations appear only when these operations are appropriate Copying a character strings To copy a character string to another box follow the procedures below Move the cursor to the copy source string and press the Copy soft key The Paste soft key appears 2 Move the curs
170. able 400 A m or less DC and 50 60 Hz Normal mode 50 60 Hz Volt The peak value including the signal must be less than 1 2 times the measuring range TC The peak value including the signal must be less than 1 2 times the measuring thermal electromotive force RTD 50 mV or less Common mode noise 50 60 Hz 250 Vrms AC or less for all ranges Maximum noise voltage between channels 50 60 Hz Mounting position Warm up time Altitude Effects of Operating Conditions Ambient temperature Power supply Magnetic field 250 Vrms AC or less Can be inclined up to 30 deg backward Mounting at an angle away from the perpendicular is not acceptable At least 30 minutes after power on 2000 m or less above sea level With temperature variation of 10 C 0 1 of rdg 1 digit or less for Volt and TC ranges Excluding the error of reference junction compensation 0 1 of rdg 2 digit or less for RTD ranges Except for P1 model With variation within 90 to 132 V and 180 to 250 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 digit or less With variation of 2 Hz from rated power frequency at 100 VAC 0 1 of rdg 1 digit or less For P1 model With variation within 21 6 to 26 4 VDC AC 1 digit or less With variation of 2 Hz from rated power frequency at 24 VAC 0 1 of rdg 1 digit or less AC 50 60 Hz and DC 400 A m fields 0 1 of rdg 10 digits or less suonesiyiseds z IM 04L02A01 01E 14 17 14 7 Gener
171. actor string Ref time Numerical value Recipient 2 Interval Ref time Include INST Include source URL Subject Header 1 Header 2 System E Mail Recipient 1 settings Numerical value Charactor string Recipient 2 Include source URL Subject Header 1 Header 2 Report E Mail Recipient 1 settings Recipient 2 Include source URL Subject Charactor string Header 1 Header 2 Charactor string IM 04L02A01 01E App 7 xipueddy Ea Appendix 1 Parameters and Initial Settings Parameters Menu Notes Communication Read cycle 250 ms 500 ms 1s Modbus master 25 5s 10s Basic settings Timeout 250 ms 500 ms 1s 2s 5s 10s 1 min Retrials 1 2 3 4 5 10 20 Communication On Off On oft o Modbus master First Last cot c02 c03 c04 command settings c05 c06 C07 cos co9 C10 C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 C16 C17 C18 C19 C20 C21 C22 C23 C24 C25 C26 C27 C28 C29 C30 Address Numerical value Registers Type INT16 UINT16 INT32_B INT32_L UINT32_B UINT32_L FLOAT_B FLOAT_L App 8 IM 04L02A01 01E Appendix 2 Data Formats of ASCII Files This section describes the data format of the ASCII file The DX200 creates two types of ASCII files the manual sampled data
172. again the data is saved to a new file Clearing the report data in the internal memory These procedures are carried out in the setting mode The report data are cleared along with the display data for example For the procedures see section 9 7 11 26 IM 04L02A01 01E 11 13 Setting the Report Function Basic Setting Mode Procedure Set the report type report channels the time and date to create the report The report function is set in the basic setting mode These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press To display the setting screen press the soft key 5 r Report Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears Report set Date Time lt hour Report CH On Off Channel Sum scale Noob OND The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Report set Hour Creates hourly reports Day Creates daily reports Hour Day Creates hourly and daily reports Day Week Creates daily and weekly reports Day Month Creates daily and monthly reports 2 Date Day of the week This is the date or
173. age Input Setting To measure the DC voltage input or the DC current input using an external shunt resistor follow the procedures below to set the voltage input The range cannot be changed while data acquisition or computation is in progress Procedure These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press To display the setting screen press the soft key 1 First CH Last CH Jer al Range Span Node Range Lower Upper y a oa 1 000 2 3 4 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels 2 Mode Set the mode to Volt 3 Range Set the input range 4 Upper and lower limits of span Set the upper and lower limits of the display span Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter a value in the allowed range and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21
174. age medium insert the storage medium into the drive and close the front cover The storage medium in the drive is detected and you can save the data residing in the internal memory to the storage medium When the save operation is finished remove the storage medium from the drive Repeat the same procedure the next time the data is to be saved You can specify whether to store the entire data in the memory or only the data that have not been stored to the storage medium beforehand The external storage medium is placed in the drive at all times Data saving to the external storage medium is done automatically Displayed data The display data in the internal memory is saved to the external storage medium at the specified interval auto save interval see section 8 8 or the specified date and time see section 8 12 The down arrows in the example below indicate the times at which the display data or event data only during free mode in the internal memory is closed as a single file Example 1 Auto save interval 1 day Date and time to save data Not specified 7 19 13 10 7 20 13 10 7 21 13 10 7 22 13 10 Start Example 2 Auto save interval 1 day Date and time to save data 0 00 everyday 7 19 13 10 7 20 0 00 7 21 0 00 7 22 0 00 Start Example 3 Auto save interval 12 hours Date and time to save data 0 00 everyday 7 19 13 10 7 200 00 12 00 7 21 0 00 12 00 7 22 0 00 12 00 Start Example 4 Auto save interval 2 days
175. age medium at the day specified by Day of the week at the hour on the hour specified by Time hour Month Saves the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium at the date specified by Date at the hour on the hour specified by Time hour 8 26 IM 04L02A01 01E 8 12 Specifying the Date Time When Data Is To Be Saved to the External Storage Medium Basic Setting Mode 2 Date or Day of the week When Timeup type is set to Hour Day or Month Date is displayed However the Date setting is valid only when Timeup type is set to Month It is invalid otherwise Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter the value Enter the date 1 28 and press DISP ENTER Procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 You cannot specify 29 30 or 31 When Timeup type is set to Week Day of the week is displayed Enter the day of the week using the soft key 3 Time hour Time when data is to be saved This is invalid when Timeup type is set to Hour Enter the hour 00 23 using the same method as step 2 Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Explanation When power failure occurs during auto save mode Acquired data are saved to t
176. age medium is inserted into the drive and the data are saved the sequence number of the directory name increments by one Example When the specified directory name is DATAO the first set of data are saved to DATAO 000 and the second set of data are saved to DATAO 001 When the directory name is changed the sequence number is reset to zero When the data are divided and saved over multiple external storage media due to lack of space on the storage medium the same directory name is used Ifthe specified directory already exists in the external storage medium an error message is displayed and the operation terminates data are not saved When using auto save Data are automatically stored by leaving the external storage medium inserted in the drive For the data storage operation see section 8 4 Procedure Note Do not remove the external storage medium while it is being accessed For the memory usage display of the internal memory see section 4 2 To check the free space on the storage medium see section 9 5 For the name of the directory in which the data are saved see section 8 9 When the external storage medium does not have enough space 1 The message Not enough free space on media appears Change the external storage medium The unsaved data are saved to the external storage medium at the time for the next auto save execution Note __ Be aware that data in the internal memory will be o
177. al On Off On 3 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Meas CH Math CH To set the measurement channels select Meas CH To set the computation channels select Math CH Math CH appears only on models with the computation option M1 2 First channel and last channel Select the desired channel numbers 3 On Off On Display the trend acquire data Off Do not display the trend do not acquire data The initial setting is On for all channels Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key The number of measurement and computation channels available in the different models Model Measurement Channel Computation channel DX204 4 channels 1 to 4 8 channels 31 to 38 DX208 8 channels 1 to 8 8 channels 31 to 38 DX210 10 channels 1 to 10 30 channels 31 to 60 DX220 20 channels 1 to 20 30 channels 31 to 60 DX230 30 channels 1 to 30 30 channels 31 to 60 8 22 IM 04L02A01 01E 8 11 Setting the Method of the Display Event Data Acquisition Basic Setting Mode Procedure Set the method of the display event data acquisition These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move t
178. al Specifications Input source resistance Transport and Storage Conditions Volt range With variation of 1 kQ Ranges of 2 V or less Ranges of 6 V or greater TC range With variation of 1 kQ Within 10 uV 100 uV when the burnout upscale downscale function is switched on RTD range Pt100 With variation of 10 Q per wire resistance of all three wires must be equal 0 1 of rdg 1 digit or less With maximum difference of 40 mohms between wires approximately 0 1 C within 10 uV 0 1 of rdg or less The following specifies the environmental conditions required during transportation from shipment to the start of service and during storage as well as during transportation and storage if the DX200 is temporarily taken out of service No malfunction will occur under these conditions with serious damage which is impossible to repair however calibration may be necessary to recover normal operation performance Ambient temperature Humidity Vibration Shock Other Specifications Clock Daylight saving Accuracy of clock Memory backup Key lock function Key login function Insulation resistance 25 C to 60 C 5 to 95 RH No condensation is allowed 10 to 60 Hz 4 9 m s maximum 392 m s maximum while being packed With calendar function year of grace The time can be adjusted by a remote contact with the remote control option Summer and wintertime can be set 100 ppm
179. ale Volt 20 mV 60 mV 200 mV 2V Other parameters 6V 20V 50V Upper lower limits of span Upper lower limits of scale TC R S B K E J T N w L U RTD PT JPT DI Level Cont Unit Character string Delta Volt 20 mV 60 mV 200 mV 2V Other parameters 6V 20V 50V Upper lower limits of span TC R S B K E J T N Ww L U RTD PT JPT DI Level Cont Ref CH Up to model types DI Level Cont Other parameters Upper ower limits of span Saqrt 20 mV 60 mV 200 mV 2V Other parameters Upper lower limits of span 6V 20V 50V Upper lower limits of scale Unit Character string Skip Alarm On Off On Type H L h I R r T t Value Numerical value Relay On Off On Off Number 101 to 106 111 to 116 121 to 126 131 to 136 Up to model types Tag Tag Character string Initial setting is all space Moving average Count 2 3 4 DX210 DX220 DX230 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Filter 5s 10s DX204 DX208 Alarm delay time 1 to 3600 s Trend Save Time div 15s 30s 15 s and 30 s are for DX204 and interval 5 min 10 min 20 min 30 min DX208 only th 2h 4h 10h Auto save interval 10 min to 31 days Ca Up to other parameters set Message Characters No 1 to No 8 Character string Initial setting is all space File Header Character string Initial setting is all space Directory name Character string Initial setting is DATA 0 Save data Unsave IM 04L02A01 01E App 1 xipueddy Ea Appendix 1 Parameters and Initial Settings
180. alues All red Released Alarm mark Green color Alarm type Not displayed Measured value Blue color Hold Activated Alarm mark Blinks in red Stops blinking with alarm ACK Alarm type measured value Displayed in red Released Alarm mark Blinks in green Stops blinking with alarm ACK Alarm type Not displayed Measured value Blue Alarm indication in the digital display TAG 02 Alarm mark f H 1 363 m Measured value Indicator Hold Non Hold Alarm Alarm Indication Non hold Activated Alarm mark measured values All red Released Alarm mark Green Measured value Blue Hold Activated Alarm mark Blinks in red Stops blinking with alarm ACK Measured value Red Released Alarm mark Blinks in green Stops blinking with alarm ACK Measured value Blue 6 2 IM 04L02A01 01E 6 1 Releasing the Alarm Indication and Output Relay Option Alarm indication in the bar graph display TAG 84 1 8 8 Alarm mark 2 000 Alarm point mark panto 5 209 Measured value Indicator Hold Non Hold Alarm Alarm Indication Non hold Activated Alarm mark alarm point mark and measured values All red Released Alarm mark Green Alarm point mark Green Measured value Blue Hold Activated Alarm mark Blinks in red Stops blinking with alarm ACK Alarm point measured values Red Released Alarm mark Blinks in green Stops blinking with ala
181. and computation channel data enter the condition described in the following table status E and O are output in the report Data Condition Status Common to measurement and computation channels Measurement error or computation error E For measurement channels Positive over range O Negative over range O Over range occurs when the input type is voltage and the input exceeds 5 of the measurable range For example consider the case when the measurement range is 2 V and the measurable range is from 2 000 to 2 000 V If the input signal exceeds 2 200 V over range occurs If the input signal falls below 2 200 V over range occurs Over range occurs when the input type is TC thermocouple or RTD resistance temperature detector and the input exceeds approximately 10 C of the measurable range For example consider the case when the measurement range is R and the measurable range is from 0 0 to 1760 0 C If the input signal exceeds approximately 1770 0 C over range occurs If the input signal falls below approximately 10 0 C over range occurs For computation channels Positive computation overflow when the value exceeds 3 4E 38 Negative computation overflow when the value falls below 3 4E 38 oo App 12 IM 04L02A01 01E Appendix 2 Data Formats of ASCII Files Measurement computation errors are discarded when MAX and MIN are determined Measurement comput
182. anumeric characters Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a string Enter the string and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 Note For models with the batch function BT1 option duplicate user names cannot be registered See Confirming operation below quit cannot be used as the user name All spaces are also not allowed for the user name 7 User ID Enter the user ID up to 4 alphanumeric characters using the same method as step 6 8 Password Enter the password up to 6 alphanumeric characters using the same method as step 6 Note For models with the batch function BT1 option the combinations of user IDs and passwords that are identical to those that have been registered by any user in the past cannot be specified See Confirming operation below 9 Enter setup Select whether or not to allow the login user to enter the basic setting mode Enable The user can enter the basic setting mode Disable The user can not enter the basic setting mode Note The Enter Setup of all users cannot be set to Disabled If specified the user with the lowest registration number with the fifth parameter turned On is automatically set to Enabled The setting is changed when the setup data is stored and the basic setting mode is terminated
183. arameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press w To display the setting screen press the soft key 3 Daylight saying time YY MM DD HH Summer im 80 01 01 00 Winter 0n 88701701 08 1 2 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 On Off Select whether or not to use the daylight savings time adjustment function If On is selected a box used to enter the year month and day appears If this parameter is set to On and the summer winter time is set this parameter turns Off automatically when the set time is elapsed 2 Summer Winter Set the time at which the daylight savings time adjustment is to be enabled disabled Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter the year month day and time Enter the values and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 10 22 IM 04L02A01 01E 10 14 Using the Daylight Savings Time Adjustment Function Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A wind
184. arm 3 Type Set the alarm type H Upper limit alarm L Lower limit alarm T Delay upper limit alarm t Delay lower limit alarm Note If you select delay alarm T or t for the alarm type you must set the alarm delay period See section 6 3 4 Value Set the value at which the alarm is activated Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter a value and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 5 Relay On Off Set whether or not to activate the relay output If On is selected output relay Number is displayed 6 Number Set the output relay number For the correspondence between the output relay number and the output relay position see section 2 4 If the alarm output relay option AR1 AR2 A3 A4 or A5 is not installed this setting is void Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Explanation Alarm type Two types of alarms are available Name Symbol Description Upper limit alarm H An alarm occurs when the measured value becomes greater than or equal to the alarm value Lower limit alarm L An alarm occ
185. arrow key 3 Select ALL CHANNEL or GROUP CHANNEL using the up and down arrow keys The one that is selectable is displayed in the sub menu TREND gt e Iza J LLL w ALL CHANNEL AH 43 4 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key Trend Horizontal Display All Channel Display Waveforms for all channels that are registered to display the trend are displayed Inin diy 1 6 1 8 2 0 l 0 065 y HH LIL Ss wo nN 0 066 V mEnE pme S S aa w 8 z ed 0 066 y 0 067 V ATRD RAIK 0 068 V n nN TT 0 069 V I Waveforms for all channels that are Data from selected group registered to display the trend are displayed 4 8 IM 04L02A01 01E 4 3 Using the Trend Digital and Bar Graph Screens Changing the group on the display screen The following three methods are available If all channel display is selected waveforms for all channels that are registered to display the trend see section 8 10 are displayed even when the group is changed Changing the group on the display screen from the screen menu 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu 2 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key
186. atch information is also displayed 2 Use the arrow keys to select Mem Math and press DISP ENTER to stop the computation At this point the data acquisition to the internal memory is also stopped The computation icon in the status display section also disappears Operation using the FUNC key 1 Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu When the computation is suspended the Math START soft key is displayed If the computation is in progress the Math STOP soft key is displayed Starting the computation 2 Press the Math START key to start the computation When the computation is started a computation icon is displayed in the status display section For details related to the status display section see section 4 2 Nath START cs Stopping the computation 2 Press the Math STOP key to stop the computation The computation icon in the status display section disappears EX C 11 8 IM 04L02A01 01E 11 3 Using the Computation Function Operation using the USER key The operation is for when the start stop function of computation is assigned to the USER key Starting the computation 1 Press the USER key to start the computation When the computation is started a computation icon is displayed in the status display section For details related to the status display section see section 4 2 Stopping the computation 1 Press the USER key to stop the computation The computation icon in the status displa
187. ation errors over range and computation overflow are discarded when determining AVE and SUM The report output values of AVE MAX MIN and SUM vary depending on the data condition of the measurement and computation channels as shown in the table below Item Data Condition of Measurement Channels Report Output Value AVE When all data are measurement errors or over range Blank Average value MAX MIN When all data are measurement errors Blank Maximum value Positive over range 99999 minimum value Negative over range 99999 SUM When all data are measurement errors or over Blank Sum value range When the sum value exceeds 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 When the sum value is below 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 Item Data Condition of Computation Channels Report Output Value AVE When all data are computation errors or over range Blank Average value MAX MIN When all data are computation errors Blank Maximum value When the maximum value exceeds 99999999 999999999 minimum value When the minimum value is below 9999999 99999999 The decimal position that was specified when the span for the equation was specified is reflected in the maximum and minimum values For example if the span setting of the equation is 200 0 then 99999999 is output when the value exceeds 99999999 9 and 99999999 is output when the value is below 999999 9 SUM When all data a
188. auto save interval varies depending on the display update rate sampling interval is determined from the display update rate the data type display data only display data and event data and the number of measurement and computation channels to be stored see section 8 10 The available choices for the auto save interval are displayed on the soft key See the table below Display update 15s 30s 1min 2min 5min 10min 20min 30min 1h 2h 4h 10h rate DIV Sampling 0 5 1 2 4 10 20 40 60 120 240 480 1200 interval s Auto save 10min 10min 10min 10min 10min 10 min interval choices 20min 20min 20min 20min 20min 20 min 30min 30min 30min 30min 30min 30 min 1h 1h 1h 1h 1h 1h 1h 1h 1h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 3day 3day 3day 3day 3day 3day 3day 3day 3day 5day 5day 5day 5day 5day 5day 5day 5day 7day 7day 7day 7day 7day 7day 7day 7 day 10 day 10day 10day 10day 10day 10day 10 day 10 day 14 day 14day 14day 14day 14day 14 day 14 day 31 day 31 day 31 day 31 day 31 day 31 day for DX204 and DX208 only IM 04L02A01 01E 8 19 wn p an eabe10jg jeus9 xq 0 Bujaes pue uoljsinboy eead el 8 9 Setting the File Header Directory Name and
189. ave settings screen File name Time TEST PNL 2000 01 01 02 05 Save settings File name 1 Enter the name of the setup data file to be saved Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a string Enter the string up to 8 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 To cancel the operation and return to the Save Load Initialize menu press the ESC key Note The extension PNL will automatically be added to the file name The following character combinations cannot be used as file names AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK All spaces are not allowed for file names Spaces at the top or in the middle of a character string are not allowed 2 Press the DISP ENTER key to save the data The saved file appears in the file list If a file with the same name as you entered exists on the external storage medium a message will appear to confirm overwriting Select Yes or No and press the DISP ENTER key IM 04L02A01 01E 9 3 ejeq Bulzijeniuy pue saji4 Guibeuey el 9 1 Saving oading setup data Loading setup data in the basic setting mode Procedure Loads the setup data set in both the setting mode and the basic Setting mode from a setup file in the external s
190. aximum value of the data length varies depending on the sampling interval It is also dependent on the type of data to be acquired display data and event data or event data only and the number of measurement and computation channels to be acquired see section 8 10 The available choices for the data length are displayed on the soft key menu See the table below Sample 0 125 0 25 0 5 1 2 5 10 30 60 120 300 600 rate s Data length 3min 3min 3min 3min 3min choices 5min 5min 5min 5min 5min 10min 10min 10min 10min 10min 10min 10 min 20min 20min 20min 20min 20min 20min 20 min 30 min 30min 30min 30min 30min 30min 30 min 1h 1h 1h 1h 1h 1h 1h 1h 1h 1h 1h 1h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 1 day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 3day 3day 3day 3day 3day 3day 3day 5day 5day 5day 5day 5day 5day 5day 7day 7day 7day 7day 7day 7 day 10 day 10day 10day 10day 10day 10 day 14day 14day 14day 14day 14 day 31 day 31 day 31 day 31 day for DX204 and DX208 only IM 04L02A01 01E 8 25 wnip n eabe10jg jeus9 xq 0 Burnes pue uonisinboy eead el 8 12 Specifying the Date Time When Data Is To Be Saved to the External Storage Medium Basic Setting Mode Procedure When the method used to save the data in the
191. between 16 7 ms and 20 ms Fixed to 20 ms on P1 models that use the 24 VDC power supply 1 4 IM 04L02A01 01E 1 3 Display Function Common Items Related to the Display 10 4 TFT Color LCD and the Screen Configuration The DX200 has a 10 4 TFT color LCD 480 by 640 dot resolution The screen consists of the status display section and the data display section GROUP 1 ao oo e4 09 GAO OS NN Quin 1 16 S Status display section 1 658 Data display section Status Display Section Displays the displayed screen name date and time or batch name batch name is for BT1 option only internal memory external storage medium usage condition alarm condition key lock user name key login function and computation condition option For details see section 4 2 Data Display Section Displays the operation screen such as the trend display digital display and bar graph display of the measured and computed data as well as alarm message and file information Displays the setup screen for the setting and basic setting modes when the DX200 is being configured For details related to the setting and basic setting modes see section 3 5 Group Display The data displayed on the trend digital and bar graph displays are the data of measurement or computation channels that are assigned to the group Up to 10 channels can be assigned to a s
192. brations Choose an installation location with the minimum mechanical vibration Horizontal Install the DX200 horizontally However the DX200 can be inclined up to 30 degrees backwards for panel mounting Note Condensation may occur if the DX200 is moved to another place where both the ambient temperature and humidity are higher or if the temperature changes rapidly In addition measurement errors will result when using thermocouples In this case let the DX200 adjust to the new environment for at least one hour before using it The lifetime of the LCD may be shortened if the DX200 is used in a high temperature environment over a long period of time When installing the DX200 in a high temperature environment greater than 40 C we recommend the backlight brightness of the LCD be set to alow setting For setting the LCD brightness see section 7 14 Do not install the DX200 in the following places Outdoors Indirect sunlight or near heat sources Install the DX200 in a place with small temperature fluctuations near room temperature 23 C Placing the DX200 in direct sunlight or near heat sources can cause adverse effects on the internal circuitry Where an excessive amount of soot steam moisture dust or corrosive gases are present Soot steam moisture dust and corrosive gases will adversely affect the DX200 Avoid such locations Near strong magnetic field sources Do not bring magnets or instruments that produce
193. cable power circuit and ground cable e Itis desirable that the item being measured does not generate noise However if this is unavoidable isolate the measurement circuit from the item Also ground the item being measured Shielded wires should be used to minimize noise caused by electrostatic induction Connect the shield to the ground terminal of the DX200 as necessary make sure you are not grounding at two points To minimize noise caused by electromagnetic induction twist the measurement circuit wires at short equal intervals Make sure to earth ground the protective ground terminal through minimum resistance less than 100 Q When using internal reference junction compensation on the thermocouple input take measures to stabilize the temperature at the input terminal Always use the input terminal cover Do not use thick wires which may cause large heat dissipation cross sectional area 0 5 mm or less recommended Make sure that the ambient temperature remains reasonably stable Large temperature fluctuations can occur if a nearby fan turns ON or OFF Connecting the input wires in parallel with other devices can cause signal degradation affecting all connected devices If you need to make a parallel connection then Turn the burnout function OFF See section 5 9 Ground the instruments to the same point Do not turn ON or OFF another instrument during operation This can have adverse effects on the oth
194. cally sets the clock ahead by one hour Example If the time is set to 9 o clock on June 1 the time is set ahead to 10 o clock June 1 When the specified time is reached at which the daylight savings time adjustment is to be disabled the DX200 automatically sets the clock back by one hour Example If the time is set to 9 o clock on December 1 the time is set back to 8 o clock December 1 For the setting procedure see section 10 14 The temperature unit can be set to Celsius C or Fahrenheit F This applies to all channels For the setting procedure see section 10 15 VGA Output Terminal D5 option By using the RGB output the DX200 s screen can be displayed on a VGA monitor or multi synchronous monitor that can display VGA For the operating procedure see section 2 7 24 VDC Power Supply for Transmitter TPS4 TPS8 option Provides 24 VDC power to transmitters IM 04L02A01 01E 1 33 suonouny JO MAIAJ9AQ 5 Chapter 2 Before Using the DX200 2 1 Precautions on the Use of the DX200 Read the following precautions before using the DX200 and the external storage medium floppy disk Zip disk ATA flash memory card Handling Precautions Use care when cleaning the DX200 especially any plastic parts When cleaning wipe with a dry soft cloth Do not use chemicals such as benzene or thinner since these may cause discoloring and deformation Keep electrically charged objects away fr
195. ceeeeeeseeeeeeneeeseseeeeeneeeees key operations basic setting mode x key operations setting mode ssessesseererrrerrerrrereerrnrre key panel COVER isrssinssie eiit ii key trigge hernen aaa etek e oea aiar eee nest L listoffileS ins una ele Misha load the setup data remote control loading setup data basic setting mode s e 9 4 loading setup data setting mode eee 9 2 log Communication command cceeeeeeeeeeeeteeteeeteeees 10 11 Index 2 IM 04L02A01 01E log e Mail i 10 11 log error MESSAGE ssssessssssssrerssesseressnesnreneesrensesenenecs 10 10 log FTP log key login logout eessessserrerseeresrrerresrnerrerrnrrrerrnrrnes log web operation ss sssssrsssssserrenssnesnesenerncrenenenrenennne log display 00 logical computation logical format fe lot MUMBO Dl ieas aai iaaa aae aoa aaea eos a a aaa Eaa lower limit alarm essssssesssessesressssennnnsssnesasernennenenenssennrneeenn lower limit on rate of change alarm eseeeeeeeeeeee 1 23 MAG address 1 csi a E MAINTENANCE oo eee eee e eee ce ee eeeeeeeeeee sees ease tee aeeeseeeeeeeeeeetaee manager NAME niini niie a a a aaia manual sample manual sampled data ccc manual sampled data file Data format manual sampling remote Control seese MANUAlSAVC preii a a canvases a a maximum number of data points per channe
196. cesseeeeeeeeeseees format time format ly p62 esa Be ee Se ne os formatting free ww free space front cover front panel FA PWCS0 fis it soe oo eae et year este hae eect acetate eA FUNC key eeseereeeees functional ground terminal TUS iniiae a a eee edie eae ated G OI Scere ge Aa ace a Se 7 24 GFOUP CISPIAY cess stesiessuecisctvsescosnecsdsneseteenatdusteabaceonacnstie 1 5 4 11 H Fl ssosiceseaueunceteseect OEE E EA Mae a a Se a a aE E Mreuueee half screen display 00 0 cece cee ceee eens eeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeaes Nistorical trend PEE E T T hold non hold alarm indication ee eee hold non hold alarm output relay ni hourly reports a a s eden Lho s UUU initial setting 4 screen display eeeeeeeeeeneee ee 4 25 Initial settings basic setting mode eee App 4 initial settings setting mode App 1 initializing oo eee eect eters 9 15 input specifications remote control wi 2 14 input terminals 0 2 0 cece cece cece ee eeee eee eeeeetecaeeeteeaeeeenaeeeeee 3 3 input type installation a integration tiMe gt svsseerete eee eee head eel ate 1 4 internal MOMOSY cec cee cece ceeeeeeceeeteeeseeeeeseaeeeseeaeeeeneaeeeeee 1 20 interval rate of change alarm essees 1 23 K KO A E TA E E TE 3 2 key lock 1 29 key lOCK ICON seis teenie i 4 4 key login function with batch function eee 1 27 key login logout cccceeceeeeeeeeeee
197. cha Le Temperature i Unit Jc futo 58Hz 68Hz 188ns Parameter selections selected using the soft keys Cursor position IM 04L02A01 01E 1 3 Display Function Setting the Display Conditions of the LCD The following display conditions of the LCD can be configured Screen Attribute Settings Background color of the operation screen You can select white or black for the background color of the screen The initial setting is white For the setting procedure see section 7 13 LCD brightness The brightness of the LCD can be set between four levels The initial setting is 2 For the setting procedure see section 7 14 Backlight saver The lifetime of the LCD backlight can be extended by automatically dimming the light when there is no key operation for a certain amount of time The screen returns to the original brightness with a key operation or an alarm occurrence The initial setting is set so that the backlight saver is disabled For the setting procedure see section 7 14 IM 04L02A01 01E suonouny JO MAIAJ9AQ ce 1 4 Storage Function Acquiring Data to the Internal Memory Display Data and Event Data The measured computed data are first acquired to the DX200 s internal memory as two types of data display data and event data Then the data are saved to the external storage medium automatically or when the external storage medium is inserted into the drive You can se
198. ck that the ambient temperature and humidity are within the normal operating conditions See chapter 14 3 Apply input signals corresponding to 0 50 and 100 of the specified input range and calculate the errors from the readings If the error is not within the accuracy specifications contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Note For TC input the temperature of the input terminals must be measured and a voltage corresponding to the temperature at the reference junction must be added DC Voltage Measurement Example for the DX210 Power supply terminals gt 5 5 O oO Oo ia Oo o Oo Q em O TERRE x Q00000 LI Sass Osi Seeeeeeeeehs 00000 0 otg Input terminals DC voltage standard IM 04L02A01 01E 13 3 13 3 Calibration Temperature Measurement Using the RTD Example for the DX210 Power supply terminals C eae E 3 The resistance of three lead wires must be equal Beceeccece cm i f 5600000 SSSSSS0S5SSc A eesssseen a Input terminal z p as Decade resistance box Model 2793 01 from Yokogawa M amp C Temperature Measurement Using the TC Example for the DX210 Thermocouple wires Coppe
199. client function on the DX200 has a timer function that drops the connection if there is no data transfer for two minutes If the server does not respond within this time period the transfer fails The FTP client function on the DX200 overwrites files with the same file names on the server without any warnings unless the server rejects the request For information regarding the FTP client function of the DX200 see the DX100 DX200 Communication Interface User s Manual IM 04L02A01 17E Communication Errors For information regarding the communication function of the DX200 see the DX100 DX200 Communication Interface User s Manual IM 04L02A01 17E e Errors during Setting and Basic Setting Modes Output Communication Command Execution and Setup Data Loading Code Message 300 Command is too long 301 Too many number of commands delimited with 302 This command has not been defined 303 Data request command can not be enumerated with sub delimiter 350 Command is not permitted to the current user level 351 This command cannot be specified in the current mode 352 The option is not installed 353 This command cannot be specified in the current setting 354 This command is not available during sampling or calculating 12 6 IM 04L02A01 01E 12 1 A List of Messages Memory Access Errors during Setting and Basic Setting Modes and Output Communication Command Execution An English
200. constant 2 s 5s Filter time constant 5 s 10s Filter time constant 10 s Moving Average Off Do not use moving average 2to16 Number of data samples for the moving average IM 04L02A01 01E 5 9 Setting the A D Integration Time Scan Interval Burnout and Reference Junction Compensation Basic Setting Mode Set the integration time of the A D converter scan interval thermocouple input burnout and reference junction compensation RJC Procedure These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press uw Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears To display the setting screen press the soft key O r A D Integrate mA Scan interval 1s me First CH Last CH Jar Burnout set 4 RJC 5 Volt uy 8 H 6 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure Setting the integration time of the A D converter 1 Integrate Select from Auto 50 Hz 60 Hz and 100 ms using soft keys DX204 DX208 Auto 50 Hz 60 Hz DX210 DX220 DX230 Auto 50 Hz 60 Hz 100 ms Auto automatically
201. creen press the soft key oat Alan Ref lash Mia 1 Relay AND None 2 Action Energize 3 Behavior Nonhold 4 Indicator Nonhold 5 Rate of change Increase 25 Decrease 2 4 6 Hysteresis On The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure Setting reflash 1 Reflash Select On or Off On Use reflash function Off Not use reflash function Setting the AND OR logic of output relays 2 Relay AND Select the relays that are to use the AND logic Set the last relay that is to use the AND logic The relays beyond this relay will use the OR logic Select from None 101 101 only I01 102 101 and 102 and l01 136 101 to 136 The setting is valid for relays specified by options Setting the output relay operation energize de energize 3 Relay Action Select energize or de energize using the soft key Setting the output relay operation hold non hold 4 Relay Behavior Select hold or non hold using the soft key When the alarm output relay option is not installed these settings are void Setting the alarm indication operation hold non hold 5 Indicator Select hold or non hold using the soft key 6 10 IM 04L02A01 01E 6 4 Setting the Auxiliary Alarm Function Basic Setting Mode Explanation Setting the interval for the rate of change alarm 6 Rate of change Increase
202. cted in the Message Summary is written Also displaying the historical trend selected in the Memory Summary Switching to the trend or bar graph screen that contains the channel data pointed on the overview screen Note In order to switch from the 4 screen display to other screens select Expand first DISP ENTER key four arrow keys IM 04L02A01 01E 4 1 su 19 5 UOl e19dQ BulyoyMs 4 2 Using the Status Display Section The following information is displayed in the status display section during the operation mode and the setting mode The information is not displayed in the basic setting mode Setup Mode is displayed instead 5 1 DOA EUD 8 9 11 DIS ETU EVENT a oo GROUP 1 ALL l Jan 51 zomn 00 08 45 os ro Free mode 10 Jar EOR Tregger or Rotate mode user1 GROUP 1 ALL Jan 01 2000 00 08 13 i To To To E j O Eel Ei 1 User name The user name is displayed when a user is logged in using the login function 2 Group name or screen name The name of the group or screen that is displayed in the data display section ALL is displayed only during all channel display see section 4 3 3 Current date and time The current date and time are displayed
203. ction and Report Function MA Option ainireti Hii di idea atid ies eileen 1 7 Batch Function BT1 Option 0 0 ee ccceeeee ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneesaeseneesaeeseeenieesiaeeeeeenaas 1 8 Other Functions cdectvenn nana ie ee nines Before Using the DX200 2 1 Precautions on the Use of the DX200 0 000 eeeeseeeeeeeee entrees enaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeneeeeeneeeeeaa 2 2 Installing the DX200 rrenan aaaea ah idaadtesspeeueseaieg abtieetea a KOTE ASSA PEEK AAAA ESITE 2 3 Input Signal Wiring ienien e AA el a ae 2 4 Alarm Output Wiring AR1 AR2 A3 A4 A5 Option oo eeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 2 5 FAIL Memory End Wiring F1 Option ceeceeceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeseeeeenaeesaeenees 2 6 Remote Control Wiring R1 Option 0 ecceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeneesaeseeeeenaeenaeeneees 2 7 VGA Output Connection D5 Option 0 0 eee eee eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneesaeeeeeeeneesieeenaees 2 8 24 VDC Transmitter Power Supply Wiring TPS4 Tps8 Option ceeeeeceeeeeerees 2 9 Power Supply Wiringwiti c eccdiitital decade vienna Names of Parts Run Mode Common Operations 3 1 Names of Parts and FUNCTIONS 00 0 0 ceeecceseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeaeeeseeeeeesaeeeenaeeeeneeeeeeneeeeees 3 2 Turning ON OFF the Power Switch eeceeecceceeceeeececeeeneeseeeesaeeeeeecueeesaaeeeeesnaeeseeeenaees 3 3 Inserting Removing the External Storage Medium cceeeeeeceeeeeeereeeeeeeeeenteeeeaeeee
204. d Enter setup Enable Disable Save Load Save settings Initialize Load settings Delete Format Initialize Option Action NO 1 to NO 8 None Start Stop Trigger Alatm ACK Remote Time adj Math Math rst M sample Start Stop Pnl 1 load Pnl 2 load Pnl 3 load Message 1 Message 2 Message3 Message4 Message 5 Message 6 Message 7 Snapshot Option Mode Off Relative Initial setting Timer 1 Absolute qa Interval Absolute 1 min 2 min 3 min Timer 2 3 Off No 1 2 3 5 min 6 min 10 min 15 min 20 min 30 min in o O 2h 3h 4h 6h 8h 12h 24h Relative Numerical value Ref time Numerical value Initial setting is 0 00 Reset On Action Off Datasave Option Report set Day Hour Day Report Day Week Day Month Date Numerical value Date of the week SUN MON TUE WEN THU FRI SAT Time hour Numerical value IM 04L02A01 01E App 5 xipueddy Ea Appendix 1 Parameters and Initial Settings Parameters Menu Notes Option Report CH R02 R03 R04 meee ROS R06 R07 R08 R09 R10 R11 R12 R13 R14 R15 R16 R17 R18 R19 R20 R21 R22 R23 R24 R25 R26 R27 R28 R29 R30 On Off Off Channel Up to model types Sum scale off min h day Communication IP address Nume
205. d Save interval Trend display rate 7 3 Auto save interval 8 8 Message 7 5 Message string File 8 9 Header string to be written to file Name of directory to which data are to be saved Range of data to be saved during manual save USER key 10 2 Assign an action to the USER key Daylight savings time 10 14 Summer winter time On Off 4 Display 4 1 Group set Trip line Group name 7 6 Assign channels to groups 7 6 Trip line position display color 7 7 4 2 Color 7 8 Measurement channel display color 4 3 Zone 7 9 Zone upper and lower limits Graph 7 10 Number of scale divisions for the trend and bar graph Bar graph base position Specify the scale display position for trends Partial 7 11 Turn On Off partial expanded display Position and boundary for the partial expanded display IM 04L02A01 01E 3 15 suoleiedg uowWOD epoyy UNy SHed JO SoWeN el 3 5 Configuring the Functions Setting Mode and Basic Setting Mode Soft key Settings in the setting mode Title Item 4 4 View 7 13 Trend display direction Bar graph display direction Background color white or black Trend line width Trip line width Grid for the trend display Group display switching interval Scroll time Scale digit LCD 7 14 LCD brightness Turn On Off the LCD backlight saver Transition time for the LCD backlight saver and conditions that restore the backlight 4 5 Math Color 7 8 Com
206. d out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press uw Press the soft key Next 1 2 To display the setting screen press the soft key 8 1 7 First CH Last CH EE EE Tag Alarm Delay Tag Time 18s TLOG Timer No 2 Sum scale Off 3 Rolling average On Off Off The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First CH and Last CH Select the desired channels For the channels set here the Tag Rolling average and Alarm Delay Time are also simultaneously set 2 Timer No This is the timer specified in the basic setting mode Select 1 2 or 3 3 Sumscale When the channel is computing TLOG SUM select Off s min or h The initial setting is Off You do not have to set this for channels that are not computing TLOG SUM leave it Off Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 11 18
207. day of the week on which the report is created If the Report set is set to Day Month Date is displayed If Day Week is specified Day is displayed If Hour Day or Hour Day is specified Date is displayed However this setting is void Date for monthly reports Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter the date Enter the date 01 28 and press the DISP ENTER key Procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 You cannot specify 29 30 or 31 Day for weekly reports Enter the day of the week using the soft key IM 04L02A01 01E 11 27 uondo uolouny Wodsey uolneyndwoyg Ey 11 13 Setting the Report Function Basic Setting Mode Explanation 3 Time hour Set the time to create daily weekly and monthly reports with the time on the hour 00 to 23 Enter the time using the same method as step 2 This setting is void for hourly reports Report CH This is the report channel to which the measurement computation channel is assigned Select from R01 to R30 The reports are output in order according to this number On Off On Use the report channel Off Do not use the report channel The report channel and the data are not displayed Channel Set the measurement or computation channel to assign to the report channel All measurement and computation channels can be specified However
208. de 2 Press the soft key to save the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium Ee Ea ee az Save Display The display data file is closed and saved to the external storage medium Save Event The event data file is closed and saved to the external storage medium Saving the data using key operation during auto save mode The data are acquired to the internal memory for the specified period from the point at which the data were previously saved to the external storage medium using key operation Then the data in the internal memory are saved to the storage medium This operation is repeated The following figure shows an example in which data are saved to the external storage medium at one hour intervals Execute data saving to the external storage medium using key operation 10790 11 Save to external i storage medium 12 0012 20 13 20 Time i gt Saving the data to the storage medium using key operation All data in the internal memory are saved to the external storage medium This cannot be executed while data acquisition is in progress For the operating procedure see section 9 2 Note See section 9 7 or 9 8 to clear data in the internal memory IM 04L02A01 01E winipayy eabe10jg jeus9 xq 0 Hulaes pue uoljsinboy eead el 8 8 Setting the Auto Save Interval for the Display Data Procedure When the method to save the data residing in the memory to the externa
209. de to Sart 3 Range Select the input range from 20 mV 60 mV 200 mV 2 V 6 V 20 V and 50 V 4 Upper and lower limits of span Set the upper and lower limits of the display span Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter a value in the allowed range and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 Note Span lower limit and span upper limit cannot be set to the same value IM 04L02A01 01E 5 11 sBunjes jouueyy juswoinseoyy eo 5 6 Square Root Computation Setting Explanation 5 Upper and lower limits of scale Set the upper and lower limits of the scale Enter a value in the allowed range using the same method as step 4 Allowed range 30000 to 30000 Decimal position The decimal can be set in the following positions CLOUD O00 oudo udad oo The decimal position is determined by the scale lower limit setting Note Scale lower limit and scale upper limit cannot be set to the same value The DX200 converts the measured data within a value span derived by removing the decimal from the scaling upper and lower limits In other words conversion is performed by using a span of 10 if the scale setting is 5 to 5 and 100 if the scale setting is 5 0 to 5 0 The resolution of the value derived by using a span of 10 is
210. dsiq oy Buiyesodo pue Buras 7 13 Setting the Display Direction Background Color Waveform Line Width Trip Line Width Grid Scroll Time and Scale digit Explanation Set the background color 3 Background Select white or black Note The background color of the historical trend is opposite that of the trend screen Setting the trend line width 4 Trend line Select the width of the trend line as 1 2 or 3 dots Setting the width of the trip line 5 Trip line Select the width of the trip line as 1 2 or 3 dots Setting the number of grids on the waveform display area 6 Grid Select the number of grids from 4 to 12 or Auto Auto Display the same number of grids as the number of scale divisions of the first assigned channel of the group Setting the interval at which the displayed group is automatically switched 7 Scroll time Select the interval from 5 s 10 s 20 s 30 s and 1 min Setting the number of displayed digits of the scale value 8 Scale digit Normal See the explanation given in Scale values in section 7 10 Fine The number of displayed digits of the scale value is increased by one See the explanation given in Scale values in section 7 10 Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and pres
211. e Entering Characters on page 3 22 3 CH Set Assign measurement computation channels to groups Enter the channel number according to the following rules using the same method as step 2 Enter the channel number using two digits Separate each channel with a period Consecutive channels can be specified using a hyphen Example To set CH1 CH3 CH5 to CH8 to a particular group 01 03 05 08 is entered IM 04L02A01 01E 7 6 Setting Groups Explanation Note The channels are displayed in the order they are specified on the trend digital bar graph screens One channel can be assigned to multiple groups Achannel cannot be assigned twice in the same group Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Initial settings of the groups Group Name Group 1 GROUP 1 Group 2 GROUP 2 Group 3 GROUP 3 Group 4 GROUP 4 The initial value varies depending on the number of installed channels Group Number DX204 DX208 DX210 1 2 3 4 01 02 03 04 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 01 02 03 04 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 01 02 03 04 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 01 02 03 04 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
212. e new settings they change back to white Press w Press the soft key Oom To display the setting screen press the soft key OoOo TU Brightness fa Backlight saver On Off On 2 Saver time ih 3 Restore Key Alm 4 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure Setting the brightness of the screen 1 Brightness Select from 1 2 3 and 4 A higher number corresponds to a brighter screen setting Setting the backlight saver 2 On Off When On is selected Saver time and Restore boxes are displayed 3 Saver time Select the time from 1 min 2 min 5 min 10 min 30 min and 1 hour If the specified time elapses without any key operation the LCD backlight is automatically dimmed 4 Restore Select Key or Key Alm Key Alarm Key The screen will return to the original brightness with a key operation Key Alm The screen will return to the original brightness with a key operation or an alarm occurrence IM 04L02A01 01E 7 25 Ae dsiq oy Buiyesodo pue Buras 7 14 Setting the Brightness of the Screen and the Backlight Saver Function Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 7 26 IM 04L02
213. e DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 Note The following character combinations cannot be used as volume names AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK All spaces are not allowed for volume names Spaces at the top or in the middle of a character string are not allowed When using storage media formatted by the instrument on a Windows 2000 PC you must change the volume label 2 Select Quick or Normal to set in the Type box To cancel the operation and return to the Save Load Clear data menu press the ESC key 3 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays a confirmation window Use the arrow keys to select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key to format the medium Type Quick Performs only a logical format Normal Performs both a physical format and a logical format Format type Floppy disk 2HD 1 44 MB Zip disk FDISK 1 partition hard disk format ATA flash memory card FDISK 1 partition hard disk format Format time Type of storage media Quick Normal Note Floppy disk Approx 6 s Approx 1 min 30 s Zip disk Approx 3 s Approx 10 min ATA flash memory card Approx 3 s Approx 1 min 30 s 20MB Approx 5 s Approx 6 min 160MB IM 04L02A01 01E 9 11 ejeq Bulzijeniuy pue saji4q Guibeuey el 9 5 Managing files Displaying free space on the external storage medium Deleting files and di
214. e basic setting mode for each user When logged out only the login operation can be accessed Key login logout is set in the basic setting mode When logged in the user name is displayed in the status display section See section 4 2 The records of key login logout can be viewed on the log screen See section 10 7 Note When the power is turned OFF and turned ON again the DX200 starts in the logged out condition Logging in 1 Press the FUNC key Soft keys and a list of user names are displayed 2 Select the user using the soft key User name list Enter setup Userl userl Enable User2 user2 Enable User3 user3 Disable Userd UserS User6 User User1 User2 User3 3 When using the user ID a window appears for you to enter the user ID Enter the user ID and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 i 4 A window appears for you to enter the password Enter the password and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 The user name is displayed in the status display section User name userl MESSAGE SUMMARY ee DISP DE 2hour 4716 Jan 01 2000 08 15 35 Logging out 1 Press the FUNC key The Logout soft key is displayed 2 Press the Logout soft key The user name shown in the status display section disappears Logout
215. e careful when ordering 4 Shunt resistor 4159 20 1 250 Q 0 1 for the screw terminal 4159 21 1 100 Q 40 1 4159 22 1 10 Q 0 1 5 Shunt resistor 4389 20 1 250 Q 0 1 for the clamped 4389 21 1 100 Q 0 1 input terminal 4389 22 1 10 Q 0 1 6 Fuse A1423EF 4 250 V 1 25 A time lag except for P1 model A1463EF 4 250 V 6 3 A time lag for P1 model 7 Mounting bracket B9900BX 2 Software Sold Separately The following software application is available Name Model DAQEXPLORER WX104 IM 04L02A01 01E vii How to Use this Manual Structure of the Manual This user s manual consists of the following sections For information about the communication functions the fieldbus function and the DAQSTANDARD see the respective manuals IM 04L02A01 17E IM 04L02A01 18E and IM 04L41B01 61E Chapter Title and Contents 1 Overview of Functions Describes the functions of the DX200 Before Using the DX200 Describes the installation and wiring procedures Names of Parts Run Mode Common Operations Describes the names of each part of the DX200 how to use the storage medium drive run mode and common key operations Switching Operation Screens Describes how to use the operation screen such as the trend display and digital display Describes the operations that can be performed using the arrow keys and the DISP ENTER key on the front panel Measurement Channel Settings Descr
216. e connection and that it responds within the proper time period ECHO Failed to transmit data on the control connection Check that the server does not drop the connection and that it responds within the proper time period REPLY Failed to receive data on the control connection Check that the server does not drop the connection and that it responds within the proper time period SERVER The server is not in a condition to provide the service Check that the server is in a condition in which service can be provided 12 4 IM 04L02A01 01E 12 1 A List of Messages Code Message 283 FTP command was not accepted Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 283 Character String and Details USER Failed user name verification Check the user name setting PASS Failed password verification Check the password setting ACCT Failed account verification Check the account setting TYPE Failed to change the transfer type Check that the server supports the binary transfer mode CWD Failed to change the directory Check the initial path setting PORT Failed to set the transfer connection Check that the security function is disabled PASV Failed to set the transfer connection Check that the server supports PASV commands SCAN Failed to read the transfer connection settings Check that proper response to the PASV command is received from the server 284 FTP transfer setting
217. e input signal of the channel set to compute the square root is displayed as the measured value of that channel The computed result can be scaled to a value in the appropriate unit and displayed When the input type is set to DC voltage thermocouple RTD or digital input the input signal can be converted to a value in the appropriate unit desired and displayed Channels that are not measured They are not displayed 1 Notation used by the DX200 to represent the input modes It is used when setting the measurement channels 2 This is optional 3 This item defines the type of signals that can be connected to the input terminal when the input mode is set to Difference Square root or Scaling The description of the input types DC voltage Thermocouple Resistive temperature detector and digital input are the same as the descriptions given for the input modes DC voltage Thermocouple Resistive temperature detector and digital input respectively 1 2 IM 04L02A01 01E 1 2 Functions of the Input Section If the signal to be measured is a DC current a shunt resistor is attached to the input terminal to convert the current signal to a voltage signal The input mode is set to DC voltage in this case For the various types of shunt resistors and the procedure related to setting the current input see section 5 1 Input Range and
218. e item being measured 5 Option terminals AR1 AR2 A3 A4 A5 F1 R1 TPS4 TPS8 option Connect optional input output signal cables 6 VGA output terminal D5 option Connect an external monitor 7 Functional ground terminal Note See the DX100 DX200 Communication interface user s manual IM 04L02A01 17E to use Ethernet port and the serial interface port 1 Carrying handle 2 Foot four IM 04L02A01 01E suoleiedg uoWwWOD epoyy UNy SHed JO SoWeN el 3 2 Turning ON OFF the Power Switch This section describes the procedures to turn ON OFF the power switch Procedure Turning ON the power 1 Check the following points before turning ON the power switch The power cord wires are connected correctly to the DX200 The DX200 is connected to the correct power supply see section 2 8 The proper fuse is set see section 13 4 CAUTION If the input wires are connected in parallel with another instrument avoid turning ON OFF the DX200 or the other instrument when either one is in operation This may affect the reading 2 Open the front cover 3 Turn the power switch ON 4 Close the cover After performing a self diagnosis for a few seconds a screen in the operation mode appears Turning OFF the power 1 Check that the external storage medium is not being accessed and turn OFF the power switch Note If nothing is displayed when the power switch is turned ON turn OFF the p
219. e of the title is fixed to 20 bytes The size of the serial number is fixed to 38 bytes The size of the file header is fixed to 49 bytes The size of the carriage return line feed is fixed to 2 bytes Calculation example Manual sampled data for 30 channels 20 2 38 2 49 2 8 19 x 30 2 6 9 x 30 2 971 bytes Size of the data section of one data set The following equation can be used to derive the size of data section of one data set Date and time of manual sampling measured value 8 x number of measurement channel computed value 10 x number of computation channels carriage return line feed The size of the date and time of creation is fixed to 19 bytes The size of the carriage return line feed is fixed to 2 bytes Calculation example Manual sampled data for 30 measurement channels 19 8 x 30 10 x 0 2 261 bytes IM 04L02A01 01E App 9 xipueddy Ea Appendix 2 Data Formats of ASCII Files e Number of data sets and file size The file size of 50 data sets for 30 measurement channels is calculated as follows Size of the header section 50 x size of the data section of one data set 14019 bytes 50 data sets is the maximum number of manual sampled data sets that can be written in the internal memory If there are more than 50 data sets they are overwritten starting with the oldest data set Note Positive negative over range in measurement chan
220. e sure to earth ground the protective earth terminal through a grounding resistance less than 100 Q before turning ON the power Use crimp on lugs designed for 4 mm screws for power and ground wiring termination See section 2 3 Input Signal Wiring To prevent electric shock make sure to attach the transparent terminal cover Make sure to provide a power switch double pole type on the power supply line in order to separate the DX200 from the main power supply Put an indication on this switch as the breaker on the power supply line for the DX200 Switch Specification Rated power current 1A or more except for P1 model 3 A or more for P1 model Rated rush current 60 A or more except for P1 model 70 A or more for P1 model Use a switch complied with IEC60947 1 3 Connect a fuse between 2 A and 15 A to the power line The power switch and fuse used on the power supply line should be CSA approved for the use in North America or VDE approved for the use in Europe Do not add a switch or fuse to the ground line Use a power supply that meets the following conditions Item except for P1 model for P1 model Rated power supply 100 to 240 VAC 24 VDC AC Allowable power supply voltage range 90 to 132 or 180 to 264 VAC 21 6 to 26 4 VDC AC Rated power supply frequency 50 60 Hz 50 60 Hz for AC Allowable power supply frequency range 50 60 Hz 2 50 60 Hz 2 for AC Maximum power consumption 75 VA 100 V
221. easurement NO YES NO Is the input wiring correct YES Is the input wiring parallel YES with other equipment NO NO Is the RJC setting correct for TC input YES Contact your nearest Sales amp Service Center Change the input to meet the specifications See section 14 1 Adjust the span and range See sections 5 1 to 5 7 Separate the input wiring from the noise source Ground the recorder properly Ground the measuring object properly Insulate the TC from the measured object e Use shielded cable for input e Correct the A D integration frequency See section 5 9 e Use the input filter See section 5 8 e Use the cover for the input terminal Protect the input terminal from wind or fans Keep the room temperature constant around the input terminal Wire correctly See section 2 3 Fix the terminal block properly Fasten the terminal screws Insulate the RTD from ground If burnt replace the TC e Stop the TC burnout upscale downscale function of other equipment e Ground the recorder and other equipment at the same grounding pole Disconnect parallel wiring Use a double element TC for instance Set correctly See section 5 9 12 10 IM 04L02A01 01E 12 2 Troubleshooting Flow Chart Display and other functions do not work properly e Separate the input and communication wiring fro
222. ed products contact your local Yokogawa Europe B V office IM 04L02A01 01E Safety Precautions The DX200 conforms to IEC safety class provided with terminal for protective grounding Installation Category II and EN61326 1 EMC standard class A use ina commercial industrial or business environment This product is a measurement category II CAT Il instrument Mesurement category II CAT II Applies to measuring circuits connected to low voltage installation and electrical instruments supplied with power from fixed equipment such as electric switchboards The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation If the DX200 is used in a manner not specified in this manual the protection provided by the DX200 may be impaired YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements Please use this instrument as a mesurement category II CAT Il instrument This instrument is for indoor use only The following symbols are used on the DX200 A Handle with care To avoid injury death of personnel or damage to the instrument the operator must refer to the explanation in the User s Manual or Service Manual ale Functional ground terminal Do not use this terminal as a protective E ground terminal Protective ground terminal mY AC ON power O OFF power Exemption from Responsibility YOKOGAWA makes n
223. ed to the alarm Item Setting Mode Basic Setting Mode Alarm Alarm type 6 2 Display hold non hold 6 4 Alarm value 6 2 The time interval for the rate of Output relay On Off 6 2 change alarm for measurement Output relay number 6 2 channels only 6 4 Alarm delay time 6 3 Hysteresis for measurement channels only 6 4 Alarm output relay Reflash alarm operation option AND operation 6 4 Relay energize de energize e Relay hold non hold Settings related to the display Item Setting Mode Basic Setting Mode Display group Group name 7 6 Channel assignment 7 6 Group display switching interval 7 13 Tag Channel display Tag name 7 1 Switch between tag display and channel number display 7 2 Trend Display rate 7 3 Measurement channels to Message 7 5 display the trend Trip line position display color 7 7 applies also to measurement Trip line width 7 13 channels that data are to be Channel display color 7 8 acquired 8 10 applies also to bar graphs Use not use the partial Display direction vertical horizontal 7 13 expanded display 7 12 Trend line width 7 13 Grid 7 13 Scale value digits 7 13 Number of scale divisions 7 10 applies also to bar graphs Scale position 7 10 Zone upper and lower limits 7 9 Partial expanded display 7 11 Bar graph Channel display color applies also to trends
224. ee Entering Characters on page 3 22 Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Note When computation is turned On Off or when equations and span settings are changed the alarm setting for that channel is turned OFF IM 04L02A01 01E 11 11 uondo uolouny Wodsey uolneyndwoyg Ey 11 4 Setting Computation Channels Explanation The computing elements are assigned to the character number input keys by the number of times the key is pressed as follows Character number input key Gac 20 Sen J 4 mo 6ra Zsu 8m 9x lao O w 7 Computing Elements Key Pressed Once Twice 3 Times 4 Times 5 Times 6 Times 1 K C D 2 3 SQR ABS LOG EXP 4 EQ NE GT LT GE ILE 5 AND NOT XOR OR 6 TLOG AVE TLOG MAX TLOG MIN TLOG SUM TLOG P P 11 12 IM 04L02A01 01E 11 5 Setting the Alarm Procedure You can set up to 4 alarms on each computation channel The alarm types are upper limit alarm H lower limit alarm L delay upper limit alarm T and delay lower limit alarm t The hysteresis is fixed to 0 Note When Math On Off is turn ON an ent
225. eeee CNaraCters iisissei see sislicnyecsedeeni SALAS R N PaaS clear computed results remote control z toll sreta lole Cala MATAT T clearing the Character String eeens combinations of user IDs and passwords 1 27 comment eee vee 1 27 common logarithm vee 11 1 communication input data eee ceeceeeeeeee errereen 11 2 Computation Channels cccccecececeeseeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 1 computation dropout display we 11 9 computation function we 1 25 COMPUTATION ICOM scce aa E 4 4 computation operators TLOG AVE wie 11 7 TLOGIMAX osissesvetvscwscsse cscs attircrctnesdteunveeneeresieenteaes 11 7 TEOG MIN veiii eines taelitetises kad ea ciety 11 7 computing GlOMONt issen nnn 11 12 conditions of the remote control terminals 00 11 2 CONSTAINS eccscetseescirec ese ceii ven nniteene ieee weedeat 11 1 contact specifications alarm 2 12 contact specifications FAlL memory end 2 13 copying a character Strings ee wi 3 23 cursor historical trend cccece cece eeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 1 17 CUISOP OVEIVIOW secsccenscccsstencarncneenseswedvarveseesecevtceesssescanvives 1 10 D daily report esses sseeseseeesees data acquisition display data data acquisition event data oe eet reece data acquisition manual sampled data ee 8 9 data acquisition report data data acq
226. eeeeeeseeeeeeereet ree teenterretntenrtenntnstnnsennrnnt 5 7 5 5 Sealing Setting E n a aa EA hated andes 5 9 5 6 Square Root Computation Setting 2 eeceecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeecceeeeeeeneeeseeeeeeeeneeseeeeeees 5 11 eo E Eie e e EEE T AEE 5 13 5 8 Input Filter and Moving Average Setting eceeececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeenteetiaeeeeeeeea 5 14 5 9 Setting the A D Integration Time Scan Interval Burnout and Reference Junction Compensation Basic Setting Mode ecceccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeneeetaeseeeecnaeeeeeeneeesieeeeeeenaes 5 15 Chapter 6 Acknowledging and Setting Alarms 6 1 Releasing the Alarm Indication and Output Relay Option ccececeseceeteeeeeeneeetees 6 1 6 2 Ala SCtting lt i cccscasitisi sears tiss nest etaiinitrned sagt tua ote sea Aan ats 6 5 6 3 Setting the Alarm Delay Period 0 eeeecceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeesaeeseeeseeesaeeeneeenaes 6 8 6 4 Setting the Auxiliary Alarm Function Basic Setting Mode cecceeteeeereeeteeeteeeneeees 6 10 Chapter 7 Setting and Operating the Display 7 1 Setting Taq Names a E E a a a a aeaa a ia 7 1 7 2 Selecting Tag Display or Channel Number Display Basic Setting Mode ce 7 2 7 3 Setting the Display Update Rate Trend eee ccecceeeceeseeeeneeeeeeeceaeeeeeecneeesaeeeeeeeneeeeneeaes 7 3 7 4 Using Message Strings Trend cceeceecceeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeenneesaaeseeeecaeeeeaeeeneeseaeeeeeeenaeeeeneeaes 7 4 7 5 S
227. eeens 3 4 RUN MOG ieee eee aati A een tee ee ten ae tee eens 3 5 Configuring the Functions Setting Mode and Basic Setting Mode cceseeeeees 3 6 Common Key Operations c cecceeeececeeeeeceeeeceaeeeeeeceeeesaaeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeseenaeenaees 3 7 Setting the Date And Time s ki eeecceeceeeeeeeeceeaeeeeeecaaeeeaaeeeeecaaeeeeeesaeeeeaaeeeeetaesseeeenaees Switching Operation Screens 4 1 Operation Screens ica i iie a Maan ida R E T EAE 4 2 Using the Status Display Section 00 ec eeceeececceeeeee cee eeeaeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeaeeesaeeeeeeenaeesaeeneees 4 3 Using the Trend Digital and Bar Graph Screens ceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeteeceaeeeeeeeneeseeeneees 4 4 Using the Overview Screen ccceccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeecneeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeaeseaeeeneesaeseeeesneenaeeneees 4 5 Using the Information Screen Alarm Summary Message Summary and Memory SUMIMANY scoectacees ciated fares a ds Peaches a a eine en a 4 6 Using the Historical Trendi iisi aiaa pana a anaia 4 7 Using the 4 Screen Display 0 cc ceecceccceeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaaeseneecaeseeeecneeeseeeeeeesieeseneenanes IM 04L02A01 01E Contents Chapter 5 Measurement Channel Settings 5 1 Voltage Input Setting ecen iiinn i a a a 5 1 5 2 Thermocouple TC Resistance Temperature Detector RTD Setting cere 5 3 5 3 Digital Input DI Setting nei e oaa arer arnan ar NE EEEE T 5 5 5 4 Difference Computation Delta Setting seeeesiees
228. emory see section 8 11 the display data existing before the execution of this operation are displayed as a historical trend 4 20 IM 04L02A01 01E 4 6 Using the Historical Trend Historical Trend Waveforms for group display or all channel display are shown in the channel display color The background color is the opposite of the trend display black or white Messages and trip lines are also displayed Arrow keys can be used to scroll the waveform The time axis can be Expanding Reducing rate Time axis Tag Channel Maximum and minimum values at the display reference position Maximum and minimum values among the data displayed n UCCAI l nin i mid 35 Be Rate C Unit xl 0 034 2 008 0 069 2 000 L H TAG 83 8 483 2 008 6 449 2 000 cn TAG B 8 969 2 008 4 938 2 000 taa my ia Icons for 1 389 2 088 screen switching 1 363 2 000 i pH The icon corresponding to the displayed screen G e 1 714 2 000 is highlighted oo NOEL a The screen is switched using the arrow keys Display reference position the right end of the display range the position of the newest data being displayed Date and time at the display reference position expanded or reduced Date and time at the left end of the waveform Showing the all channel display returning to the group display On the group display the channels that are assigned to the group are displayed see section 7
229. end of each time interval The maximum number of report data files data set for each interval that can be stored in the internal memory is 40 For detail see chapter 8 IM 04L02A01 01E 11 25 uondo uolouny Wodsey uolneyndwoyg Ey 11 12 Using the Report Function Starting Stopping the report function The report start stop is in sync with the data acquisition start stop Procedure Starting the report also starts the data acquisition to the internal memory 1 Press the START key The icon that indicates the data acquisition to the internal memory turns to a start icon and the computation icon appears For details related to the status display section see section 4 2 The report function starts When the time to create the report arrives the report data are stored to the internal memory Stopping the report also stops the data acquisition to the internal memory 1 Press the STOP key A confirmation window opens For models with the batch function BT1 option the batch information is also displayed 2 Use the arrow keys to select Mem Math stop the data acquisition to the internal memory and computation or Mem stop the data acquisition and press the DISP ENTER key The icon that indicates the data acquisition to the internal memory turns to a stop icon The report stops Note M When the report function is stopped the report file on the external storage medium is closed When the report function is started
230. ens releasing the alarm remote control cceeeeeeeeeeeees 10 14 remote control function 0 0 0 we 1 32 remote signal we 1 32 removing ZIP GiSK iriri iaire aiir kaadikan 3 6 replacement periods for WOrn parts 0 0 eee cette tetas 13 5 replacing the USC sisisi iaaii iiis 13 2 report data report data display sssssscecesscsssessseecseecssessecesesseees 1 14 r port date ei meranen ra roere aa etiaai iiaa 11 28 report day of the week sssesesssesesseerierrrrreersrrresrnrrrerrnrrees 11 28 report file data format eeeeeeeeeeeeeireeerreerenenene App 11 report function j FEPOF ti MO iin ai e ea e a ias reset TLOG mirisi niarra arei taa aieiaa adat resistance temperature detector c cceceeeeeeeteeeeteeeeeeees 1 2 revision Mistry a ara araa a a aaan aa ix rising falling edge we 1 32 PUG poitirere een tasie ee aS 1 3 rolling average si24 nese Sakti aa a ai 11 3 LKO te ire E E T E 8 5 AD r eae elites See ek eee ke 1 2 rules for writing an equation common items a 11 7 TUN MODS Heines tebe Ai tarea ai 3 7 S SaMple Tate s sce sscciei teers sieievespecsscsedtesveagesccavsetsesvessegaceceatys sampling interval display data sampling interval event data z Sampling length isask e AGI AL RMS saved data Manual SAVE 0 0 eee ccc ceeeee cere teeeeteeeeaes saving data to the external storage media saving data using key operation esseeserresreerrerrerrr
231. enuew sasn ay YUM 134 260 aouUasaja1 yOINb siy asp 002Xd NOILVLSOVG 0EZXA 0ZZXA 0LZXA 80ZXA vOZXA I PON 39U919 H yoINO ANIM SIHL SNOW 0104 euoz awl XNy 8 ren 3 aem 2 sBuljjes uo eoiunwwog 9 s6ulnes uodo g suolyesado azielu peo7 aaes y apow Buljes Seq 1qIYOld MO y puomssed al 48s aweu sN al 48sn asn jon esn HO UO nobo o ny u60 Aay asn JON esN yoo Aey au ajqesip a qeus y20 0 Shey piomssed yoo Aay 8sn ON eSN 9 04 ui6o Aey vO 400 AOy cH eyep Ones 0 Olu pue eq pu 1 y Ae dsip eyep auinboe o sjauueyo juswainseay asn 0 486613 jo adAj uonisod 18bpu ldq z s aly Bua eyeq SUOISIAID Aowawu jo aaqwunu sy20jq Jo aqWNN e oy abbu ees4 PON emau Budwes Byep u31 p unb e q 0 eyep jo d L WnIpew e6eJoj s jeu1a x 9y 0 POYJEL 9ALS 218 dnewy Aowa 018 puan 3 Aowa L18 Aowa cH yun oinyesodwa uolyesuedwioo uojoun aouese8jay umoqg dN 40 yno wing JeAajul ULIS JOYOAUOD q y Indu y zo aI UO e1H9 U siselaysAy wey emau wieje ehueyo jo eyey s ejds p wieje pjoy uou pjoH s ej 1 nd no wieje pjoy uou p oH s ej nd no wee ezibseus ap eziBieuy s ej nd no wueje jo uoeiodo QNY wueyje ysejjoH SL OL anpiadwa 6 9 a v 7 9 wey L we aL Aeyx YOS sadudJajo ase Sasayjuased ul pesojouy pon Hui
232. er instruments RTDs cannot be wired in parallel IM 04L02A01 01E 2 5 00ZXd y Buisp 310499 s 2 3 Input Signal Wiring A WARNING To prevent electric shock ensure the main power supply is turned OFF _CAUTION A Do not apply input signals that exceed the following values This can damage the DX200 Maximum input voltage Voltage range of 2 VDC or less or thermocouples 10 VDC Voltage range between 6 and 50 VDC 60 VDC Maximum common mode noise voltage 250 VACrms 50 60Hz The DX200 is an INSTALLATION CATEGORY II product L Wiring Procedure 1 Turn OFF the DX200 and remove the input terminal cover 2 Connect the input signal wires to the input terminals 3 Replace the input terminal cover and fasten it with screws Note For clamped input terminals the following wires are recomended Cross sectional area of the conductor or conductors Single conductor 0 14 mm to 1 5 mm Stranded conductors 0 14 mm to 1 0 mm Stripped cable length approximately 5 mm Input signal wires of diameter less than or equal to 0 3 mm may not be secured firmly for clamped input terminals Fold over the conducting section of the wire for example to make sure that the wire is securely connected to the clamped input terminal DX204 DX208 Input Terminal Position CH1 to CH4 CH5 to CH8 DX208 2 6 IM 04L02A01 01E 2 3 Input Signal Wiring Terminal A
233. erage computation when the number of moving averaged data points is set to 5 Buffer data at the Buffer data at the Buffer data at the nth sampling n 1th sampling n 2th sampling New data New data l 15 0mV 10 0mV a A O N Deleted Deleted Integration Time of the A D Converter The DX200 uses an A D converter to convert the sampled analog signal to a digital signal By setting the integration time to match the time period corresponding to one cycle of the power supply or an integer multiple of one cycle the power supply frequency noise can be effectively eliminated The integration time of the A D converter is selected according to the model from the table below If Auto is selected the DX200 will automatically detect the power supply frequency and select 16 7 ms or 20 ms Because 100 ms is an integer multiple of 16 7 ms and 20 ms this setting can be used to eliminate the power frequency noise for either frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz 100 ms is available on the DX210 DX220 and DX230 However when the integration time is 100 ms the scan interval is fixed to 2 s For the setting procedure see section 5 9 Model Integration Time of the A D Converter DX204 DX208 Select 16 7 ms 60 Hz 20 ms 50 Hz or auto Automatically switches between 16 7 ms and 20 ms Fixed to 20 ms on P1 models that use the 24 VDC power supply DX210 DX220 DX230 Select 16 7 ms 60 Hz 20 ms 50 Hz 100 ms or auto Automatically switches
234. erical Display Trend s Waveform Display Data Acquisition to the Groups Storage Specification Bar Graph Group All Channels Internal Memory Yes Yes Display Display Display Yes Yes No Display Don t display Don t display No No Yes Don t display Don t display Display Yes No No Don t display Don t display Don t display No 1 Whether or not the channel is assigned to a group 2 Whether or not the channel is set to display the trend and store the data 3 Numerical display refers to the numerical display of trend digital and bar graph screens The numerical display of trend digital and bar graph screens and the bar graph display are updated at all times when they are displayed It is not affected by whether or not the waveform of the trend screen is shown The waveform of the trend screen is updated at the display update rate For the procedure related to setting the display update rate see section 7 3 Setting the Display Update Rate Trend For the procedure related to setting the channel to display the trend and to store the data see section 8 10 For the procedure used to assign channels to groups see section 7 6 Alarm indication Alarms are checked at all times and displayed on the relevant displays regardless of whether or not the waveform of the trend screen is shown Alarms are displayed using alarm type symbols For details related to the alarms see section 6 2 Name Symbol Upper l
235. eriod for delay upper lower limit alarm These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow Once new settings are confirmed they change back to white Press w Setting on a measurement channel To display the setting screen press the soft key 2 Setting on a computation channel option Twice press the softkey Next 1 2 To display the setting screen press the soft key 8 1 1 m 2 First CH Last CH First CH Last CH irst ast al ja 31 31 Tag p Tag Alarm Delay i Tag J Tine oving average Count Off Alarm Delay Tine MIs 2 r TLOG Timer No 1 Sun scale of rRolling average On Off Off The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels For the channels set here Tag Moving Average or Filter for measurement channels and Tag TLOG or Rolling Average for computation channels are also simultaneously set 2 Alarm delay period Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter the alarm delay period Enter an inte
236. erreeen 9 5 saving data via Ethernet 0 cccececeeteeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 1 21 IM 04L02A01 01E Index 3 Index saving setup data basic setting mode eee eee saving setup data setting mode 0 eee eee eeeeeeeee saving the data using key operation auto save Ss Sale Dal graph a rae a Satin aeaa Aa aapea eiaa iae SCalOs TOMA EA E E STA lea sinc diecnas teas tovsaneniees scale display position scale marks 0 scale specifications ee S le valg S sirin ninae iaa cues obdsastancavelp ches iaaa ia oora lla tat PE AT EA TT SCAN interval 0 eee cece este eeeeteeeeesteeees screen assignment 4 screen display SCFEEN MENU 20 eesseeeceseceeceeeceeeeeeeneenees SEQUENCE NUMDEL eee eeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eee serial interface port cc eceeceece cece ceeeeeeeneeeeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeees serial number setting items basic setting mode setting items Setting mode cece cette eeeeeeeeetees setting NOMS iaaa aaaea ei Erit ains setting SCION ssnsti hirisein liie settings alarm a Settings COMPUTATION 0 ee eee eee reese ceeetraeeeeeeeaes Settings data Storage e eee eee cece sees eeeeetneeeeeeeeaes settings display settings input setup mode Shunt reSiStON o oo eee eee eceee eee eeee eee eeeeeeaaeeeseaeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeees SMAPSMOL ETETETT E TATA soft key Past pnn aa raa aaia ear 3 23 S
237. error Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 284 Character String and Details MODE Internal processing error LOCAL Internal processing error REMOTE The destination file name is not correct Check that you have the authority to create or overwrite files ABORT File transfer abort was requested by the server Check the server for the reason for the abort request IM 04L02A01 01E 12 5 BunooyseqnoiL Ey 12 1 A List of Messages Code Message 285 FTP data connection error Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 285 Character String and Details SOCKET Failed to create a socket for the transfer connection BIND Failed the transfer connection command CONNECT Failed the transfer connection LISTEN Failed the transfer connection reception ACCEPT Failed to accept the transfer connection SOCKNAME Internal processing error RECV Failed to receive data over the transfer connection SEND Failed to send data over the transfer connection 286 FTP file transfer error 1 See the DX100 DX200 Communication Interface User s Manual IM 04L02A01 17E 2 Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer 3 These errors may occur if the network experiences trouble during the data transmission bad cable connection duplicate addresses network equipment failure Note The FTP
238. ess the left arrow key Select JUMP TO HISTORY using the up and down arrow keys MATION g INFOR 2 JUMP TO HISTORY Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the historical trend The displayed data type is as follows When configured to acquire only the display data to the internal memory Display data When configured to acquire only the event data to the internal memory Event data When configured to acquire the display data and the event data to the internal memory Data type selected in the memory summary see page 4 17 To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key 4 16 IM 04L02A01 01E 4 5 Using the Information Screen Alarm Summary Message Summary and Memory Summary Memory Summary Number of data sets in the internal memory The maximum number of data sets the internal memory can hold Date and time the last data were acquired Cursor Up and down arrow keys can be used to move the cursor and scroll the screen Procedure Green Released Selection of the file type to be displayed display data files or event data files M SAMPLE DATA 3 58 Jan 1 2088 80 12 48 RELAY 1 000000 2 308088 Acti TLOG DATA lt 00 400 3 000000 ned Acivated REPORT DATA 84 48 Jan 81 2000 08 14 58 SAMPLE DATA DISPLAY DATA EVENT DATA Start Tine End Time Data Factor Jan 01 2000 00 25 04 Jan 81 2000 00 27 54 86 Sampling Jan 01 2000 00 15 04
239. etting is not possible The alarm setting boxes are grayed in this case Procedure These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow Once new settings are confirmed they change back to white Press To display the setting screen press the soft key Ooa First CH Last CH H Jar Range Span Node Range Lower Upper Volt fou 2 000 2 088 Alarm Relay Type Value On Off Number TH oga On T0 Pm oO he s28 gt 3 4 5 6 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels For the channels set here Range is also simultaneously set IM 04L02A01 01E 6 5 suue y Buiyjes pue Guibpea mouyoy jo 6 2 Alarm Setting 2 On Off When the alarm is turned on Type Value and Relay On Off are displayed 3 Type Set the alarm type For the alarm types see Explanation Note If you select delay alarm T or t for the alarm type you must set the alarm delay period See section 6 3 4 Value Enter the value at which the alarm is activated Pressin
240. etting the Key Lock Function Basic Setting Mode Explanation Key locked parameter and the behavior during key lock can be set individually Parameter Behavior during key lock START key Disabled STOP key Disabled MENU key Disabled USER key Disabled DISP ENTER key Disabled to change operation screens Alarm ACK soft key Disabled Math Computation Math START soft key Disabled Math STOP soft key Disabled Math reset soft key Disabled Write memory Message soft key Disabled Manual sample soft key Disabled Trigger soft key Disabled Save Display soft key Disabled Save Event soft key Disabled E Mail START soft key Disabled E Mail STOP soft key Disabled E Mail test soft key Disabled Media External storage medium During manual save Prevent saving when an external storage medium is inserted Prevent Zip disk removal During auto save Prevent Zip disk removal 1 Set together by Math parameter 2 Set together by Write memory parameter 3 Can be set when the e mail transmission function is engaged IM 04L02A01 01E 10 5 suonouny 19410 g 10 5 Using the Key Login Logout Function This function allows only certain users to access the DX200 The users are distinguished by their user IDs and passwords You can select whether or not to use User IDs In addition you can set whether or not to allow operations in th
241. etting the Message String Trend 0 ecceececeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeesiaeeeeeeenaes 7 7 7 6 Setting Groups irename ena A E eA TA atin ieiaiiadeh 7 8 7 7 Setting the Trip Line Trend 0 0 eee eeececceeeee cece eeeeeeeeeeeaeseaeeseaeeeaaeeeeeecaeeseaeesaeeseaeeeeeeeas 7 10 7 8 Setting the Channel Display Colors Trend Bar Graph cceecceseeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeneee 7 12 7 9 Using Zone Displays Trend o Sosnin iene aduson oea a oia riei 7 13 7 10 Setting the Scale Division Bar Graph Base Position Bar Graph and Scale Position Trend rocne eea abe en aa cbs Ss a a oaks ei A Ea bret eal 7 15 7 11 Using Partial Expanded Display Trend seseeeeseereeerissriesrrerrisrrirssrrnssrinerrnnrrrnssnnsne 7 20 7 12 Setting Whether or Not to Use the Partial Expanded Display Basic Setting Mode 7 22 7 13 Setting the Display Direction Background Color Waveform Line Width Trip Line Width Grid Scroll Time and Scale digit esr acha a a aiaa 7 23 7 14 Setting the Brightness of the Screen and the Backlight Saver Function 7 25 7 15 Assigning a Name to the 4 Screen Display ecccceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeecieeeeeeeeeeetaeeeeeeentees 7 27 Chapter 8 Data Acquisition and Saving to External Storage Medium 8 1 Data Types to be Acquired and Saved cceecceccseeeeeeeeeteeeeeeceeeeecaeeeeeeeeueesaeseeeesiaeeeeeeees 8 1 8 2 Function to Acquire Display Data and Event Data esseseesseerieeerissriissriiesiinrrrnssrrnnsrn
242. ey To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 7 14 IM 04L02A01 01E 7 10 Setting the Scale Division Bar Graph Base Position Bar Graph and Scale Position Trend Procedure The scale used on trend and bar graphs can be set When the bar graph is displayed horizontally the base position of the bar graph can be set on each channel by selecting either Normal or Center Normal The left edge or the right edge of the display span depending on which value is smaller Center Position at 50 of the display span For the procedures to set the vertical or horizontal display see section 7 13 The scale display position for each channel can be specified on the trend screen These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press w Press the soft key oOo Setting on a measurement channel To display the setting screen press the soft key 3 Setting on a computation channel option To display the setting screen press the soft key Ox l
243. f Integrate Cursor position Relay Scan interval J 1s blue ZD Hone First CH Last CH Action Energize _ ar lal Behavior Nonhold Indicator Nonhold Fig set pi i xterna Rate of change ro Increase 2 clad a H pe m Temperature m o e Auto 58Hz 68Hz 188ns Setting selections selected using the soft keys IM 04L02A01 01E 3 19 suonesado uowWwoD epoyy UNy SHed JO SoWeN el 3 6 Common Key Operations Selecting the parameter 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The available selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen above the soft keys 2 Select the parameter with the soft key The box containing the parameter that was changed turns yellow The cursor moves to the next parameter To cancel the settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key Confirming the settings 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER key confirms the new settings The parameter boxes return to a white color The cursor moves to the first parameter on the page Returning to the menu screen of the basic setting mode 1 Press the ESC key to return to the menu screen of the basic setting mode Saving the settings and returning to the operation mode 1 Press the END soft key A confirmation window with a message Do you want to store and make the new Settings take effect appears 2 Selecting Yes with the arrow key and pre
244. fference between the measured values of two channels becomes smaller than or equal to the alarm value 6 6 IM 04L02A01 01E 6 2 Alarm Setting Upper limit on rate of change alarm The amount of change of the measured values over a certain time interval is checked An alarm occurs when the amount of increase becomes greater than or equal to the specified value see section 6 4 The time interval is specified using a number of measurements Lower limit on rate of change alarm The amount of change of the measured values over a certain time interval is checked An alarm occurs when the amount of decrease becomes greater than or equal to the specified value see section 6 4 The time interval is specified using a number of measurements Delay upper limit alarm An alarm occurs when the measured value remains above or equal to the alarm value for the specified time period delay period see section 6 3 Setting the Alarm Delay Period Delay lower limit alarm An alarm occurs when the measured value remains below or equal to the alarm value for the specified time period delay period see section 6 3 Setting the Alarm Delay Period 1 Can be specified only on difference computation channels 2 Can be specified only on measurement channels IM 04L02A01 01E suey Buiyes pue Guibpe mouyoy jo 6 3 Setting the Alarm Delay Period Procedure Set the alarm delay p
245. file and the report file Data format of the manual sampled data file The manual sampled data are output in ASCII format using values and strings that are separated by commas The channel tag unit and manual sampled values are not output for channels in which the input range is set to Skip or for which the computation is turned OFF Example The following example is for channels 1 2 3 4 and 31 MANUAL SAMPLE DATA Model Serial No XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX File Header AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA CH TAG 1 CHO1 CHO2 CHO3 CH04 CH31 UNITY VO VM mV 2000 01 01 01 08 43 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 014 12 00 2000 01 01 01 08 48 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 014 12 00 2000 01 01 01 09 15 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 014 12 00 CH TAG 1 CHO1 CHO2 CHO3 CH04 CH31 UNIT VO VOM 2000 01 01 01 15 30 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 014 12 00 2000 01 01 01 18 12 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 014 12 00 Data size Size of the header section The following equation can be used to derive the size of the header section Title carriage return line feed serial number carriage return line feed file header carriage return line feed channel tag 8 19 x number of channels that are output carriage return line feed unit 6 9 x number of channels that are output carriage return line feed The siz
246. file on the external storage medium IM 04L02A01 01E suoleiedg uowwog pPOoN UNy SHed JO SoWeN el 3 4 Run Mode Functions and Operations in the Operation Mode Operation screen Displays various operation screens such as trend digital bar graph alarm summary message summary memory summary historical trend four screen display and report display option Screens are switched by the arrow keys and the DISP ENTER key See chapter 4 Operations using the FUNC key When the FUNC key is pressed the functions that are assigned to the soft keys are displayed The soft key menu varies depending on functions and options in use Press the Next soft key to display the soft key menu in the next line The function is executed by pressing the soft key Press the FUNC or ESC key to erase the menu without executing the assigned function j Batch AlarmACK Nessage deka Keylock Logout Next 1 3 inp le Nath Nath Trigger START penr Snapshot 4Panel Log E Mail E Mail Modbus Save Save FTP test START E ae Fieldbus FUNC key menu Menu Ref section Description Batch 10 11 Displays the batch screen for models with BT1 Alarm ACK 6 1 6 4 Release alarm indication and relay output when alarm display and alarm output relay action is set to hold Message 7 4 Displays messages and stores them to the internal memory Manual sample 8 12 Stores instantaneous values of all channels to the internal memory
247. formation of the stored data Set whether to display the batch number and lot number or the date and time of file creation on the memory summary screen Batch Display the batch number and lot number Time Display the date and time of file creation Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 10 20 IM 04L02A01 01E 10 13 Setting Whether or Not to Use the Batch Function BT1 Option Basic Setting Mode Procedure This setting is possible on models with the batch function It is set in the basic setting mode These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears To display the setting screen press the soft key E AUX Tag Channel l Channel Memory alarm l lh Language English Partial Not Batch Use f 1 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Batch Use Use the
248. from the oldest data Note Upto 16 TLOG files number of start and stop can be stored to the internal memory When the number of files in the internal memory exceeds 16 TLOG data are overwritten even if the number of data sets is less than 400 The number of TLOG data sets in the internal memory can be confirmed with the memory summary Section 4 5 Report data option Report data are acquired at each time interval one hour for hourly report one day for daily report etc Up to 40 data sets can be stored in the internal memory When this number is exceeded data are overwritten from the oldest data For hourly only this constitutes 40 minutes of report data For daily monthly this constitutes 39 daily reports and one monthly report or 38 daily reports and two monthly reports Note The number of report data sets in the internal memory can be confirmed with the memory summary Section 4 5 IM 04L02A01 01E 8 9 winipa y eaHbe10jg jeus9 xq 0 Hulaes pue uoljsinboy eead el 8 4 Function that Saves the Data in the Internal Memory to the External Storage Medium Manual Save Auto Save There are two methods in which the data are saved to the external storage medium manual save and auto save The external storage medium is inserted into the drive only when storing the data residing in the internal memory When saving the data residing in the internal memory to the external stor
249. ft key to display the Load data screen r Load display data Directory name File name Time 18481538 DDS 2008 81 64 81 56 16482888 DDS 2088 81 84 82 63 18482858 DDS 2000 81 04 82 86 18482288 DDS 2000 81 04 82 21 164822168 DDS 2008 81 84 82 25 18482258 DDS 2000 81 84 82 28 For models with the batch function BT1 option press the Time soft key when displaying the date and time of file creation and the Batch soft key when displaying the batch number and lot number File name Batch name No 10401530 DDS SAMPLE 018 10402000 DDS SANPLE 0811 10402050 DDS SAMPLE 8012 1AARooRA NNC C AMDI C ANIC L 1 The directories in the external storage medium are displayed in the Directory name column Press the up or down arrow key to select the directory containing the display data to be loaded A list of files in the selected directory is displayed in the right column Root directory is denoted by 2 Press the right arrow key to move the cursor on to the file list Press the up or down arrow key to select the display data file to be loaded To move back to the Directory name column press the left arrow key 3 Press the DISP ENTER key to display the waveform on the historical trend screen To return to the Save Load Clear data menu screen without displaying the historical trend press the ESC key IM 04L02A01 01E 9 4 Viewing Event Dat
250. function Communication command for key operation Communication output of alarm summary and message summary 50 VDC input range Combination of houry and daily report Alarm output relay condition is held in the basic setting mode Horizontal display type 2 for trend screen C10 scale division and FINE scale digit AUTO grid Memory timeout function Display update rate 15 s 30 s and 10h Event data sampling interval 300 s and 600 s Memory end alarm OFF German and French for all screens Snapshot as remote control function Alarm point mark on bar graph screen in 4 screen display App 14 IM 04L02A01 01E Index Symbols A SCION GISPIAY vicccessccsscscssecssesssecascensessesteascersessnssuedsdeesees 1 15 A ADSOIUTS MODS sacs c2 cc0 cechedssesscsticsecsezessssnceasdeszeeczazssasecaeais absolute valg nrssnmesienoriiarn aani ACCESS LAMP selesecssssecssecccsssssetsaczansseesesceacexsssseascssseceesseasceeastes accessories sold separately ACCESSOLICS st dat csssesssecsseccsseessseeesecssscsssssesseessensaee i adjusting the internal clock remote control n 10 14 leE EIE TA TTT TEET alarm computation Alarm ACK oaiae alarm WySsteresis iajn anna ANANIIV ICOM EPE ERE T alarm mark o n alarm output relay alarm point mark alarm SUMMANY gesicissic ieee a ae ira E alarmi Migger senesinin eee verter all channel display ANIDO RAE PATTER TE T APPliCatiOn ot ale MTE TE R
251. g elements can be used in the computing equations Element Description Measured data Values measured on the measurement channels Computed data Values computed on the computation channels Constants K01 to K30 Set by the computation function Communication input data C01 to C30 Set by the communication function gt DX100 DX200 Communication Interface User s Manual Condition of the remote control terminals D01 to D08 Use ON OFF 1 or 0 of the remote input signal IM 04L02A01 01E 1 25 suonouny JO M A AQ a 1 6 Computation Function and Report Function M1 Option Report Function The report function is one of the functions provided by the optional computation function M1 This function computes the average maximum minimum and sum for the specified channels at specified intervals and writes the result to the internal memory You can select the report type from hourly reports only daily reports only hourly and daily reports daily and monthly reports and weekly and monthly reports The reports are created every hour on the hour for hourly reports at the specified hour on the hour for daily reports once a day at the specified hour on the hour on the specified day for weekly reports once a week and at the specified hour on the hour on the specified date for monthly reports once a week For example in the case of daily reports the average maximum m
252. g the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter a value in the allowed range and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 5 Relay On Off Set whether or not to activate the output relay On Off When turned ON the output relay number box appears 6 Number Set the output relay number For the correspondence between the output relay number and the output relay position see section 2 4 When the alarm output relay option is not installed these settings are void Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Explanation Alarm type The following eight types of alarm type are available Name Symbol Description Upper limit alarm H An alarm occurs when the measured value becomes greater than or equal to the alarm value Lower limit alarm L An alarm occurs when the measured value becomes smaller than or equal to below the alarm value Difference upper limit alarm h An alarm occurs when the difference between the measured values of two channels becomes greater than or equal to the alarm value Difference lower limit alarm An alarm occurs when the di
253. ge 30000 to 30000 Decimal position The decimal can be set in the following positions aouar O00 oudo Ooo oo The decimal position is determined by the scale lower limit setting Note Scale lower limit and scale upper limit cannot be set to the same value The DX200 converts the measured data within a value span derived by removing the decimal from the scaling upper and lower limits In other words conversion is performed by using a span of 10 if the scale setting is 5 to 5 and 100 if the scale setting is 5 0 to 5 0 The resolution of the value derived by using a span of 10 is coarser than the value derived using a span of 100 Because the display becomes rough set this value so that it is greater than 100 7 Unit Set the unit Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a character string Enter the unit up to 6 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Explanation Measurable range See sections listed below Mode Type Range Measurable Range Scale Volt See section 5 1 Volta
254. ge DI Level 0 Less than 2 4 V 1 Greater than or equal to 2 4 V Contact 0 Opened 1 Closed 5 6 IM 04L02A01 01E 5 4 Difference Computation Delta Setting Procedure To measure the difference between the inputs of two channels follow the procedures below to set the input range The difference computation channel displays the computed result of the measured value of the difference computation channel the measured value of the reference channel Select the input type for the difference computation channel from DC voltage thermocouple RTD and digital input The range cannot be changed while data acquisition or computation is in progress These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press w To display the setting screen press the soft key Ooa 1 First CH Last CH ic Range Node Jaz Span Type Range Lower Upper Ref CH BA ot Ja f 2 000 f 2 008 a 1 2 Note 3 4 5 6 For the setting procedure of the reference junction compensation and the burnout for the thermocouple input see section 5 9 First channel and
255. ge Input Setting TC See section 5 2 Thermocouple TC Resistance Temperature Detector RTD Setting RTD See section 5 2 Thermocouple TC Resistance Temperature Detector RTD Setting DI See section 5 3 Digital Input DI Setting 5 10 IM 04L02A01 01E 5 6 Square Root Computation Setting Computes the square root of the DC voltage input The result can be scaled to a value in the appropriate unit and displayed Set the upper and lower limits of the display span the upper and lower limits after scaling and the unit The range cannot be changed while data acquisition or computation is in progress Procedure These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press mw To display the setting screen press the soft key owt 1 4 First CH Last CH Jar Range Span Hode Range Lower Upper BE 2 000 2 000 Scale Lower Upper Unit aaa 200 08 2 3 5 6 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels 2 Mode Set the mo
256. ge O Negative over range O Over range occurs when the input type is voltage and the input exceeds 5 of the measurable range For example consider the case when the measurement range is 2 V and the measurable range is from 2 000 to 2 000 V If the input signal exceeds 2 200 V over range occurs If the input signal falls below 2 200 V over range occurs Over range occurs when the input type is TC thermocouple or RTD resistance temperature detector and the input exceeds approximately 10 C of the measurable range For example consider the case when the measurement range is R and the measurable range is from 0 0 to 1760 0 C If the input signal exceeds approximately 1770 0 C over range occurs If the input signal falls below approximately 10 0 C over range occurs For computation channels Positive computation overflow when the value exceeds 3 4E 38 O Negative computation overflow when the value falls below 3 4E 38 O Numerical display The range of displayed values of report data is from 9999999 to 99999999 excluding the decimal point The decimal point position corresponds to the position of the decimal point of the upper and lower limit span of the computation channel However special displays are used for cases given in the table below Measurement channel Item Data Condition of Measurement Channels Displayed value AVE When all data are measurement errors or
257. ger value in the range 1 to 3600 s and press the DISP ENTER key Procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 If the scan interval is 2 s and you set an odd value for the alarm delay period it will operate at the specified period 1 s Example If the alarm delay period is set to 5 s it will operate at 6 s 6 8 IM 04L02A01 01E 6 3 Setting the Auxiliary Alarm Function Basic Setting Mode Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Explanation Operation of the delay upper lower limit alarm For the operation of the delay upper lower limit alarm see section 1 5 This section will describe special cases of its operation When delay alarm is set on a computation channel and the computation is stopped If the computation is stopped in a condition in which the computed value is exceeding the alarm setting the alarm is turned ON after the specified period delay period elapses Computation stopped Alarm value Computed value Alarm turns ON Delay alarm when a power failure occurs Alarm detection is reset upon a power failure It restarts the operation after the power recovers Measured computed value Alarm value Alarm Off On Off On lt e P
258. gn decimal point 10 rt Entering characters Used to set tag names set message strings set or enter passwords Window for entering charcters Tag Moving average First CH Last CH far a loving average Count Off Selected character type Insert overwrite Procedure When the window used to enter the string appears enter the characters according to the following key operations Left and right arrow keys Selects the input position Character number input key Enters the character The character is selected according to the character type and the number of times the key is pressed see the explanation Space soft key Enters a space or overwrites with a space DEL soft key Deletes the character at the cursor position BS soft key Deletes the character to the left of the cursor position INS soft key Selects insert or overwrite Insert and overwrite modes switch each time the INS soft key is pressed The selected mode is displayed to the right of the soft key display section 1 a A soft key Selects upper case alphabet A lower case alphabet a or numbers 1 The character type is switched in the following order each time the 1 a A soft key is pressed The selected character type is displayed to the right of the soft key display section Upper case alphabet A lower case alph
259. gs data clearing Clear measured computed data in the internal memory 9 7 Initialize settings basic setting mode setting mode and clear measured computed data in the internal memory 9 8 Management of files on the external storage media Item Setting Mode Basic Setting Mode File management Save setup data 9 1 Load setup data 9 1 Save measured data with key operation 9 2 Load display display data 9 3 Load display event data 9 4 List files 9 5 Delete files 9 5 Format external storage media 9 5 Save setup data 9 1 Load setup data 9 1 Delete files 9 5 Format extemal storage media 9 5 IM 04L02A01 01E suoleiodg uoWWOD epoyy UNY SUeg JO SOWeN el 3 5 Configuring the Functions Setting Mode and Basic Setting Mode The menu screen and items of the setting mode The menu screen and items of the setting mode are as follows Enclosed in parentheses are reference sections The Math set1 and Math set2 are displayed when the computation function M1 is equipped The Batch set is displayed when the batch function BT1 is equipped Set mode Range Alarn Ce Tag Moving average Alarm delay R Trend Save interval Message File User key DST i Display ae Save Load Clear data BC Tine ES J Math set 8 Nath set2 9 Batch set 2 H iid 5 6 Next 1 2 7 Set mode Nath set1
260. h Base Position Bar Graph and Scale Position Trend During trend vertical display The scale display position is 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 and 10 from the top The number of scale divisions span and unit are the same as those of the examples provided for the trend horizontal display perio ie Ps pe bi 20 40 unit 60 ib el eee ee ee j o o oo co ao at F SaaS ete eS i 46 unit 54 l 4 itul nih LU tL 6 wee ET LII Loooeo Ss E aa ec on ow ited Aadi LLI PETE ELUTE If the scales for two or more channels are specified to the same position the scale for the channel that was assigned first to the group is displayed Example 1 When the channels were assigned to a group in the following order 03 02 01 05 and the scale display positions for channels 3 2 1 and 5 are all set to 1 The scale for channel 3 is displayed at position 1 e Vacant positions in between scale assigned positions are void The scales are displayed close together f
261. hannel 16 Orange Channel 17 Yellow green Channel 18 Light blue Channel 19 violet Channel 20 Gray Channel 21 Red Channel 22 Green Channel 23 Blue Channel 24 Blue violet Channel 25 Brown Channel 26 Orange Channel 27 Yellow green Channel 28 Light blue Channel 29 violet Channel 30 Gray Background White or black selectable Direction vertical or horizontal selectable Number of indication channels 10 channels per screen maximum All channels indication 60 channels maximum including computation channels Number of screens 4 screens 4 group Line width 1 2 and 3 dots selectable Display update rate Waveform One division has 30 dots DX204 DX208 15 s 30 s 1 2 5 10 20 30 min 1 2 4 10 hours div selectable e DX210 DX220 DX230 1 2 5 10 20 30 min 1 2 4 10 hours div selectable Numerical value 1 s 2 s when the scan interval is 2 s Waveform Numerical value numerical display section can be turned ON OFF scale scale display can be turned ON OFF grid lines number of divisions selectable from 4 to 12 hours minutes on time axis trip lines line widths are selectable from 1 2 and 3 dots messages up to eight different messages of up to 16 characters for each alarm indication Zone display and partial expanded display are available Contents suonesyiseds z IM 04L02A01 01E 14 3 14 2 Display Specifications Bar graph screen Digi
262. he basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate position Press w Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears Press soft key to display the Save Load Initialize menu screen Press soft key to display the Format screen Format Volume name Type Quick Formatting the external storage medium can be executed in the same procedure as that in the setting mode See page 9 11 9 12 IM 04L02A01 01E 9 6 Saving the Screen Image Procedure Explanation The screen image that is displayed is saved to the external storage medium using the FUNC key or USER key operation The data size of the screen image is approximately 12 KB screen Only when Snapshot is assigned to the USER key See section 10 2 FUNC key operation This operation is carried out in the operation mode The images of soft keys or messages are not saved 1 Confirm the storage medium is in the drive 2 Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu 3 Press the Snapshot soft key The screen image is saved to the external storage medium USER key operation This applies only when Snapshot is assigned to the USER key This key operates in all run modes operation setting and basic setting modes The exact screen image that is displayed when the USER key is pressed is saved However error messages are not saved 1 Confirm the storage medium is in the drive 2 Press
263. he batch screen 10 18 IM 04L02A01 01E 10 12 Setting the Batch Information BT1 Option Procedure You can set the following items that are attached to the data acquired in the internal memory Application name Supervisor name Manager name Batch number Lot number In addition you can set whether or not to use the following functions Automatically increment the lot number at the end of the batch Display the batch number and lot number for each file in place of the date and time the data acquisition ended on the memory summary screen These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate position The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press ew To display the setting screen press the soft key 7 For models with the computation function the soft key positions change Operate as follows Press the soft key Next 1 2 To display the setting screen press the soft key e r Batch Application name Supervisor name Manager name Batch number Lot number Auto increment Disp information On Time wr Noo DS The numbers in front of the operating procedure sho
264. he cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press uw Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears To display the setting screen press the soft key 2 Memory Save iv 1 Data ED 2 Event Sample rate is 3 Hode Trigger 4 4 Block 1 5 Data length 2fmin 6 Pre Trigger a g t7 Trigger Key On 7 External Off 8 Alarm Off I The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure Data save to the external storage medium 1 Save Set save method to the external storage medium Select Auto or Manual Auto auto save Manual manual save Note If Manual manual save is selected in step 1 set whether to save all the data in the internal memory or only the data that have not been saved See section 8 9 Data acquisition Acquiring only the display data 2 Data Select Display Note If Auto auto save is selected in step 1 and Display is selected in step 2 set the auto save interval for the display data See section 8 8 IM 04L02A01 01E 8 23 winipayy eabe10jg jeus9 xq 0 Hulaes pue uoljsinboy eead el 8 11 Setting the Method of the Display Event Data Acquisition Ba
265. he desktop model that is supplied by YOKOGAWA Always use protective earth terminal to prevent electric shock Connect the power cord of the desktop model to a three pole power outlet that has a protective earth terminal Never use an extension cord that does not have protective earth terminal otherwise the protection function will be compromised Use a power supply that meets the following conditions Item conditions Rated power supply 100 to 240 VAC Allowable power supply voltage range 90 to 132 or 180 to 264 VAC Rated power supply frequency 50 60 Hz Allowable power supply frequency range 50 60 Hz 2 Maximum power consumption 75 VA 100 V 106 VA 240 V Note Do not use a supply voltage in the range 132 to 180 VAC as this may have adverse effects on the measurement accuracy applies to all models except the ones with the P1 option IM 04L02A01 01E 2 19 00ZXd y Buisn 310499 2 9 Power Supply Wiring Connection Procedure 1 Check that the DX200 is turned OFF 2 Connect the power cord supplied with the DX200 to the power connector on the rear panel of the DX200 3 Ensure that the power supply voltage is within the maximum rated voltage for the power cord then plug the other end of the power cord into an outlet that meets the requirements Use only a 3 prong AC outlet with a protective ground terminal For Models With the P1 Option 24 VDC AC power supply model The wiring procedu
266. he directory you wish to delete using the up and down arrow keys Check that no files are displayed in the File name column is the root directory The root directory cannot be deleted 2 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays a confirmation dialog box 3 Use the arrow keys to select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key to delete the directory The directory name is cleared from the Directory name column To cancel the delete operation select No and press the DISP ENTER key Note _____ If the ESC key is pressed in the middle of the operation the screen returns to the Save Load Clear Data menu 9 10 IM 04L02A01 01E 9 5 Managing files Displaying free space on the external storage medium Formatting the external storage medium in the setting mode Formats the external storage medium The function is the same as that in the basic Procedure Explanation setting mode These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate position Press Press soft key to display the Save Load Clear data menu screen Press soft key to display the Format screen Format Volume name Type Quick 1 To change the volume name after formatting enter the new volume name Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a string Enter the string up to 11 alphanumeric characters and press th
267. he following equation can be used to derive the size of data section of one report data Carriage return line feed date and time of creation status 11 x number of channels that are output carriage return line feed average value 5 14 x number of channels that are output carriage return line feed maximum value 5 14 x number of channels that are output carriage return line feed minimum value 5 14 x number of channels that are output carriage return line feed sum value 5 14 x number of channels that are output carriage return line feed The size of the date and time of creation is fixed to 16 bytes The size of the carriage return line feed is fixed to 2 bytes Calculation example Monthly data for 30 channels 2 16 11 x 30 24 54 14x 30 24 54 14x30 4 2 54 14x30 42 54 14 x 30 2 2058 bytes Number of report data sets and file size The file size varies depending on the number of report data sets as follows One report data set of monthly reports Size of the header section size of the data section of one report data set 3055 bytes 40 report data sets of monthly reports Size of the header section 40 x size of the data section of one report data set 83317 bytes 40 report data sets is the maximum number of report data sets that can be written in the internal memory If there are more than 40 data sets they are cleared starting with the oldest data set Note When the measurement
268. he maximum and minimum values from measured computed data within the sampling intervals are held A header string can be written into the display data file a character string that is common to all data files Alarm and message information is held Data format Binary format Event data The instantaneous values of the measured computed data are acquired at the specified sampling interval There is a mode in which the data acquisition is started when a trigger occurs or another mode in which the data acquisition is started when the START key is pressed The header string can be written into the event data file a character string that is common to all data files Alarm and message information is held Data format Binary format Manual sampled data Every time a key that executes manual sampling is pressed measured computed data instantaneous values of all channels at that point are acquired Up to 50 samples of data can be stored in the internal memory The header string can be written into the manual sampled data file a character string that is common to all data files Data format ASCII format TLOG data option Data are added to the internal memory at the end of every interval period Up to 400 data sets can be stored in the internal memory The header string can be written into the TLOG data file a character string that is common to all data files Data format Binary format Report data optio
269. he specified time everyday the average maximum minimum and sum values of the specified channels are determined from a day of data up to the specified time and stored to the internal memory Weekly report At the specified time of the specified day every week the average maximum minimum and sum values of the specified channels are determined from a week of data up to the specified time and stored to the internal memory Monthly report At the specified time of the specified date every month the average maximum minimum and sum values of the specified channels are determined from a month of data up to the specified time and stored to the internal memory Report data display See section 4 5 Combinations of reports that can be created The reports created by the DX200 can be set to hourly only daily only hourly and daily daily and weekly or daily and monthly Number of measurement and computation channels that can be assigned to the report Up to 30 channels can be assigned to one report The report data are not created for channels that are set to Skip or those that have the computation turned Off About the sum scale In the sum computation data are summed over the scan interval However for flow values that have units s min h or day a simple summation results in the actual value not matching the computed result because the scan interval and the unit of the input values are different
270. he storage medium at power restoration When the power restores the data saving operation restores Example Timeup type is set to Hour 15 20 Power failure 15 41 Power restoration 13 10 14 00 15 00 16 00 17 00 Time ae aa ae gt Start Save to the storage medium When the data are saved to the storage medium using key operation during auto save mode see Explanation in section 8 7 The data saving operations are not affected by this key operation Example Timeup type is set to Hour 15 25 Data saving using key operation 13 10 14 00 15 00 J 16 00 17 00 Time f f f f f gt Start Save to the storage medium IM 04L02A01 01E 8 27 winipayy eabe10jg jeus9 xq 0 Hulaes pue uoljsinboy eead el 8 13 Storing Measured Computed Data at Arbitrary Times Manual Sampling The instantaneous values of all measurement and computation channels excluding the measurement channels that are set to Skip and the computation channels that are turned Off can be stored to the internal memory with a key operation For the data format of the manual sampled data see appendix 2 Data Formats of ASCII Files Procedure Operation using the FUNC key This operation is carried out in the operation mode 1 Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu 2 Press the Manual sample soft key The instantaneous values of all channels excluding the measurement channels that are set to Sk
271. ibes how to set input specifications such as the range filter moving average scan interval integration time of the A D converter burnout and reference junction compensation Acknowledging and Setting Alarms Describes how to acknowledge alarms and how to set alarms Setting and Operating the Display Describes how to set the display specification of the operation screen how to display messages and other display related operations Data acquisition and Saving to External Storage Medium Describes how to acquire the measured computed data and how to save the data to the external storage medium Managing Files and Initializing Data Describes how to save and load the setup data manage files on the external storage medium save the data residing in the internal memory to the external storage medium using key operations initialize the internal memory and other operations 10 Other Functions Describes how to set and operate key lock key login logout user key and other functions 11 Computation Report Function Option Describes how to use the optional computation report function 12 Troubleshooting Describes the error messages and the troubleshooting measures of the DX200 13 Maintenance Describes fuse replacement and other information 14 Specifications Describes the specifications of the DX200 Appendix Describes the initial values of the setting mode and basic setting mode
272. ifications Example of sampling length In case measurement ch 4 ch mathematical ch 0 ch Display data file only Display rate min div approx 240 min Sampling interval s Sampling length Event data file only Sampling interval Sampling length Display data file Event data file Display data file Display rate min div Sampling interval s Sampling length Event data file Sampling interval Sampling length In case measurement Display data file only Display rate min div 34 days 125 ms 500 ms _1s 42h 16h 33h 20 min 40s 26 days 125 ms 500 ms 1s ih 42h 8 3h ch 6 ch mathematical 52 days 5s 6 days 30 min 60s 39 days 5s 41h ch 0 ch 104 days 30s 41 days 60 min 120s 78 days 30s 10 days 60 min 480 s approx 120s 166 days approx 240 min 480s 312 days approx 120s 41 days approx 240 min Sampling interval 2s 10s 40s 60s 120s 480s s Sampling length 27h 5 days 23 days 34 days 69 days 277 days Event data file only Sampling interval Sampling length Display data file Event data file Display data file Display rate min div 1s 5s 10s 27h _ 5 days 11 days 30s 34 days 60s 69 days approx 120s 138 days approx 240 min Sampling interval s Sampling length Event da
273. ile status acquisition ended Date and time the data acquisition started Number of data in the file Cursor The historical trend of the selected data M ni i _ 6 504 2 00 Rate C x 232 68 0 09 2 00 L H 8 48 2 00 ades 2 000 cn a9 2 00 8 3 2 00 5 ny 1 385 2 00 fe L Ded ANS v L 82 55 MESSAGE 1 D 2 00 Pier 1 6 wa v For models with the batch function BT1 option a batch number and lot number can be displayed in place of the date and time when the data acquisition ended For the setting procedure see section 10 12 IM 04L02A01 01E SUOI OUNZ JO MAIAJBAQ a 1 3 Display Function Report Data M1 option Report data residing in the internal memory can be displayed The report function is used to write the average minimum maximum and sum at specified intervals for the specified channels Reports can be made hourly daily weekly or monthly For details related to the report data see section 1 6 For the operating procedure see section 4 5 The index number of the report data currently displayed The number of report data sets in the internal memory Report type Date and time the report started Date and time the report was created Index 2 2 Kind Hourly Start Jan 61 2066 88 18 46 Timeup Jan B1 2008 86 11 06 Channel Unit _Sts Ave Hax Hin Sum cHaL v 8 008 8 088 8 008 A 260006400 cHa2 v 8 008 8
274. imit alarm Lower limit alarm Difference upper limit alarm Difference lower limit alarm Upper limit on rate of change alarm Lower limit on rate of change alarm Delay upper limit alarm Delay lower limit alarm TAI D ITL Display position If the number of channels assigned to a group is greater than or equal to seven the alarm indicator position on the trend digital and bar graph screens is different from the screen example in the previous pages IM 04L02A01 01E 4 11 su 19 uodo BulyoyMsS a 4 4 Using the Overview Screen Operation Flow Diagram Screen menu Overview screen Screen menu Sub menu A A A 4 lt gt v v ON TREND a 7 Channel g 7 To BAR GRAPH selection Cursor ON OFF Screen menu Sub menu DISP ENTER key 4 lt gt _ Arrow keys Procedure Displaying the screen 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu 2 Select Overview using the up and down arrow keys 3 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key Displaying or clearing the cursor 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu 2 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key 3 Select CURSOR ON or CURSOR OFF The one that is selectable is displayed in the sub menu F
275. imum number of data points is 75 000 Event data 300 000 bytes number of measurement channels x 2 number of computation channels x 4 Except the maximum number of data points is 30 000 Event data only 1 200 000 bytes number of measurement channels x 2 number of computation channels x 4 Except the maximum number of data points is 120 000 Sampling length The sampling length can be derived from the following equation Sampling length the maximum number of data points per channel x sampling interval Calculation example Display data only Measurement channel 2 computation channel none Data Maximum number of data points and sampling length Display data Maximum number of data points 1 200 000 2 CH x 4 bytes 0 x 8 bytes 150 000 However since 100 000 data points is the limit Maximum number of data points 100 000 When the display update rate is 30 min div 60 s sampling interval Sampling length 100 000 data points x 60 s 6 000 000 s approx 69 days Measurement channel 12 computation channel 6 Data Maximum number of data points and sampling length Display data Maximum number of data points 1 200 000 12 CH x 4 bytes 6 x 8 bytes 12 500 When the display update rate is 30 min div 60 s sampling interval Sampling length 12 500 data points x 60 s 750 000 s approx 8 days Event data only Measurement channel 2 computation channel None Data
276. in function the users that can log into the DX200 can be restricted and identified When the batch function is activated the security is enhanced in the following manner as compared with the standard key login function For the operating procedure of the key login function see section 10 5 For the setting procedure see section 10 6 User names that are already registered cannot be specified The combinations of user IDs and passwords that are identical to those that have been registered by any user in the past cannot be specified Changing the Messages When the optional batch function is installed messages 1 through 3 can be changed in the operation mode For the procedure related to changing the messages see section 7 4 IM 04L02A01 01E 1 27 suonouny JO M A AQ a 1 7 Batch Function BT1 Option Display The following items are displayed The batch number lot number and date time are alternately displayed in the status display section See section 4 1 When the STOP key is pressed batch information is displayed in the stop confirmation screen See sections 8 5 and 8 6 Confirming the Stored Data The display data and the event data in the internal memory or the external storage medium can be displayed on the historical trend display When the historical trend of the display data or event data in the internal memory or in the external storage medium is displayed batch information can be shown in the
277. ingle group For the procedure used to assign channels to groups see section 7 6 Setting Groups Up to four groups can be registered The groups are common to the trend digital and bar graph displays On the trend digital and bar graph displays the displayed groups can be automatically switched at 5 s 10 s 20 s 30 s or 1 min intervals Channel Number or Tag Display The channels can be displayed as channel number or tags The setting applies to all channels For the procedure related to the selecting the channel display or tag display see section 7 2 For the procedure related to setting the tags see section 7 1 IM 04L02A01 01E 1 5 SUOI OUN JO MIIAIBAQ 1 3 Display Function Trend Screen Displays the waveform of the measured and computed data The direction of the waveform display can be set to horizontal or vertical For details related to the display method see section 4 3 Trend Display Horizontal Type1 Numerical display section Display update rate o ES PET nihai Lal L618 20 PE Tag Channel no ae EE E E 0 357 10 E E E E MHEC y E E io O9E A2 ts E E 09 358 Measured E O35 YN A E E E HE Y computed value EE p EE Bf 0 359 E ae E goe Rm V unit ko s E 1 E w P ee 7A 0 m Jm 0 360 Pointer displayed using as E E the channel color AF E as 0 360
278. inimum and sum over a day for the specified channels are computed at the specified time on the hour and the results are acquired to the internal memory This constitutes one report data set The report data residing in the memory can be displayed on the DX200 s LCD see section 1 3 Display Function In addition the report data residing in the internal memory can be saved to an external storage medium section 1 4 Storage Function Because the report data are saved to the external storage medium in ASCII format spreadsheet applications can be used to view the data see appendix 2 Data Format of ASCII Files For details related to the report function see section 11 11 Item Description Report type Select from hourly reports only daily reports only hourly and daily reports daily and weekly reports and daily and monthly reports Number of channels per report Up to 30 channels Computed data Average maximum minimum and sum Number of reports that can be Up to 40 acquired to the internal memory Data format ASCII format For a display example of report data see section 1 3 1 26 IM 04L02A01 01E 1 7 Batch Function BT1 Option Batch function is used to include information such as batch numbers and lot numbers along with the data acquired to the internal memory By including information such as batch numbers lot numbers and supervisor names along with the measured computed
279. internal memory to the external storage medium is set to auto save the display data or event data only during Free mode in the internal memory is closed as a single file and automatically saved to the external storage medium This operation repeats when the auto save interval or the specified date or time is reached These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press uw Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears To display the setting screen press the soft key Ooan Memory timeup Timeup type Date Time lt hour The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Timeup type If a setting other than Off is specified Date or Day of the week and Time hour are displayed Off Disable this function Hour Saves the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium every hour on the hour Day Saves the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium every day at the hour on the hour specified by Time hour Week Saves the data in the internal memory to the external stor
280. ion channel is different the measured value of the reference channel is adjusted to the decimal position of the measured value of the difference computation channel to make the computation Example When the measured value of the difference computation channel is 10 00 and the measured value of the reference channel is 100 0 the computation result becomes 10 00 100 0 90 00 When the units for the reference channel and the difference computation channel are different the measured value is not adjusted Example When the measured value of the difference computation channel is 10 00 V and the measured value of the reference channel is 5 00 mV the computation result becomes 10 00 V 5 00 mV 5 00 V When the reference channel is set to Scale or Sqrt the computation uses the scaled values 5 8 IM 04L02A01 01E 5 5 Scaling Setting Procedure For DC voltage thermocouple RTD and digital input the measured values can be scaled to a value in the appropriate unit and displayed Set the upper and lower limits of the display span the upper and lower limits after scaling and the unit The range cannot be changed while data acquisition or computation is in progress These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen
281. ion is displayed in dark blue of the four screens 2 Using the arrow keys select the quadrant for which the screen assignment is to be changed 0 204 HH y TAG B5 0 206 v mE TAG B6 0 206 TAG 69 The title section of the selected quadrant displayed in dark blue GROUP 1 3 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu 4 Select the screen to be assigned using the up and down arrow keys When assigning the trend digital bar graph or information screen 5 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu 6 Select the group or screen using the up arrow key 7 The specified screen is assigned to the selected quadrant by pressing the DISP ENTER key To close the menu without assigning the screen press the ESC key When assigning the overview screen 5 The specified screen is assigned to the selected quadrant by pressing the DISP ENTER key To close the menu without assigning the screen press the ESC key e Registering the New 4 Screen Configuration Carry out the procedure in section 7 15 Assigning a Name to the 4 Screen Display If you do not carry out this procedure and switch to a different screen the screen configuration will return to the original configuration before the change when you return to the 4 screen display 4 26 IM 04L02A01 01E 4 7 Using the 4 Screen Display Note The screen that can be assigned to the quadrants of the
282. ious data can be saved to the following storage media 3 5 floppy disk 1 44 MB 2HD Zip disk ATA flash memory card 4 MB to 440 MB The size varies depending on the memory card that you are using This product is no longer produced Save Method There are two methods of saving data to the external storage medium One method is to insert the storage medium to the drive when data is to be saved referred to as manual save The other method saves data automatically at certain time intervals to a storage medium that has been inserted into the drive beforehand referred to as auto save Other Types of Data That Can Be Stored In addition to the types of data described in Acquiring Data to the Internal Memory the following types of data can be stored on the external storage medium Setting data The DX200 setting data such as the setting of the functions of the input section as described in section 1 2 can also be stored to an external storage medium to the specified file name The stored data can also be loaded and used by the DX200 Image data of the display screen The image data of the display screen can be stored to the external storage medium The image data can be pasted to documents created on a PC Saving Data via Ethernet The display data event data and report data as described in Acquiring Data to the Internal Memory can be automatically transferred to an FTP server via Ethernet for storage Conver
283. ip and the computation channels that are turned Off are stored to the internal memory Operation using the USER key This is an operation carried out only when the manual sampling is assigned to the USER key 1 Press the USER key The instantaneous values of all channels excluding the measurement channels that are set to Skip and the computation channels that are turned Off are stored to the internal memory 8 28 IM 04L02A01 01E Chapter 9 Managing Files and Initializing Data Saving loading setup data 9 1 You can save the setup data to or load setup data from the external storage medium The operation can be carried out in both the setting mode and the basic setting mode A setup data file has 25 KB in size maximum Saving setup data in the setting mode Saves the setup data set in both the setting mode and the basic setting mode to the external storage medium The function is the same as that in the basic setting mode Procedure These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate position Press Press Press Save settings File name soft key to display the Save Load Clear data menu screen 1 soft key to display the Save settings screen File name Time TEST PNL 2000 01 01 02 05 Enter the name of the setup data file to be saved Pressing the Input soft key or o
284. ith EN5501 1 Complies with EN61010 1 Installation category II Pollution degree 2 Measurement category II Complies with AS NZS CISPR11 Class A Group 1 1 Installation category describes a number which defines a transient overvoltage condition It implies the regulation for impulse withstand voltage Il applies to electrical equipment which is supplied from the fixed installation like distribution board 2 Pollution degree describes the degree to which a solid liquid or gas which deteriorates dielectric strength or surface resistivity is adhering 2 applies to normal indoor atmosphere Normally only non conductive pollution occurs 3 Applies to measuring circuits connected to low voltage installation and electrical instruments supplied with power from fixed equipment such as electric switchboards suoneoyioeds z IM 04L02A01 01E 14 19 14 8 Dimensional Drawings Unit mm Panel Cutout approx inch 360 min 14 17 min j 1 i 279 6 0 11 01 i Ss aan pa T E Yo i ae A 27 1 220 8 66 S Minimum space 1 07 a 167 5 6 59 S for mounting 108 r 2 to 26 panel thickness n
285. itor or a multi synchronous monitor which is capable of displaying VGA can be used Pin Assignment Pin No Signal Name Specification 1 1 Red 0 7 Vp p 2 Green 0 7 Vp p 5 1 3 Blue 0 7 Vp p 4 5 O00000 6 10 OOO 6 7 OO000 10 GND 15 11 11 12 D Sub 15 pin receptacle 13 Horizontal synchronous Approx 31 5 kHz signal TTL negative 14 Vertical synchronous Approx 60 Hz signal TTL negative 15 Connecting to the monitor 1 Turn OFF the power both the monitor and the DX200 2 Connect the monitor to the DX200 using an analog RGB cable 3 Turn ON both the monitor and the DX200 Note When the power of the DX200 is ON the video signal is alive at the output terminal The picture on the monitor may become unstable if the DX200 or other equipment is brought too close to the monitor Some monitors may display a picture from which the sides are missing IM 04L02A01 01E 2 15 oozxa y Buisp 310499 D 2 8 24 VDC Transmitter Power Supply Wiring TPS4 Tps8 Option A A Wiring diagram Wiring Procedure To prevent electric shock ensure the main power supply is turned OFF CAUTION Never short circuit the power supply terminals or apply an external voltage otherwise damage to the DX200 may result Do not use current that exceeds the maximum output current 25 mADC This may cause damage to the DAQSTATION To prevent fire use signal wires ha
286. jjes o1Seg y u Sway Huas ANN SIHL SNOW LNO Run Mode Operation Mode Setting Mode Basic Setting Mode Power ON Operation mode MENU key Operation screens MENU or Entered when the power is turned ON Entered by pressing the MENU key Entered by pressing the FUNC key for three seconds while the menu screen for the setting mode is displayed End soft key DISP ENTER key Menu screen ESC key Soft keys ES or ESC key Setting screens Returning to the operation mode from the setting mode from the basic setting mode ene key function Batch AlarmACK Message Log FTP test NOTE setting mode FUNC key for 3 seconds Basic setting mode Menu screen Soft keys tesc key Setting screens Display the menu screen and press the MENU key or the ESC key Display the menu screen and press the End soft key to display a confirmation window Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key to return to the operation mode Keylock sample Save E Hai Display START Logout E Hai Modbus test master Hath Hath Trigger Snapshot START reset 3 Save Fieldbus a To avoid injury death of personnel or damage to the instrument the operator must refer to the explanation in the User s Manual or Service Manual Setti
287. l measurable range DC Volt eee eeeeeeeeerees measurable range Dl eee cee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees measurable range difference computation ee measurable range RTD measurable range TC oo seeeesseesesseeseeneesseceeeeseeneeeaeeeeeeas measurement Channels cccceceeeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeaaes Memory information c cee ceeeee cee ceeeteeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaee MEMOTLY SUMMA inata e a E memory timeup ty MENU Keyi isaurene araea wtvarien cine a ia iE ET e PAR os Salsa A E E A message string message summary MOG sahesinin monthly report moving average N normal formatting cece ce eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeecneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaee 9 11 number Of AlarMs c cece ceeceeee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeesieaeeenaee 1 22 number of data bytes per channel ou ee eee eee eee 8 6 number of display data files 0 ee eee eeneeeeeeees 8 3 number of event data files 00 0 eee cece eter ereeeeeeees 8 4 numerical display report ee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 25 numerical display Section 0 0 eee ccc eens eeee settee eeeeeeeees 1 8 O operation MOE sssessessresseseessserereresrensrnsrsasennrnnsnnsensseeseas operation screen option terminals sshns n i hea eS order of precedence of the operators eeseeeeeeeererreeres 11 2 over display range computation cece eeeeeeees 11 3 over range measurement
288. l Time constant selectable from 2 5 and 10 seconds DX210 DX220 DX230 Moving average On off selectable for each channel Number of samples to be averaged is selectable from 2 to 16 IM 04L02A01 01E 14 1 suoneoiyiseds z 14 1 Input Specifications Computation Differential computation Between any two channels Available for Volt TC RTD and DI ranges Linear scaling Available for Volt TC RTD and DI ranges Scaling limits 30000 to 30000 Decimal point user selectable Engineering unit user definable up to 6 characters Square root Square root computation and linear scaling Available for Volt range Scaling limits 30000 to 30000 Decimal point user selectable Engineering unit user definable up to 6 characters 14 2 IM 04L02A01 01E 14 2 Display Specifications Display unit Channel display color Trend screen 10 4 inch TFT color LCD VGA 480 x 640 dot resolution Trend Bar graph Selectable from 16 colors Red Green Blue Blue violet Brown Orange Yellow green Lightblue Violet Gray lime Cyan Darkblue Yellow Light Gray Purple Initial settings of channel display color Channel 1 Red Channel 2 Green Channel 3 Blue Channel 4 Blue violet Channel 5 Brown Channel 6 Orange Channel 7 Yellow green Channel 8 Light blue Channel 9 violet Channel 10 Gray Channel 11 Red Channel 12 Green Channel 13 Blue Channel 14 Blue violet Channel 15 Brown C
289. l channel display Waveforms of all channels that were set to display the trend are displayed on one trend screen Sections 4 3 and 8 10 Message display Messages specified by the user can be displayed at arbitrary points in time For example by displaying a message when a certain operation is carried out the point at which the operation is carried out can be seen visually Displayed messages are stored Sections 7 4 and 7 5 Display direction of waveforms The waveform can be displayed vertically or horizontally The vertical display is in the same direction as the chart recorder and is convenient when the DX200 is used with the chart recorder Section 7 13 Displayed color of waveforms The displayed color of waveforms can be specified for each channel The color also applies to the bar graph display Section 7 8 Thickness of waveform lines You can select from three types 1 2 or 3 dots The specified thickness of waveform lines applies to all channels gt Section 7 13 Trip line display Displays a line to indicate a particular value of interest trip line for each group You can select the thickness of the displayed line from three types 1 2 or 3 dots Up to four trip lines can be displayed on a single group gt Sections 7 7 and 7 13 IM 04L02A01 01E SUOI OUNZ JO MAIAJBAQ a 1 3 Display Function Scale display A scale appropriate f
290. l computation TLOG Determines the sum maximum minimum average and maximum minimum P P values at specified time intervals over the time interval There are three timers used to set the time interval For detail see section 11 7 Data that can be used in equations For TLOG computation only measured and computed data can be used For all other computations all types of data can be used Measured data The data are specified using channel numbers in computing equations If scaling is in effect the scaled values are used in the computation Computed data The data are specified using channel numbers in computing equations Constants K01 to K30 The values assigned to K01 to K30 can be used as constants Enter the values as K01 to K30 in the equations Range of constants Maximum number of significant digits is 5 9 9999E 29 to 1 0000E 30 0 1 0000E 30 to 9 9999E 29 IM 04L02A01 01E uondo uolouny Wodsey uolneyndwoyg 3 11 1 Overview of the Computation Function Unit handling Communication input data C01 to C30 Data that have been specified through the communication interface can be used Enter the data as C01 to C30 in the equations For the procedure used to set the data see the DX100 DX200 Communication Interface User s Manual IM 04L02A01 17E Range of numerical values Maximum number of significant digits is 5 9 9999E 29 to 1 0000E 30 0 1 0000E 30 to 9 9999E
291. l file is free 230 There is no setting file Access to other files 231 Abnormal setting exists in file Access to other files 12 2 IM 04L02A01 01E 12 1 A List of Messages Errors related to historical trend Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref section 232 There is no available data This message may appear when recalling historical trend Access to other files 233 The specified historical data do not exist This message may appear when recalling historical trend See section 4 5 234 The specified channel is not assigned to the display group This message may appear when switching to trend or bar graph from overview See sections 4 4 and 7 6 Errors related to e mail and Web server Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref section 260 IP address is not set or ethernet function is not available The IP address is not specified Check the IP address 261 SMTP server is not found Occurs when the SMTP server is specified by name e Check the DNS setting e Check the SMTP server name 262 Cannot initiate E mail transmission e The host name of the DX is not correct Check the host name The port number for SMTP server is not correct Check the port number 263 Sender s address rejected by the server Check the sender s address 264 Some recipients addresses are invalid Check the recipient s address
292. l storage medium is auto save you set the auto save interval The auto save interval is used in saving the display data The display data residing in the internal memory is automatically saved to the external storage medium as a single file at each auto save interval These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new Settings they change back to white Press wew To display the setting screen press the soft key OB Trend Save interval Time diy inin uto save interval E 1 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Auto save interval Displayed when auto save is selected See section 8 8 Select from the choices shown on the soft keys Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 8 18 IM 04L02A01 01E 8 8 Setting the Auto Save Interval for the Display Data Explanation Choices for the auto save interval The maximum
293. le then the file name of the two files will have sequence numbers 0 and 1 for the first and second files respectively The two files will have the same Mddhhmm month day hour minute section IM 04L02A01 01E 8 2 Function to Acquire Display Data and Event Data The display and event data are acquired by specifying the channels sampling interval file size and other information Specifying the data to be acquired Display data and event data Specify the type of data to be acquired depending on the application Several examples are shown below Please use them as references Example 1 Continuously record the waveform data as in the conventional chart type recorders Select display data only Example 2 Continuously record the waveform data and when an alarm occurs record detailed data around the alarm incident Select display data and event data For the event data select Trigger or Rotate for the mode Specify the trigger used to start the event data acquisition and the time period during which to acquire the data event data file size Example 3 Continuously record detailed data Select even data only Select Free for the mode Example 4 Recording is not necessary under normal circumstances Only record detailed data around the alarm incident Select event data only Select Trigger or Rotate for the mode Specify the trigger used to start the event data acquisitio
294. le data acquisition or computation is in operation Items that cannot be changed are grayed and the cursor cannot be moved on them Items that cannot be changed while data acquisition is in progress Input range Display update rate for the trend display Auto save interval Computing equation Constants for computation Items that cannot be changed while computation is in progress Configuration Details Range setting Computing equation Constants for computation TLOG timer number and sum scale The configuration details of the setting mode and the basic setting mode are shown below Enclosed in parentheses are reference sections Settings related to the input Item Setting Mode Basic Setting Mode Scan interval 5 9 Scan interval Input specifications Input type 5 1 to 5 7 Measurement range Upper and lower limit of span Reference channel for differential computation Upper and lower limits of scale Unit Burnout 5 9 Burn out Off Up Down Reference junction Switch between Internal and compensation 5 9 External Compensation voltage when set to External Noise elimination Filter time constant Off DX204 Integration time of the A D DX208 5 8 converter 5 9 Number of samples for the moving average Off DX210 DX220 DX230 5 8 3 10 IM 04L02A01 01E 3 5 Configuring the Functions Setting Mode and Basic Setting Mode Settings relat
295. lect whether to save the measured computed data as display data event data or as both The capacity of the internal memory for acquiring display data and event data is 1 2 MB When the measured computed data are saved as both display data and event data 0 9 MB is used to save display data and 0 3 MB is used to save event data DX200 ee Internal memory i oe Display data only Event data only Display data and event data 1 2MB 1 2MB 0 9MB om Display data Event data Display data Event data Display data are used to display waveforms on the DX200 s screen Display data consists of maximum and minimum values of the measured or computed data sampled at the scan interval within the time period corresponding to one dot on the time axis on the screen Display data can be likened to the conventional recording on the chart sheet and are useful for long term observations Event data are instantaneous values of the measured computed data at specified sampling intervals of the event data By setting the sampling interval equal to the scan interval all measured or computed data sampled at the scan interval can be saved In addition the event data generated when an event occurs an alarm for example can also be saved This is useful when you wish to observe the measured computed data in detail For detail see sections 8 1 and 8 2 The time period corresponding to one dot on the screen Display data Measurement dat
296. left arrow key AM TREND GROUP 1 75 DIGITAL GROUP 1 ll BAR gt GROUP 1 i bil 5 I kaks 2 4 Select the group using the up and down arrow keys 5 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key IM 04L02A01 01E 4 5 su 19 UO1 e19dQ BulyoyMsS g 4 3 Using the Trend Digital and Bar Graph Screens Trend Horizontal Display Display rate See Section 7 3 Imin div 6 18 2 Tag Channel no Measured computed value Unit Alarm mark Pointer y Indicates the current value of each channel All pointers for channels 18 43 l f 0 360 that are not displaying the scale are AQ MESSAG2 i y Sieg at the right most scale 8748 NESSAGL 0 361 18 39 18 41 18 43 18 45 shz 1s 49 1 6 1 8 2 0 V Message Trip line Scale L Numerical display section Can be entered Can be set to Can be turned ON OFF Can be turned ON OFF using key operation an arbitrary position see section 7 4 see section 7 7 Trend Vertical Display Pointer Indicates the current value of each channel All pointers for channels that are not displaying the scale are displayed at the top scale position 2 0 gy u 0 4 v 0 4 4 2 2 0 f i A E A E E eet Ta 0 9 2 v0 0 0 9 1 8 Scale ulan eM pili W 0 3 1 6 tui 09 Titty Pili Imin diy
297. ls that are turned On see section 11 4 9 Key lock icon Key icon Key lock ON No display Key lock OFF 10 E mail transmission function icon Displayed when the e mail transmission function is started 11 Alarm icon Displayed when any one of the alarms is occurring For details see section 6 1 4 4 IM 04L02A01 01E 4 3 Using the Trend Digital and Bar Graph Screens Operation Flow Diagram TREND DIGITAL BAR GRAPH Screen menu Sub menu Operation screens Screen menu Sub menu TREND gt a gt v A Changing groups v A Group channels All channels gt t Scale ON OFF gt gt DIGITAL A Auto scroll ON OFF BAR GRAPH gt Numerical display ON OFF v Changing groups j Auto scroll ON OFF Changing groups Switching screens Group1 Group2 Group3 Group4 TREND a DIGITAL a BAR GRAPH 4 gt A a gt v 7 lt gt A v Screen menu Sub menu DISP ENTER key 4 4 gt Arrow keys Procedure Displaying the screen 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu 2 Select Trend Digital or Bar Graph using the up and down arrow keys 3 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the
298. m the noise source e Ground the recorder properly e Use shielded cables for input and communication wiring Insert an isolation transformer into the power line e Insert a power line filter into the power line If an inductive load is connected to an alarm contact output use a surge suppresser on that line Is the input free of noise Contact your nearest Sales amp Service Center IM 04L02A01 01E 12 11 BunooyseqnoiL D Chapter 13 Maintenance 13 1 Periodic Maintenance Check the operation periodically to keep the DX200 in good working order Perform the following checks and replace worn parts as needed Is the display and storage functioning properly In the event of problems see section 12 2 Has the brightness of the LCD backlight deteriorated If replacement is necessary see section 13 4 Recommended Replacement Periods for Worn Parts IM 04L02A01 01E 13 1 aoueUa UIe y 13 2 Replacing the Fuse A Replace the fuse every two years for preventive maintenance For safety reasons make sure to turn OFF the power switch and disconnect the DX200 from the main power supply before replacing the fuse To prevent the possibility of fire use only the specified fuse purchased from YOKOGAWA Never short circuit the fuse holder to bypass the use of a fuse For fuse rating see section 13 4 Recommended Replacement Periods for Worn Parts Follow the procedures
299. mail or the relay contact output F1 option For details related to the relay output action see section 1 8 Procedure These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press To display the setting screen press the soft key Oon AUX Tag Channel Channel Henory alarm E English Language English Partial Use Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Memory alarm This is the minimum storage time of the internal memory at which the relay should be activated Select a value from 1 h 2 h 5 h 10 h 20 h 50 h 100 h and Off Off Memory end output function is disabled the function does not operate in either manual save or auto save see section 1 8 Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 10 12 IM 04L02A01 01E 10 9 Setting the Remote Control
300. mains above the alarm value for the specified time period delay period Delay lower limit alarm t An alarm occurs when the measured value remains below the alarm value for the specified time period delay period Delay upper limit alarm example T is the specified delay period Measured computed data 1 X x4 Alarm value i Alarm occurrence Alarm release Alarm does not occur at T1 because the time period is shorter than the specified delay period T The input exceeds the alarm value at X2 but the alarm occurs at X3 at which the specified delay period elapses the time when the alarm occurs is the time at X3 The input falls below the alarm value at X4 and the alarm is released Difference upper limit alarm h An alarm occurs when the difference between the measured values of two channels becomes greater than or equal to the alarm value Difference lower limit alarm I An alarm occurs when the difference between the measured values of two channels becomes smaller than or equal to the alarm value 1 Can be specified only on difference computation channels Upper limit on rate of change alarm R 2 The amount of change of the measured values over a certain time interval is checked An alarm occurs when the amount of increase becomes greater than or equal to the specified value Lower limit on rate of change alarm r The amount of change of the measured values over a certain time interval is
301. medium Section 9 6 Key lock is a function that locks key operations removal of the Zip disk and the saving of data to the external storage medium during manual save mode A password needs to be entered to release the key lock For the setting and operating procedure see section 10 4 and 10 3 respectively Items and Behaviors of the Key Lock Can be set individually Item Behavior during Key Lock START key Disabled STOP key Disabled MENU key Disabled USER key Disabled DISP ENTER key Switching operation screens is disabled Alarm ACK soft key Disabled Math Computation Math START soft key Disabled option Math STOP soft key Disabled option Math reset soft key Disabled option Write memory Message soft key Disabled Manual sample soft key Disabled Trigger soft key Disabled Save Display soft key Disabled Save Event soft key Disabled E Mail START soft key Disabled E Mail STOP soft key Disabled E Mail test soft key Disabled Media External storage medium During manual save Prevent saving when an external storage medium is inserted Prevent Zip disk removal During auto save Prevent Zip disk removal 1 Set together by Math parameter 2 Set together by Write memory parameter IM 04L02A01 01E 1 29 suonouny JO MAIAJBAQ a 1 8 Other Functions Key Login Logout Log Display System Screen
302. memory at which to generate the alarm 10 8 TLOG data Timer mode absolute time relative time 11 9 Interval time 11 9 Reference time for the absolute timer 11 9 Turn On Off data storage to the internal memory 11 9 Settings related only to the computation channels configured on a screen dedicated to computation channels option Item Setting Mode Basic Setting Mode Computation specifications 11 4 gt Computing equation Upper and lower limit of span Unit Constants 11 6 Constants K01 to K30 Alarm Alarm type 11 5 Alarm value 11 5 Output relay On Off 11 5 Output relay number 11 5 Alarm delay time 6 3 Tag Channel display Tag name 7 1 Trend Channel display color 7 8 Number of scale divisions 7 10 Scale position 7 10 Zone display 7 9 Partial expanded display 7 11 Computation channels to display the trend applies also to computation channels that data are to be acquired 8 10 Bar graph 7 Channel display color Applies also to trends 7 8 Number of scale divisions 7 10 Bar graph base position 7 10 TLOG computation Timer number to use sum scale 11 8 Timer mode absolute time relative time 11 9 Interval time 11 9 Reference time for the absolute timer 11 9 Turn On Off reset at each interval 11 9 Turn On Off data storage to the internal memory 11 9 Rolling average
303. memory information display See section 4 6 The batch number and lot number for each file can be displayed in place of the date and time of the file creation on the memory summary screen and on the screen used to select the display data and event data to be loaded from the external storage medium See sections 4 5 9 3 and 9 4 1 28 IM 04L02A01 01E 1 8 Other Functions USER key Key Lock One of the following actions can be assigned to the USER key Alarm ACK is initially assigned For the setting and operating procedure see section 10 2 and 10 1 respectively Actions That Can Be Assigned Name of Action Action None None Trigger Provides a key trigger for starting acquiring the event data when Key Trigger is set as a trigger to start acquiring event data Section 8 11 AlarmACK Release alarm indication and relay output when alarm display and alarm output relay action is set to hold Section 6 4 Math Starts stops computation when the computation function M1 is equipped gt Section 11 3 Math rst Clears computed results when the computation function M1 is equipped and the computation is suspended Section 11 3 M sample Stores instantaneous values of all channels to the internal memory Section 8 13 Message 1 to Message 8 Displays messages and stores them to the internal memory Section 7 4 Snapshot Saves the screen image data to the external
304. mote terminal goes from high to low and falls when the collector signal goes low to high IM 04L02A01 01E 10 15 suoloun 19410 2 10 10 Setting the Displayed Language Basic Setting Mode Procedure Select the language that is used on the screen The initial setting is English These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press ew Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears To display the setting screen press the soft key os AUX Tag Channel Channel Memory alarm 1h Language _English 1 Partial Use The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Aux Language Select the language Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 10 16 IM 04L02A01 01E 10 11 Checking or Changing Batch Lot Numbers and Entering or Changing Comments BT1 Option The batch number and lot number can be checked
305. mputation only for models with the computation option M1 Computation Math reset Trigger Reset the computed value of the computation channel reset to 0 only on models with the computation option M1 while the computation is stopped Manual sample Trigger Write the instantaneous values of all channels to the internal memory once Load setup data 1 t03 Trigger Load and activate the setup data file that had been created and stored in the external storage medium Messages 1 to 8 Trigger Display messages 1 to 8 on the trend display and write them to the internal memory Snapshot Trigger Save the screen image data to the storage medium Remote Signal Edge and trigger The above actions are carried out on the rising or falling edge of the remote signal edge or the ON signal lasting at least 250 ms trigger Rising Falling edge Trigger Rising Falling gt 4 250 ms or more For contact inputs the remote signal rises when the contact switches from open to close and falls when the contact switches from close to open For open collector signals the remote signal rises when the collector signal voltage level of the remote terminal goes from high to low and falls when the collector signal goes low to high 1 32 IM 04L02A01 01E 1 8 Other Functions Daylight Savings Time Temperature Unit When the specified time is reached at which the daylight savings time adjustment is to be enabled the DX200 automati
306. ms r 101 output Alarm relay status Output relay put reflash off option Note If the reflash alarm is specified relays 101 to 103 are used as reflash relays regardless of the number of alarm output relays Therefore relays 101 to 103 operate as OR logic see AND OR of alarm output relays and non hold see Hold Non hold operation of the alarm output relay regardless of the settings made in AND OR of alarm output relays and Hold Non hold operation of the alarm output relay Relays 111 112 113 are used for models without 101 to 106 IM 04L02A01 01E 6 11 suey Buiyjes pue Guibpe mouyoy jo 6 4 Setting the Auxiliary Alarm Function Basic Setting Mode e AND OR of alarm output relays When sharing an alarm output relay among multiple alarms you can select from the following conditions that cause the alarm output relay to be activated AND Activated when all alarms are being generated simultaneously e OR Activated when at least one of the alarms is being generated Specify the alarm output relay to operate under the AND condition as in I01 first relay to Ixx where xx is the relay number The initial setting is set to None Channel 1 Sak et Alarm status Channel 2 ea eS AND fates O Sect Alarm relay status Note ____ If the reflash alarm is turned ON 101 to 103 operates as reflash alarms They are fixed to OR logic
307. munication Interface User s Manual Te Ena Next i Alarm A D Temperature 2 Nemory Memory and trend Memory timeup Save Load Initialize 1 Save settings 2 Load settings 3 Delete 4 Format 5 Initialize Soft key Settings in the basic setting mode Title Item 1 Alarm 6 4 Reflash alarm AND operation of alarm output relays Energize de energize alarm output relays Hold non hold alarm output relays Hold non hold alarm displays Rate of change alarm interval Turn On Off the alarm hysteresis A D 5 9 Integration time of the A D converter Temperature 10 15 Scan interval Burn out Off Up Down Reference junction compensation select internal external compensation voltage when using external Temperature unit IM 04L02A01 01E suoleiodg uowWOD epoyy UNy SHed JO SoWeN el 3 5 Configuring the Functions Setting Mode and Basic Setting Mode Soft key Settings in the basic setting mode Title Item 2 Memory 8 11 Save method to the external storage medium Type of data to be acquired Event data Sampling interval Mode Free Trigger Rotate Number of blocks number of memory divisions Data length file size Pretrigger position Type of trigger to use Memory amp trend 8 10 Measurement channels to acquire data display the trend Computation channels to acquire data display the trend Memory timeup 8 12 Date and time to
308. n e Consists of hourly daily weekly and monthly reports Data are computed at intervals depending on the report type one hour for hourly report one day for daily report etc Data are added to the internal memory at the end of every interval period Up to 40 reports can be stored in the internal memory Each report file can contain up to 30 measured computed channels of report data The header string can be written into the report data file a character string that is common to all data files Data format ASCII format IM 04L02A01 01E wn p n eBHbe10jg jeu1a x3 0 Burnes pue uonisinboy eead el 8 1 Data Types to be Acquired and Saved File name File names are automatically assigned month day hour minute of the first sampled data sequence number extension for display data event data manual sampled data TLOG data option and report data option Display data file Mddhhmma DDS Event data file Mddhhmma DEV Manual sampled data file Mddhhmma DMN TLOG data file Mddhhmma DTG Hourly report data file Mddhhmma DHR Daily report data file Mddhhmma DDR Weekly report data file Mddhhmma DWR Monthly report data file Mddhhmma DMR where M month 1 to 9 X 10 Y 11 Z 12 dd date hh hour mm minute a sequence number Note The sequence number of the file name is normally set to 0 However if the display data acquisition is started stopped and restarted within one minute for examp
309. n and the time period during which to acquire the data Data type Select display data only display data and event data or event data only Channels to be stored Select the channels to be acquired from measurement and computation channels Data acquisition Display data This operation is performed when the type of data acquired is set to display data only or display data and event data Data acquisition starts when the START key is pressed and stops when the STOP key is pressed The display data are overwritten when the display data storage area in the internal memory becomes full or the number of files exceeds 16 The number of display data files During manual save a file is created for each data write operation a set of start and stop operations During auto save a file is created every auto save interval and at every specified date time Note The display data in the internal memory can be confirmed with the memory summary Section 4 5 When a power disruption occurs the file is closed IM 04L02A01 01E 8 3 winipa eaHbe10jg jeus9 xq 0 Burnes pue uoljsinboy eead el 8 2 Function to Acquire Display Data and Event Data Event data This operation is performed when the type of data acquired is set to event data only or display data and event data There are three modes in data acquisition Free Trigger and Rotate Free mode can be set when acquiri
310. n of either value at the end of the scale is less than or equal to one digit the value is displayed as _ or O L Example 1 If the scale is set to 0 05 to 0 5 the scale display for the upper and lower limits is 0 0 to 0 5 Example 2 If the scale is set to 0 005 to 0 05 the scale display for the upper and lower limits are 0 0 to 0 0 Rule 3 If the integer section of either value at the end of the scale is two digits or three digits the value is displayed with the decimal fraction is discarded Example 3 If the scale is set to 0 1 to 100 0 the scale display for the upper and lower limits is O to 100 Rule 4 If the integer section of either value at the end of the scale is greater than or equal to four digits a three digit mantissa and exponent are displayed x10 or x10 for example Example 4 Ifthe scale is set to 10 to 2000 the scale display for the upper and lower limits are 1 to 200 x 10 The number of digits of the scale values can be increased by one digit within Rule 1 For the procedure see section 7 13 Consider the case when the scale marks are between 49 0 and 51 0 using center scale Normally the decimals of the scale values are truncated according to Rule 3 However if the number of digits is increased by one the values are displayed as follows CETA AAEN EATEN i EAN Locust a AEAN A AAAA Unit The unit is displayed near the center of the scale When the partial expanded displa
311. n saves the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium Here data refers to display data event data manual sampled data TLOG data option and report data option When using manual save Procedure The operation to save data in the internal memory to the external storage medium can be carried out when the storage medium is inserted into the drive 1 Insert the storage medium into the drive and close the front cover A window with a confirming message Do you want to save measured data appears Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER Key to save data Select No using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key not to save data Note You can select whether to save all the data residing in the internal memory or only the data that have not been saved to the storage medium See section 8 10 If saving to the storage medium is prevented with the key lock function and the key lock is enabled data cannot be saved when the medium is inserted into the drive Turn OFF the key lock before inserting the medium It is possible that the data in the internal memory are overwritten before the data are stored to the external storage medium due to limitations such as the capacity of the internal memory Refer to sections 8 2 and 8 3 and save the data to the external storage medium before they are overwritten For the memory usage display of the internal memory see section 4 2 Using the Status Display Sec
312. n the allowed range and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 E soft keys Used when setting numbers with exponents Example 5 0E 12 Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key The number of significant digits is 5 excluding the decimal When using exponents to set values use 5 or less digits for the mantissa and two digits for the exponent The allowed range is as follows 9 9999E 29 to 1 0000E 30 0 1 0000E 30 to 9 9999E 29 IM 04L02A01 01E 11 15 uondo uolouny Wodsey uolneyndwoyg Ey 11 7 TLOG Computation Scan mene H Interval set by a timer Determines the sum maximum minimum average and maximum minimum P P values of the specified channel at specified time intervals The interval is set by timers The example shown in the following figure indicates the case in which the average value of channel 1 over each interval TLOG AVE 01 is determined Equation TLOG AVG 01 Average value Average value i EEE EEEEEEEEEE HEHEHE lt HEEEEEHEEEHEH Time Sampling TLOG computation cannot be performed when the corresponding measurement channel is set to Skip or the corresponding computation
313. n value error 923 Channel 3 A D calibration value error 924 Channel 4 A D calibration value error 930 Memory acquisition failure 940 The Ethernet module is down 12 8 IM 04L02A01 01E 12 2 Troubleshooting Flow Chart Nothing is displayed Is the power switch on T h I Does the switch work properly urmon the power propery See section 3 2 Is the power supply connected properly Connect properly See section 2 7 Supply the power at the specified voltage and frequency See section 14 7 Is the power supplied properly Contact your nearest Sales amp Service Center Is the fuse blown YES Replace the fuse See section 13 2 YES Does the fuse stay intact when the power is turned on again Contact your nearest Sales amp Service Center Contact your nearest Sales amp Service Center IM 04L02A01 01E 12 9 6Bun ooys jqnoiL D 12 2 Troubleshooting Flow Chart The reading error is large e The digital indication or trend trace waveform is unstable The trend trace waveform stays at 0 or 100 Does the input meet the specifications signal source resistance etc NO YES Are the span and NO range settings correct YES Is the input free of noise NO YES Is the environmental temperature kept constant for temperature m
314. nce Displaying the computed result The computed data of computation channels can be displayed in each operation screen Displaying the waveform and bar graph The data are displayed in the range defined by the upper and lower limits of the span For the settings related to displaying the computed result see sections below Set computation channels See section 11 4 Assign channels to groups See section 7 6 Display tags See sections 7 1 and 7 2 Set the channel display color See section 7 8 Use zone display See section 7 9 Set the number of scale divisions See section 7 10 IM 04L02A01 01E 11 1 Overview of the Computation Function Rolling average Alarm Set the base position of the bar graph See section 7 10 Specify the scale display position See section 7 10 Use partial expanded display See sections 7 11 and 7 12 Numerical display The range of displayed values of computed data is from 9999999 to 99999999 excluding the decimal point The decimal point position corresponds to the position of the decimal point of the upper and lower limit span of the computation channel However special displays are used for cases given in the table below Data Condition Computation Display The computed result exceeds 99999999 positive over display range XXXXXXX The computed result is below 9999999 negative over display range XXXXXXX The value exceeds 3 4E 38 or is below overflow XXXXXX
315. nd press the DISP ENTER key Measurable range The following table shows the mode type range and measurable range Mode Type Range Measurable Range Delta Volt 20 mV 20 00 to 20 00 mV 60 mV 60 00 to 60 00 mV 200 mV 200 0 to 200 0 mV 2V 2 000 to 2 000 V 6V 6 000 to 6 000 V 20 V 20 00 to 20 00 V 50 V 50 00 to 50 00 V Delta TC R 1760 0 to 1760 0 C 3168 to 3168 F S 1760 0 to 1760 0 C 3168 to 3168 F B 1820 0 to 1820 0 C 3276 to 3276 F K 1570 0 to 1570 0 C 2826 to 2826 F E 1000 0 to 1000 0 C 1800 0 to 1800 0 F J 1300 0 to 1300 0 C 2340 0 to 2340 0 F T 600 0 to 600 0 C 1080 0 to 1080 0 F N 1300 0 to 1300 0 C 2340 to 2340 F WwW 2315 0 to 2315 0 C 4167 to 4167 F L 1100 0 to 1100 0 C 1980 0 to 1980 0 F U 600 0 to 600 0 C 1080 0 to 1080 0 F Delta RTD Pt100 800 0 to 800 0 C 1440 0 to 1440 0 F JPt100 750 0 to 750 0 C 1350 0 to 1350 0 F CU1 to 6 CU10 500 0 to 500 0 C option 900 0 to 900 0 F CU25 500 0 to 500 0 C option 900 0 to 900 0 F Delta DI Level 1 to 1 Contact 1 to 1 The relationship with the reference channel Even if the input type or the measurement range of the difference computation channel and the reference channel is not the same the difference computation is performed according to the following rules When the decimal position between the reference channel and the difference computat
316. ndicator or the output relay is set to non hold The release operation can be executed via remote control option or via communications Alarm indication The alarm condition can be confirmed with the alarm icon in the status display section and the alarm indication on the operation screen such as the trend display The indicator pattern varies depending on the hold non hold setting The alarm icon in the status display section GROUP 1 cs GROUP oa 05 57 23 AO OS MN thour eis S Alarm icon Indicator Hold Non hold Alarm Alarm Indication Non hold Activated Red icon Released No icon displayed Hold Activated Blinking red icon Stops blinking with alarm ACK Released Blinking green icon icon disappears with alarm ACK IM 04L02A01 01E suue y Buiyjes pue Guibpa mouyoy el 6 1 Releasing the Alarm Indication and Output Relay Option Non hold Activated Alarm Released Red icon Indication No icon Hold Activated Released Blinking red m Red icon icon Blinking red Blinking green icon m gt l icon Lag gt l No icon Alarm ACK Alarm ACK Alarm indication in the trend display T Measured value Alarm mark Alarm type Indicator Hold Non Hold Alarm Alarm Indication Non hold Activated Alarm mark alarm type measured v
317. ne of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a string Enter the string up to 8 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 To cancel the operation and return to the Save Load Clear data menu press the ESC key Note The extension PNL will automatically be added to the file name The following character combinations cannot be used as file names AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK All spaces are not allowed for file names Spaces at the top or in the middle of a character string are not allowed Press the DISP ENTER key to save the data The saved file appears in the file list If a file with the same name as you entered exists on the external storage medium a message will appear to confirm overwriting Select Yes or No and press the DISP ENTER key IM 04L02A01 01E 9 1 ejeq Bulzijeniuy pue saji4q Guibeuey el 9 1 Saving oading setup data Loading setup data in the setting mode Procedure Loads the setup data set in the setting mode only from a setup file in the external storage medium and make the settings effective Setting items that are inconsistent with the content of the basic setting mode of the DX200 will not be acquired Returns to the operation mode when loading is completed These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use
318. nection 1 N where N 1 to 31 Transmission speed 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bps Data length 7 or 8 bits Stop bit 1 bit Parity Odd even or none Communication distance RS 422 485 Up to 1200 m Communication mode ASCII for input output for control and setting ASCII or binary for output of measured data Modbus Mode RTU SLAVE RTU MASTER Data type SLAVE Data read and data write by the master device suoneoyioeds z MASTER Data read from the slave device Computation function M1 is necessary Wiring 4 wires for RS 422 485 Fieldbus Communication Interface CF1 Bidirectional digital communication with field devices and DCSs connected in a multidrop fashion according to the FOUNDATION Fieldbus standard specified by the Fieldbus Foundation IM 04L02A01 01E 14 11 14 6 SPECIFICATIONS OF OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS VGA Output D5 Interface FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1 transmission speed 31 25 kb s Physical layer type 113 standard power signaling bus powered non I S External power supply supply voltage 9 to 32 VDC Supply current 16 5 mA maximum Connection M4 screws 2 terminals Dielectric strength Withstand voltage 500 Vrms 50 60 Hz for one minute between communication terminal and ground terminal Functional specification Function block 8 Al function blocks transmit measured computed data to other instruments one channel each 1 MAI function block transmit measured computed da
319. ned Off can be stored to the internal memory with the manual sampling operation For the operating procedure see section 8 12 TLOG data The TLOG data are acquired every interval For the setting procedure see section 11 9 Setting computation channels The computation channel specifications are set in the setting mode For detail see sections 11 4 through 11 6 The timer used in the TLOG computation is set in the basic setting mode For detail see section 11 9 IM 04L02A01 01E uodo uolouny Wodsey uolneyndwoyg 3 11 2 Explanation of Computing Equations This section describes the meaning of the computation equation and how to write them Four arithmetical computations Power SQR ABS The types of data that can be used in equations are measured data computed data constants K01 to K30 communication interface data C01 to C30 and the remote control terminal conditions D01 to D08 EXAMPLE Addition 01 02 Computes the measured value of channel 1 plus the measured value of channel 2 Subtraction 01 02 Computes the measured value of channel 1 minus the measured value of channel 2 Multiplication x 01xKO3 Computes the measured value of channel 1 multiplied by constant KO3 Division 01 KO2 Computes the measured value of channel 1 divided by constant K02 Note When you set an expression as e g 31 01 on channel 31 the summation of channel number 1 will be displayed in channel 31 LOG E
320. nels Over range occurs when the input type is voltage and the input exceeds 5 of the measurable range For example consider the case when the measurement range is 2 V and the measurable range is from 2 000 to 2 000 V If the input signal exceeds 2 200 V over range occurs If the input signal falls below 2 200 V over range occurs Over range occurs when the input type is TC thermocouple or RTD resistance temperature detector and the input exceeds approximately 10 C of the measurable range For example consider the case when the measurement range is R and the measurable range is from 0 0 to 1760 0 C If the input signal exceeds approximately 1770 0 C over range occurs If the input signal falls below approximately 10 0 C over range occurs Positive negative computation overflow in computation channels Positive computation overflow occurs when the value exceeds 3 4E 38 Negative computation overflow occurs when the value falls below 3 4E 38 Output value when detected erroneous data measurement over range data or computation overflow data Channels Data Output value Measurement channels measurement error Blank positive over range 99999 negative over range 99999 Computation channels computation error 999999999 positive computation overflow 999999999 negative computation overflow 99999999 CH TAG and UNIT lines In the following cases both the CH T
321. nels by using the measured data or computed data as variables The result of the computation can be displayed or stored Computation is performed every scan interval In addition a moving average rolling average can be calculated on the computed result and the moving average value can be used as the computed data for that channel For report functions see sections 11 11 to 11 13 Computation channels Model Channels DX204 Channel 31 to 38 8 channels DX208 Channel 31 to 38 8 channels DX210 Channel 31 to 60 30 channels DX220 Channel 31 to 60 30 channels DX230 Channel 31 to 60 30 channels Types of computations In the table below y represents the computed result X and n generally represent the measured data and a constant For details see Data that can be used in equations Type Description Four arithmetical operations Addition subtraction multiplication x and division xx Determines the power y X SQR Determines the square root ABS Determines the absolute value LOG Determines the common logarithm y logiox EXP Determines the exponent y e Relational computation Determines lt lt gt of two elements and outputs 0 or 1 Logical computation Determines the AND logical product OR logical sum XOR exclusive logical sum of two elements NOT negation of an element and outputs O or 1 Statistica
322. nformation Screen Alarm Summary Message Summary and Memory Summary Operation Flow Diagram Screen rmenu Sub menu INFORMATION Screen menu Sub menu A A A gt v gt p E J Z To HISTORICAL Information TREND selection MEMORY SUMMARY zx i Y To Report data When displaying Report data Screen menu Sub menu DISP ENTER key 4 lt gt _ Arrow keys Procedure Displaying the alarm summary message summary or memory summary 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu 2 Select INFORMATION using the up and down arrow keys 3 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key 4 Select ALARM SUMMARY MESSAGE SUMMARY or MEMORY SUMMARY using the up and down arrow keys e INFOR oraee sunnaRy MMO INFOR izo INFOR MATION a HAT On ESSAGE sunnar MATION 5 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen To close the menu without displaying the screen press the ESC key MEMORY SUMMARY 4 14 IM 04L02A01 01E 4 5 Using the Information Screen Alarm Summary Message Summary and Memory Summary Alarm Summary Procedure Number of the alarm information displayed at the bottom of the screen Cursor Up and down arrow keys can be used to
323. ng Number of characters 16 characters maximum Display the retrieved data from internal or external memory Display format Whole screen display or divided into 2 areas only when displaying the historical trend of the display data Time axis operation Can be expanded reduced and scrolled Memory information The following information of the retrieved data are displayed File name serial number of the DX which is used to acquire data starting and ending time of data acquisition user name when using key login function and batch information models with BT1 The LCD display is divided into four sections The following displays can be shown in each Trend numeric bar graph overview alarm summary message summary and memory summary Display the logs of error messages key login logout communication interface commands and file transfers via FTP Display the number of input points capacity of the internal memory options MAC address and firmware version number The LCD backlight automatically dims if no key is pressed for a certain preset time can be set from 1 2 5 10 20 and 60 minutes Selectable from English German French and Japanese C or F selectable 14 4 IM 04L02A01 01E 14 3 Data Storage Specifications External storage medium Saving method Manual saving Automatic saving Sampling Interval Selectable from 1 3 5 inch floppy disk 2HD 1 44 MB 2 PCMCIA ATA flash memory card 4 to
324. ng Items in the Setting Mode Enclosed in parentheses are references Soft key Title Item 1 Range 5 1 to 5 7 Input type span scale etc Alarm 6 2 Alarm type Alarm value Output relay On Off Output relay number 2 Tag 7 1 Tag name Filter 5 8 Filter time constant Off DX204 DX208 Moving average 5 8 Number of samples for the moving average Off DX210 DX220 DX230 Alarm delay time 6 3 3 Trend Save interval Trend display update rate 7 3 Auto save interval 8 8 Message 7 5 Message string File 8 9 Header string to be written to file Name of directory to which data are to be saved Range of data to be saved during manual save USER key 10 2 Assign an action to the USER key Daylight savings time 10 14 Daylight savings time switch time 4 Display 4 1 Group set Trip line Group name 7 6 Assign channels to groups 7 6 Trip line position display color 7 7 Measurement channel display color Zone upper and lower limits Number of scale divisions for the trend and bar graph Bar graph base position Specify the scale display position for trends Turn On Off partial expanded display Position and boundary for the partial expanded display Display direction trend bar graph Background color white or black Trend line width Trip line width Grid for the trend display Interval for switching group displays Scroll time Scale digit LCD brightness Turn On Off the LCD backlight sa
325. ng the event data only Mode Description Free Data acquisition is started by pressing the START key The operation is stopped by pressing the STOP key When the storage area of the internal memory becomes full or the number of files in the internal memory exceeds 16 it is overwritten The number of event data files During manual save a file is created for each data write operation start and stop operations During auto save a file is created every specified interval data length see section 8 11 and at every specified date time Trigger When the internal memory is not divided into blocks One event data file is created in the internal memory Press the START key to enter the trigger wait state After the trigger is activated data are acquired for the specified time data length see section 8 11 and the operation is stopped At this point the acquisition does not start even if the trigger is activated Data acquisition PN i Trigger wait i Trigger activated Stop When the internal memory is divided into blocks An event data file each in the block is created Press the START key to enter the trigger wait state After the trigger is activated data are acquired for the specified time data length see section 8 11 and the operation is stopped When the trigger is activated again data are acquired and stored to the next block When all blocks are full no more acquisition takes place
326. nit of the input values are different In these cases the unit of the data measured over the scan interval is converted to match the unit of the input values and the computation is performed 11 16 IM 04L02A01 01E 11 7 TLOG Computation About Reset For example if the scan interval is 2 s and the input value is 100 m min a simple summation would add 100 every 2 s resulting in 3000 after one minute However if the computing unit is set to min then 2 s 60 s is multiplied every scan interval before the value is added giving a result that has a m min unit The following equations are applied The scan interval unit is in seconds Off gt measured value Is measured value x scan interval min measured value x scan interval 60 h gt measured value x scan interval 3600 For the setting procedure see section 11 8 Whether or not to reset the computed result at every timeout is selectable The figure below shows the action of TLOG SUM computation Example Result of the TLOG SUM computation Interval 1 2 3 Reset Reset Reset Reset On An AAA P Reset Off In case of TLOG MAX computation for example the maximum value is derived for every interval when Reset is On and the maximum value from the start of computation is derived when Reset is Off If power is lost while the TLOG computation was in progress The TLOG computation is resumed when the power is restored The operation varies
327. nly one TLOG computation can be specified in a single computing equation TLOG MAX Syntax TLOG MAX e1 Result Computes the maximum value of channel e1 TLOG MIN Syntax TLOG MIN e1 Result Computes the minimum value of channel e1 TLOG AVE Syntax TLOG AVE e1 Result Computes the average value of channel e1 TLOG SUM Syntax TLOG SUM e1 Result Computes the summation of channel e1 TLOG P P Syntax TLOG P P e1 Result Computes the maximum value minimum value of channel e1 An example of computing equations TLOG MAX 01 K01xSQR 02 Examples of computing equations that are not allowed TLOG AVE 01 TLOG AVE 02 Reason TLOG appears twice in one equation TLOG AVE ABS 01 Reason A computing element is used inside the parentheses Rules for writing an equation common items Follow the rules below in writing the computing equations Use up to 40 characters to write equations The precedence of computing terms can be specified using parentheses Specify the channels in the equation using channel numbers You can use 01 or 1 for example to specify one digit numbers for channels constants communication input data and conditions of the remote control terminals in equations Example 01 1 K01 K1 C01 C1 D01 D1 The data value for the channel used in the equation and for all channels greater in number than that channel are substituted with data from the previous scan Do no
328. o data Green block Block containing data that were acquired to the internal memory after starting the current acquisition of event data Gray block Block containing data that were acquired before the current start operation 7 The external storage medium condition D The front cover is open No display No storage medium inserted E and F displayed in order Accessing the storage medium F Storage medium is idle no access G The used space of the storage medium is indicated by the green level indicator in the icon The colored section indicating the level turns red when the amount of free space on the storage medium falls below 10 Note When the front cover is closed the DX200 checks whether or not an external storage medium is inserted in the drive Keep the front cover closed during operation in order to prevent adverse effects caused by foreign particles such as dust entering the DX200 8 Computation icon Option Computation icon not displayed No computation option or computation is suspended White computation icon Computation in progress Yellow computation icon Computation data dropout occurred Note Computation data dropout occurs when the computation is not completed within the scan interval The computation icon returns to the green icon by pressing FUNC MathACK soft key see section 11 3 If a computation dropout occurs make the scan interval longer see section 5 9 or reduce the number of computation channe
329. o warranties regarding the product except those stated in the WARRANTY that is provided separately YOKOGAWA assumes no liability to any party for any loss or damage direct or indirect caused by the user or any unpredictable defect of the product Handling Precautions of the Software YOKOGAWA makes no warranties regarding the software accompanying this product except those stated in the WARRANTY that is provided separately Use the software on a single PC You must purchase another copy of the software if you are to use the software on another PC Copying the software for any purposes other than backup is strictly prohibited Please store the original media containing the software in a safe place Reverse engineering such as decompiling of the software is strictly prohibited No portion of the software supplied by YOKOGAWA may be transferred exchanged or sublet or leased for use by any third party without prior permission by YOKOGAWA IM 04L02A01 01E Safety Precautions Make sure to comply with the following safety precautions Failure to comply may result in injury or death electric shock hazard Power Supply Before connecting the power cord ensure that the power supply voltage matches the voltage rating for the instrument and for desktop types that it is within the maximum rated voltage for the power cord itself Power Cord and Plug Desktop Type To prevent an electric shock or fire be sure to
330. of Channel Display Color Channel 1 Red Channel 2 Green Channel 3 Blue Channel 4 Blue violet Channel 5 Brown Channel 6 Orange Channel 7 Yellow green Channel 8 Light blue Channel 9 violet Channel 10 Gray Channel 11 Red Channel 12 Green Channel 13 Blue Channel 14 Blue violet Channel 15 Brown Channel 16 Orange Channel 17 Yellow green Channel 18 Light blue Channel 19 violet Channel 20 Gray Channel 21 Red Channel 22 Green Channel 23 Blue Channel 24 Blue violet Channel 25 Brown Channel 26 Orange Channel 27 Yellow green Channel 28 Light blue Channel 29 violet Channel 30 Gray Available colors for the channels Red green blue blue violet brown orange yellow green light blue violet gray limes cyan dark blue yellow silver and purple 7 12 IM 04L02A01 01E 7 9 Using Zone Displays Trend Procedure By using zones the waveforms of each channel can be displayed in their own zones Because the waveforms do not overlap they are easier to view These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press w Press the soft key
331. of the screen total number of logs Date and time of occurrence Error code Error message 0 885 885 Time Message Jan 12 2088 00 36 47 281 Not enough free space on media Jan 12 2008 00 36 19 218 Media has not been inserted Jan 11 2888 04 15 30 885 The input numerical value exceeds the set range Jan 11 2088 04 15 28 85 The input numerical value exceeds the set range Jan 11 2088 83 23 19 681 Measured data have been initialized 10 10 IM 04L02A01 01E 10 7 Displaying the Log Screen System Screen Key login logout log 007 007 Time 1 0 No User Name Jan 1 2088 08 59 34 In al user Jan 01 2088 68 59 29 Out Jan 81 2888 08 52 51 In al user Jan 81 2008 08 21 45 In al user Jan 01 2000 68 15 17 In al user1 Jan 01 2000 88 14 45 Out Jan 81 2000 88 14 35 I 1 user1 User name User No Date time Login logout Communication command log l Message 007 007 Time ID User Nane 1 0 Message Link 0 Jan 06 2088 18 52 23 1 user lt Logout Jan 06 2000 18 52 23 1 user gt ca Jan 6 2088 18 51 48 1 user lt 259 Jan 86 2000 18 51 48 1 user gt FD 8 881 818 Jan 6 2088 18 51 41 1 user lt EB Jan 86 2000 18 51 41 1 user gt B08 Jan 6 2888 18 51 37 1 user lt Login 1 0 symbol FTP log gt input lt output Name of the user that accessed this instrument A number used to identify the user that is connected Date and time when
332. om the DX200 as this may cause malfunction Do not apply volatile chemicals to the LCD monitor or panel keys Do not allow rubber and vinyl products to remain in contact with the DX200 for long periods of time This may damage the DX200 Do not apply shock to the DX200 When not in use make sure to turn OFF the power switch If there are any symptoms of trouble such as strange odors or smoke coming from the DX200 immediately turn OFF the power and unplug the power cord Then contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer IM 04L02A01 01E 2 1 00ZXd y Buisp 310499 D 2 1 Precautions on the Use of the DX200 Handling precautions of external storage media Insert the card until these edges are nearly flush Take special care in handling external storage media as they are delicate products For general precautions see the instruction manual that came with the external storage medium Floppy disks and Zip disks may not operate properly under high or low temperature environment If you are using the DX200 in a low temperature environment less than 10 C let the DX200 warm up for at least 30 minutes beforehand If you are using them in a high temperature environment greater than 40 C we recommend the external storage medium be inserted into the drive when saving the data and be removed after the data have been saved manual save see section 8 4 Remove the external storage medium from the drive when turning ON OFF the DX
333. on The time period corresponding to 1 division on the time axis on the trend display is specified The time axis on the trend display is determined by the display update rate The sampling interval of the display data is also determined by the display update rate The display update rate cannot be changed while data sampling is in progress These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press mew To display the setting screen press the soft key OR Trend ave interval Time div itn 1 futo save interval th The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Time div Display update rate Select the display update rate from 15 s 30 s 1 min 2 min 5 min 10 min 20 min 30 min 1h 2h 4h and 10h for DX204 and DX208 only Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Note When Auto save is set for saving
334. on is used to set the scale display position for each channel when the scale display is turned On see section 4 3 on the trend screen Select the position from 1 to 10 Select Off for channels without scale Note The scale for the channels that are assigned to the group in the trend screen are displayed The larger the number of scales to be displayed less amount of area there is to display the waveform Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 7 16 IM 04L02A01 01E 7 10 Setting the Scale Division Bar Graph Base Position Bar Graph and Scale Position Trend Explanation Scale Specifications Scale display position On the trend screen the scale for the channels that are assigned to groups can be displayed in 10 different positions see the figure below During trend horizontal display The scale display position is 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 and 1 from the left
335. one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter the voltage Enter a value 20000 uV to 20000 uV initial value is O uV and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key The integration time of the A D converter The DX200 uses an A D converter to convert the input signal to a digital signal The A D converter operates at an integral time of 16 7 ms 60 Hz 20 ms 50 Hz or 100 ms By setting the integration time to match the frequency of the power supply being used power supply frequency noise can be minimized Burnout of Thermocouple Input When the alarm is set to detect positive or negative over range the occurrence of burnout of thermocouple can be displayed as an alarm Turn the burnout function OFF when connecting the input wires in parallel with other devices Reference Junction Compensation of Thermocouple Input When using the reference junction compensation of the DX200 see Precautions to be taken while wiring in section 2 3 Input Signal Wiring When using the external reference junction compensation set an appropriate reference junction compensation voltage As in the exam
336. operation Specifying AND produces no effect Relays 111 112 113 are used for models without 101 to 106 Energize De energize operation of the alarm output relay You can select whether to energize or de energize the alarm output relay when the alarm occurs By selecting de energize the alarm output relay will operate in the same manner as when the alarm occurs when the power supply is disrupted Energize or de energize applies to all alarm output relays The initial setting is set to energize O KA IS NO Cc NC NO c NC Energize NO c NC 7 De energize NO c NC NO c NC NO c NC Power failure Alarm off Alarm on NO Normally opened C common and NC normally closed 6 12 IM 04L02A01 01E 6 4 Setting the Auxiliary Alarm Function Basic Setting Mode Hold Non hold operation of the alarm output relay When the alarm changes from the activated state to the released state you can select to Turn OFF the output relay in sync with the alarm release non hold or Hold the output relay ON till an alarm acknowledge operation is executed hold This applies to all alarm output relays The initial setting is set to Nonhold When set to non hold Alarm on Alarm off S C Shows the status of the normally opened NO contact of the relay The status is the reverse for the normally closed contact Relay output on Relay output off When set to hold Alarm on Alarm off JL Alarm ACK Relay output on
337. opout occurs when the computation is not completed within the scan interval When this occurs frequently lower the CPU load by reducing the number of computation channels or making the scan interval longer When computation data are acquired to the internal memory the data immediately before a computation drop out are substituted for the computation data at the time of the dropout IM 04L02A01 01E 11 9 uondo uolouny Wodsey uolneyndwoy Ey 11 4 Setting Computation Channels This section describes the procedures to set equations to computation channels The equation is set in the setting mode Equations cannot be set while data acquisition or computation is in progress Procedure These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press w Press the soft key Next 1 2 To display the setting screen press the soft key 7 First CH 31 Last CH 31 Hath range Nath On Off Span Lower Upper Unit 200 00 20008 2 3 4 5 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First channel and last channel
338. opping the waveform update The operation procedure used to start the waveform display of the trend screen and the procedure used to stop the waveform update are the same as the operation used to start stop the data acquisition to the internal memory When the data are being acquired to the internal memory the waveform is displayed When it is stopped the waveform is not updated For the operating procedure see sections 8 5 and 8 6 Note eee Trend screen when the acquired data type is set to Event only on the DX210 DX220 DX230 models with the computation option M1 If the screen is switched from the trend screen to another screen back to the trend screen the old waveform is cleared and the waveform from that point is displayed This is due to the memory capacity restriction of the internal memory and is not an abnormal behavior The acquired data are kept in the internal memory When waveform updating is stopped the waveform at that point remain displayed on the screen 4 10 IM 04L02A01 01E 4 3 Using the Trend Digital and Bar Graph Screens Explanation About group display and all channel display The group display of trend digital and bar graph and the all channel display of the trend are displayed in the following fashion see table below They depend on whether channels are assigned to the groups and whether the channels are set to display the trend and store the data Assigned to Trend Display Data Num
339. or the measured item can be displayed for each channel The number of divisions of the display scale created by the main scale marks can be set to a value in the range 4 to 12 div also applies to the bar graph display Medium and small scale marks are displayed in between the main scale marks You can select whether or not to display the scale for each channel and the display position Section 7 10 Turn ON OFF the numerical The numerical display section can be turned ON or OFF If display section the numerical display section is turned OFF the display shows only the waveform and the scale See section 4 3 Zone display The waveform of each channel is displayed in its display range zone The waveforms are easier to view because they do not overlap See the explanation of the zone display below Section 7 9 Partial expanded display You can expand the important section of the display range See the explanation of the partial expanded display below Sections 7 11 and 7 12 Explanation Regarding the Zone Display The display range of the waveform is called a zone Zones can be set for each channel The waveforms can be set in different zones so that they are easier to view In the example shown in the figure below channel 1 is displayed in the zone 0 to 30 channel 2 in the zone 30 to 60 and channel 3 in the zone 60 to 100 Normal display Zone display 100 100 CH3 j J p Zone 3 4 l
340. or to the copy destination box and press the Paste soft key The character string is copied a4 Input Clear Copy Paste Clearing the character string 1 To clear the character string press the Clear soft key IM 04L02A01 01E 3 23 suoleiodg uowWOD epoyy UNy SHed JO SoWeN el 3 7 Setting the Date and Time Procedure Set the date and time The set date and time can be specified whether it belong to the summer time or the winter time The summer time and the winter time are defined by the daylight savings time adjustment function For detail see section 10 14 Using the Daylight Savings Time Adjustment Function Press ew To display the window for the date and time setting press the soft key 6 Taw ES Winter 1 YY MM DD HH MM SS Enter the date and time Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter the date and time Enter the date and time and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numbers see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 Pressing the DISP ENTER key closes the window without setting the DST box To cancel the setting and close the window press the ESC key 2 DST Daylight savings time adjustment function Summer or Winter is displayed in the DST box corresponding to the date and time indicated in the YY MM DD HH MM SS box when the window is opened Operate as follows to set Summer or Winter
341. ottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press To display the setting screen press the soft key 8 Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears AUX Tag Channel Channel Memory alarm th Language English Partial 1 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Partial Select Use or Not Use Partial expanded display can be set in the setting mode Not Partial expanded display cannot be set Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 7 22 IM 04L02A01 01E 7 13 Setting the Display Direction Background Color Waveform Line Width Trip Line Width Grid Scroll Time and Scale digit Procedure The display direction of the trend and bar graph can be set to horizontal or vertical The background color used in the trend digital bar graph and information screens can be set to white or black common to all screens The line width of the waveform can be selected as 1 2 or 3 dots The line width of the trip line can be selected as 1 2 or 3 dots The grid lines can be displayed
342. ow appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key IM 04L02A01 01E 10 23 suonouny 19410 2 10 15 Setting the Temperature Unit Basic Setting Mode Select the temperature unit from C or F Procedure These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press ew Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears To display the setting screen press the soft key Ooa Temperature The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Temperature Unit Select C or F C Celsius F Fahrenheit Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 10 24 IM 04L02A01 01E 10 16 Setting the Time Zone Basic Setting Mode Procedure Set the time difference from GMT Greenwich mean time If you use the Web server function make sure to set this parameter These procedures a
343. ow keys the historical trend of the display data or event data containing the message can be recalled For a description on the historical trend display see Historical Trend in this section For the operating procedure see section 4 5 Number of the message displayed at the bottom of the screen Number of the messages in the internal memory Cursor Message Date and time the message was written User name when using key login function 006 806 Hessage Time User Name MESSAGES Jan 94 2000 02 24 59 userl POWER OFF Jan 804 2000 02 24 53 userl m HESSAGES Jan 94 2000 02 24 06 userl MESSAGE4 Jan 84 2000 02 24 00 useri POWER ON Jan 84 2008 02 21 03 useri HESSAGE1 Jan 94 2000 62 28 59 userl Y The historical trend of the data containing the selected message display data example 82 55 MESSAGE 1 E9 ESSAI Dao 23 41 0 E gt C TAG B2 8 034 2 00 as 2 00 LAH 0 48 2 00 Baa 2 00 ch 4 2 00 0 3 2 00 P nv 1 3 2 068 L 2 8 pH 1 74 2 09 16 2 00 y IM 04L02A01 01E 1 3 Display Function Memory Summary The information pertaining to the display data file and event data file in the internal memory is displayed Display data correspond to the data on the trend display Event data are data acquired to the internal memory according to the specified sampling interval and data collection period The data are separate from the display data In addition
344. ower failure Power failure occurence recovery occurence recovery Operation when the alarm setting is changed If a new delay alarm is set The alarm detection starts at that time Itis unaffected by the conditions existing before the alarm is set If the alarm setting of a preexisting delay alarm is changed If an alarm is not occurring at the time of the change alarm detection starts at the new setting Ifan alarm is occurring at the time of the change and the alarm type is set to delay upper limit alarm the alarm continues as long as the input is above or equal to the new setting If the input is below the new setting the alarm turns OFF Ifthe alarm type is set to delay lower limit alarm the alarm continues as long as the input is below or equal to the new setting If the input is above the new setting the alarm turns OFF IM 04L02A01 01E 6 9 suuejy Buipas pue Guibpea mouyoy el 6 4 Setting the Auxiliary Alarm Function Basic Setting Mode Procedure These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow Once new settings are confirmed they change back to white Press Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears To display the setting s
345. ower switch and check the points listed in step 1 After checking the points turn ON the power switch again If the unit still does not work it is probably malfunctioning Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs If an error message is displayed on the screen take measures according to the description in chapter 12 Troubleshooting Turn ON the power switch let the DX200 warm up for at least 30 minutes and then start the measurements 3 4 IM 04L02A01 01E 3 3 Inserting Removing the External Storage Medium This section describes the procedures to insert and remove the external storage medium Three types of media can be used depending on the specification Model DX2xx 1 Floppy disk Model DX2xx 2 or DX2xx 5 Zip disk Model DX2xx 3 ATA flash memory card For the handling procedure of the storage medium see section 2 1 1 Only 100 MB Zip disks can be used with model DX2 xx 2 With model DX2 xx 5 250 MB and 100 MB Zip disks can be used However 100 MB Zip disks must be formatted using quick logical formatting rather than normal physical formatting 2 This product is no longer produced Procedure Inserting the storage medium 1 Open the front cover by pressing down on the knob that is located in the center of the upper section of the cover and pulling forward Insert the medium into the drive until a click is heard 2 When the power switch is turned ON closing the front cover causes
346. oyMsS g 4 5 Using the Information Screen Alarm Summary Message Summary and Memory Summary Message Summary Procedure 806 006 Hessage Time User Name MESSAGES Jan 84 2000 02 24 59 userl POWER OFF Jan 04 2000 02 24 53 userl Cursor __ _ _ HESSAGE5 Jan 84 2000 02 24 06 userl Up and down arrow NESSAGE4 Jan 84 2000 02 24 00 userl keys can be used to POWER ON Jan 04 2000 2 21 83 userl move the cursor and NESSAGE1 Jan 04 2688 62 28 59 userl scroll the screen Number of the message displayed at the bottom of the screen Number of the messages in the internal memory Message Date and time the message was written User name when using id login function The date and time when the message was entered and the user name when using key login function are displayed Recalling the historical trend at the time the message was written This operation is carried out on the Message Summary screen i 020 022 Nessage Tine MESSAGE2 Jan 12 2000 04 37 16 NESSAGE1 Jan 12 2088 64 37 13 MESSAGE Jan 12 2008 84 37 11 Selected message m HESSAGES Jan 12 2000 04 37 88 MESSAGE1L Jan 12 2008 64 37 82 MESSAGE2 Jan 12 2008 64 36 43 MESSAGE Jan 12 2008 84 36 41 Select the message of which to display the historical trend using the up and down arrow keys Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu pr
347. play the Save Load Clear data menu screen Press soft key to display the File list screen File list Directory nane File name Time 16188898 DHR 2000 01 81 66 09 BAB 16168898 DDS 2000 01 01 68 89 B 16186168 DHR 2008 01 81 68 16 o 10100100 DDS 2000 01 01 66 16 TRASH 16188348 DDS 2000 01 01 68 34 18100340 DEV 2000 01 81 80 34 18100530 DHR 2000 01 81 80 53 18108438 DDS 2000 81 81 80 54 10100438 DEV 2008 01 81 80 54 18100400 DHR 2000 01 81 80 40 18108358 DDS 2000 01 81 80 40 10100538 DEV 2008 81 81 80 54 18100540 DHR 2000 01 81 80 54 18100540 DDS 2000 01 81 80 54 Free space 18188548 DEY 2808 81 01 68 54 93412 Kbytes 10109568 DHR 2000 81 01 00 56 1 The directories in the external storage medium are displayed Using the arrow keys select the directory Files in the directory are listed to the right is the root directory 2 Pressing the right arrow key moves the cursor to the file list The list can be scrolled using the arrow keys To move back to the Directory name column press the left arrow key 3 Free space Displays the amount of free space on the external storage medium 4 Press the ESC key to return to the Save Load Clear data menu screen IM 04L02A01 01E 9 5 Managing files Displaying free space on the external storage medium Deleting files and directories on the external storage medium in the setting mode Deletes files and directories on the external
348. ple in the following figure if the reference junction temperature for the external reference junction compensation is To C set the thermoelectromotive force of the 0 C reference for To C as the reference junction compensation voltage An example of External reference junction compensation DX200 External reference junction compensation Maintain the junction between the thermocouple and the copper wire at To C Thermocouple 5 16 IM 04L02A01 01E Chapter 6 Acknowledging and Setting Alarms 6 1 Releasing the Alarm Indication and Output Relay Option Procedure Explanation This section describes the procedures to release the alarm indication and the output relay when the behavior of the indicator or the output relay is set to hold The indicator or output relay condition varies depending on the timing at which the alarm release operation is carried out Operation using the FUNC key This operation is carried out in the operation mode 1 Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu 2 To release the alarm indication and the output relay press the Alarm ACK soft key Operation using the USER key This is an operation carried out when Alarm ACK is assigned to the USER key 1 To release the alarm indication and the output relay press the USER key The indications and output relays generated by all alarms are released The release operation is void if the behavior of the i
349. putation channel display color 4 6 Zone 7 9 Zone upper and lower limits for the computation channels Graph 7 10 Number of scale divisions for the trend and bar graph displays for the computation channels Bar graph base positions for the computation channels Specify the scale display position for trends for the computation channels Partial 7 11 Turn On Off partial expanded display for the computation channels Position and boundary for the partial expanded display for the computation channels 5 Save Load Clear data 5 1 Save settings Save setup data to the external storage medium 9 1 5 2 Load settings Load setup data from the external storage medium 9 1 5 3 Save data Store measured data using key operation 9 2 5 4 Load display data Load Display the display data on the external storage medium 9 3 5 5 Load event data Load Display the event data on the external storage medium 9 4 5 6 File list List the files on the external storage medium 9 5 5 7 Delete Delete files on the external storage medium 9 5 5 8 Format Format the external storage medium 9 5 5 9 Clear data Clear the measure computed data in the internal memory 9 7 6 Time set 3 7 Enter the current time 7 Math range 11 4 Computing equations display span and unit for computation channels Math alarm 11 5 Alarm type for the computation channel Alarm value for the computation channel Output relay On Off for the computation
350. r 250 ms or longer Snapshot saves the current screen image data to the external storage medium 24 VDC Power Supply for Transmitter TPS4 or TPS8 Number of loops 4 TPS4 or 8 TPS8 Output voltage 22 8 to 25 2 VDC under rated output current Rated output current 4 to 20 mADC Maximum output current 25 mADC overcurrent protection operation current approximately 68 mADC Allowable cable resistance RL lt 17 8 minimum operation voltage of transmitter 0 02 A where 17 8 V 22 8V 5V 22 8 V Minimum output voltage 5 V Maximum voltage across the load resistor 250 Q Maximum length of cable 2 km when using CEV cable Insulation resistance 20 MQ or more 500 VDC between output terminal and ground terminal Withstand voltage 500 VAC 50 60 Hz 10 mA for one minute between output terminal and ground terminal 500 VAC 50 60 Hz 10 mA for one minute between output terminals 14 14 IM 04L02A01 01E 14 7 General Specifications Construction Mounting Flush panel mounting on a vertical plane Mounting may be inclined backward up to 30 degrees from a horizontal plane Allowable Panel Thickness Material Case Color Front Panel Dimensions Weight Standard Performance 2 to 26 mm Case drawn steel Bezel polycarbonate Case Grayish blue green Munsell 2 0B 5 0 1 7 or equivalent Bezel Charcoal grey light Munsell 10B 3 6 0 3 or equivalent Water and dust proof based on IEC52
351. r 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Displayed Color Red Green Blue Blue violet Brown Orange Yellow green Light blue 7 6 IM 04L02A01 01E 7 5 Setting the Message String Trend Procedure These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press mw To display the setting screen press the soft key 3 Message No 1 on Ulm amp Characters The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure Characters Move the cursor to the desired message number Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter the message string Enter the message string up to 16 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Character on page 3 22 Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key IM 04L02A01 01E
352. r wait state data are overwritten to the next block Press the STOP key to terminate data acquisition First block Second block Last block Data acquisition Data acquisition Data acquisition N i ZN i UN Trigger wait Trigger wait Trigger wait PEA Trigger activated gt Trigger activated S gt Trigger activated Note The event data in the internal memory can be confirmed with the memory summary Section 4 5 When a power failure occurs the event data file in the internal memory is closed as one file Pretrigger for the event data Pretrigger is applied to the event data with Trigger or Rotate modes You can have event data before the trigger point be stored It is specified in terms of a percentage of the data length 0 5 25 50 75 95 100 If 0 is selected all data are after the trigger point The initial setting is 0 Trigger type for the event data When Trigger or Rotate is selected the trigger type is selected by turning each type of trigger ON OFF The triggers operate in an OR fashion the trigger is activated when any of the conditions that are turned ON are satisfied Type Description Key trigger The trigger condition is satisfied when the FUNC Trigger soft key or the USER key only when the trigger function is assigned to the USER key is pressed External trigger The trigger condition is satisfied when the external contact specified
353. r wires or TC extension wires elol lole Power supply terminals miie H T hermocouple z aac DC voltage standard WIES wires Se S Input terminals 0 C standard temperature device O lonon oy He E EEE GEE Hilo Reference Junction Compensation for the Thermocouple Input As the measurement terminal of the DX200 is generally at room temperature the actual output of the thermocouple is different from the values given on the thermoelectromotive force table based on 0 C The DX200 measures the temperature of the terminal and makes adjustments by calculation Therefore when the measurement terminals are shorted equivalent to 0 C at the detector tip the temperature at the measurement terminal is displayed When calibrating the DX200 this compensation voltage thermoelectromotive force of 0 C reference corresponding to the input terminal temperature must be subtracted from the output of the standard generator before application As shown in the figure by using the 0 C standard temperature device to compensate the reference junction at 0 C you can input the thermoelectromotive force of 0 C reference from the DC voltage standa
354. rd and make the calibration 13 4 IM 04L02A01 01E 13 4 Recommended Replacement Periods for Worn Parts To maintain the reliability of the DX200 and to use it in good working order for a long time we recommend periodic replacement of worn parts as preventive maintenance The replacement parts may change to accommodate preventive maintenance over extended time Be sure to check with your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer The recommended replacement periods for worn parts are shown in the following table The replacement periods apply when the DX200 is operated under standard operating conditions Please consider the actual operating conditions when determining the actual replacement periods for your DX200 The replacement of the worn parts except the fuse must be conducted by a qualified YOKOGAWA personnel Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer to have the LCD replaced Item Replacement Part Name Part Number Specifications Quantity Period Used Fuse 2 years FUSE A1423EF 250 V 1 25 A time lag 1 except for P1 model 2 years FUSE A1463EF 250 V 6 3 A time lag 1 for P1 model LCD 5 years Back light module 1 Battery 10 years Lithium battery 1 Rubber strip 5 years Dust and water proof for front panel for front 1 each rubber strip cover Floppy disk 5 years 1 drive Zip drive 5 years 1 PWB 5 years Power Assy 1 assembly 5 years Sub Power Assy 1 5 years AD Assy Up to models Note Replacement Period at
355. rd may vary included only when the suffix code for the external storage medium is 3 vi IM 04L02A01 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Number Part Name Part Number Model Q ty Notes 9 Power cord A1006WD 1 Provided only when H5D is specified for the optional code Maximum rated power voltage 125 V A1009WD 1 Provided only when H5F is specified for the optional code Maximum rated power voltage 250 V A1024WD 1 Provided only when H5R is specified for the optional code Maximum rated power voltage 250 V A1023WD 1 Provided only when H5J is specified for the optional code Maximum rated power voltage 250 V A1064WD 1 Provided only when H5H is specified for the power supply code complies with CCC Maximum rated power voltage 250 V 10 Clamp filter A1179MN 1 Provided only when CF1 is specified for the optional code Optional Accessories Sold Separately The following optional accessories are available for purchase separately If you make an order make sure that all items are present and undamaged For information about ordering accessories contact the dealer from which you purchased the DX200 Number Part Name Part Number Model Q ty Notes 1 3 5 floppy disk 7059 00 10 2HD 2 Zip disk A1053MP 1 100 MB A1056MP 1 250 MB 3 ATA flash memory card B9968NL 1 32 MB card CF card adapter capacity and model of the CF card may vary please b
356. re carried out in the basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press ew Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears To display the setting screen press the soft key 8 ol Time zone Difference from GHT 1 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 GMT Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter the time difference Enter the value 1200 to 1200 upper two digits hours lower two digits minutes and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 Example If the local time leads 9 hours to GMT set 900 Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key IM 04L02A01 01E 10 25 suonouny 19410 2 Chapter 11 Computation Report Function Option 11 1 Overview of the Computation Function Equations can be written to computation chan
357. re computation errors or Blank Sum value computation overflow When the sum value exceeds 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 When the sum value is below 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 IM 04L02A01 01E App 13 xipueddy Ea Appendix 3 The Relationship between Style Numbers and Functions The following table shows the relationship between the style numbers and the functions that have been added or changed Functions that have been added on style number S2 Batch function BT1 option VGA output D5 Cramped input terminal H2 option Desk top type with screw type power terminal H5 option Cu10 and Cu25 RTD input three wire isolated RTD input N1 option 24 V DC AC power supply P1 option Delay upper lower limit alarm Automatic switching function of displayed groups Function to turn ON OFF the numerical display section on trend screen Memory information on historical trend display Historical trend display of event data Function used to store the data to the external storage medium using key operation during auto save mode German and French as displayed language System screen Conformity to Water and Dust Proof Specification NEMA NO 250 TYPE4 Certified by UL3111 1 CSA NRTL C Function s that has been added on style number S4 24 VDC power supply for transmitter TPS4 or TPS8 Fieldbus communication interface CF1 Web server function E mail transmission function Modbus master
358. re of the power supply is the same as that for the panel mount type 2 20 IM 04L02A01 01E Chapter 3 Names of Parts Run Mode Common Operations 3 1 Names of Parts and Functions Front Panel knob 4 5 Key panel cover knob 12 2 3 6 Front cover 810 119 13 LCD screen Displays various operation screens such as the trend display and the setup screen to configure the DX200 Label A label used to distinguish the channels The user can write on this label and use it as a reference Operation key Left right up and down arrow keys and the DISP ENTER key The keys are used to switch the operation screen in the operation mode In the setup screens the keys are used to select parameters and to confirm the new settings Key panel cover Open this cover to access the keys besides the arrow keys and the DISP ENTER key Open the cover by pulling the tab on the upper left corner of the cover toward you Toe Front cover Open the front cover when turning ON OFF the DX200 or inserting or removing the external storage medium such as the floppy disk Open the cover by pushing down on the tab located at the center of the top edge of the cover and pulling it forward Keep the cover closed at all times except when accessing the power switch and the external storage medium IM 04L02A01
359. rectories on the external storage medium in the basic setting mode Procedure Deletes files and directories on the external storage medium The function is the same as that in the setting mode These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate position Press w Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears Press soft key to display the Save Load Initialize menu screen Press soft key to display the Delete screen r Delete Directory name File name Time 16168898 DHR 2008 01 01 68 89 B AGB 16168898 DDS 2008 01 01 68 89 10100166 DHR 2000 01 01 00 16 10100166 DDS 2000 01 01 00 16 10188346 DDS 2000 01 01 80 34 10100340 DEV 2606 01 01 00 34 10100536 DHR 2000 01 01 80 53 10188438 DDS 2000 01 01 80 54 10100430 DEV 2600 01 01 00 54 10100466 DHR 2000 01 01 00 40 10188358 DDS 2000 01 81 80 40 10180536 DEV 2600 01 01 80 54 10100546 DHR 2000 01 01 00 54 10100540 DDS 2000 01 01 00 54 10100540 DEV 2000 01 81 00 54 10168566 DHR 2000 01 81 80 56 Deleting files and directories can be executed in the same procedure as that in the setting mode See page 9 9 Formatting the external storage medium in the basic setting mode Procedure Formats the external storage medium The function is the same as that in the setting mode These procedures are carried out in t
360. rend Displaying the memory information 1 5 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu TREND HISTORY is selected Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key Select INFORMATION ON using the up and down arrow keys l Fer INFORMATION ON Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the window with the memory information For models with the batch function BT1 batch number and lot number information of the display event data displayed as a historical trend is also displayed To clear the window press the DISP ENTER key or one of the arrow keys 4 24 IM 04L02A01 01E 4 7 Using the 4 Screen Display Operation Flow Diagram 5 The initial setting is as follows Display Name Screens Shown MIX Trend group 1 digital group 1 bar graph group 1 and overview ALL TREND All trend screens groups 1 through 4 ALL DIGITAL All digital screens groups 1 through 4 ALL BAR All bar graph screens groups 1 through 4 A name can be assigned to the screen For the operating procedure see section 7 15 Screen menu Sub menu 4 PANNEL display Screen menu Sub menu A A A A gt Vv di Selection of screens Selection of screens to be assigned EXPAND Screen menu Procedure EXP
361. rical value Ethemet Subnet mask Default gateway DNS On Off On Off o Server search order Primary Numerical value Secondary Host name Character string Domain name Domain suffix search order Primary Character string Secondary Communication Baud rate 1200 4800 Serial Data length Parity RS 232 RS 422 _ Address 485 Protocol Memory out FTP transfer Disp amp Event data ue Report FTP connection Secondary FTP server name Character string Port number 21 Numerical value Login name Character string Password Account PASV mode On Off o Initial pass Character string Ethernet login Use Not Level On Off User name Character string Password Application On oft o emai Time 1 to 120 min Numerical value Keep alive Off App 6 IM 04L02A01 01E Appendix 1 Parameters and Initial Settings Parameters Menu Notes Web Use Not Use Not Page type Operator Monitor On Off On Off Command On Off for operator page only Access control On Off User name Charactor string Password Basic E Mail SMTP server name Charactor string settings Port number ss Numerical value Recipient 1 Charactor string Recipient 2 Sender Alarm E Mail Recipient 1 settings Recipient 2 Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Alarm 3 Alarm 4 Include INST Include source URL Subject Header 1 Header 2 Scheduled Recipient 1 E Mail Interval settings Char
362. ried out on the Alarm Summary screen 1 Select the alarm of which to display the historical trend using the up and down arrow keys 828 128 Channel Type Alarm IN Time Alarm OUT Time TAG 83 21 Jan 1 2088 82 39 31 TAG 83 21 Jan 1 2008 82 39 08 Jan 1 2008 82 39 28 TAG 83 21 Jan 1 2088 82 38 21 Jan 1 2008 82 38 46 TAG 83 21 Jan 1 2008 82 37 58 Jan 1 2008 82 38 18 Selected alarm m TAG 83 21 Jan 1 2008 82 37 19 Jan 1 2008 82 37 39 TAG 83 21 Jan 1 2088 82 36 48 Jan 1 2088 62 37 88 TAG 83 21 Jan 1 2008 82 36 17 Jan 1 2008 82 36 37 TAG 83 21 Jan 1 2088 82 35 46 Jan 1 2008 82 36 06 2 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu 3 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key 4 Select JUMP TO HISTORY using the up and down arrow keys iza INFOR EE MATION gt fain a JUMP TO HISTORY Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the historical trend The displayed data type is as follows When configured to acquire only the display data to the internal memory Display data When configured to acquire only the event data to the internal memory Event data When configured to acquire the display data and the event data to the internal memory Data type selected in the memory summary see page 4 17 To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key IM 04L02A01 01E 4 15 su 19 5 uodo Buly
363. rm ACK Alarm point mark Green Measured value Blue Alarm indication in the overview display Tag Channel no Channel data display area Alarm type Measured value Indicator Hold Non Hold Alarm Alarm Indication Non hold Activated Channel display area Red Channel tag alarm type and measured values All white Released Channel display area Green Channel tag and measured value Black Alarm type Not displayed Hold Activated Channel display area Red Channel tag Blinks in white Stops blinking with alarm ACK Alarm type and measured value White Released Channel display area Green Channel tag Blinks in black Stops blinking with alarm ACK Alarm type Not displayed Measured value Black IM 04L02A01 01E 6 3 suuejy Buras pue Guibpea mouyoy el 6 1 Releasing the Alarm Indication and Output Relay Option Alarm Summary Display 826 128 Channel Type Alarm IN Time Alarm OUT Time TAG a3 21 Jan 1 2688 82 39 31 TAG 83 21 Jan 1 2808 82 39 08 Jan 1 2008 82 39 28 TAG 83 21 Jan 1 2088 62 38 21 Jan 1 2088 02 38 46 TAG 83 21 Jan 1 2888 82 37 58 Jan 1 2008 82 38 18 m TAG 03 21 Jan 1 2888 82 37 19 Jan 1 2008 82 37 39 TAG 83 21 Jan 1 2088 02 36 48 Jan 1 2088 62 37 88 Mark Alarm info Indicator Hold Non Hold Alarm Alarm Indication Non
364. rol unit Damage to the protection Using the instrument in a manner not specified in this manual can damage the instrument s protection CAUTION This instrument is a Class A product Operation of this instrument in a residential area maycause radio interference in which case the user is required to take appropriate measures tocorrect the interference iv IM 04L02A01 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Unpack the box and check the contents before operating the DX200 If some of the contents not correct or missing or if there is physical damage contact the dealer from which you purchased them DX200 Main Unit There is a name plate on the back side of the key panel cover Open the cover and check that the model name and suffix code given on the name plate match those on the order AX WARNING Do not remove the cover Repair by trained personnel only ma STYLE SUFFIX NO MODEL Model code __ Suffix code Optional code Description DAQSTATION DX200 4 ch DX208 DAQSTATION DX200 8 ch DX210 DAQSTATION DX200 10 ch DX220 DAQSTATION DX200 20 ch DAQSTATION DX200 30
365. rom the display position 1 Example 2 When the channels were assigned to a group in the following order 01 02 03 05 and the scale display position for channels 1 2 3 and 5 are set to positions 1 3 6 and 10 respectively The scales for the channels are actually displayed at positions 1 2 3 and 4 respectively If the scale display position is set to Off the scale is not displayed Scale marks The scale can be divided into 4 to 12 sections using the main scale marks The area between the main scale marks is divided further into 10 sections using small and medium marks However small marks are not displayed for the following cases When the measurement computation range resolution is smaller than the total number of sections created by small marks When zone display is used When partial expanded display is used Scale values The scale values are displayed at all main scale marks when the scale is divided into 4 to 7 sections using the main scale marks When the scale is divided into 8 to 12 sections the scale values are displayed at every other main scale mark In addition the upper or lower limit of the scale is displayed at the end of the scale Rule 1 Up to 3 digits excluding the minus sign can be displayed for the scale values 7 18 IM 04L02A01 01E 7 10 Setting the Scale Division Bar Graph Base Position Bar Graph and Scale Position Trend Bar base position Rule 2 If the integer sectio
366. rrangement Standard Input Terminals CH4 CH2 CH3 CH1 QOS 2888 J800 CH8 CH6 CH7 _CH5 a888 28808 IAB Wiring Diagram DC Voltage and DI Input DC voltage input B g n Resistance Temperature Detector Input Leadwire resistance 10 Q max wire The resistance of the three wires should be approximately equal Clamped Input Terminals H2 CH3 CH1 ap ae b ol af A E 5 B CH4 CH2 CH7 CH5 D a b A B M si CH8 CH Thermocouple Input AA Extension leadwire YY DC Current Input DC current input Shunt resistor NOTE For a 4 to 20 mA input use a shunt resistor of 250 0 1 IM 04L02A01 01E oozxa y Buisp ai0ojag s 2 3 Input Signal Wiring DX210 DX220 DX230 Input Terminal Position CH1 to CH10 CH11 to CH20 DX220 DX230 CH21 to CH30 DX230 Terminal Arrangement Standard Input Terminals CH10 CH8 CH6 CH4 CH2 CH9 _CH7 CHS _CH3 CH1 CH20 CH18 CH16 CH14 CH12 CH19 CH17 CH15 CH13 CH11 CH30 CH28 CH
367. rrrsrnrrerrere 9 6 Viewing Event Data in the External Storage Medium ceccceeeeeereceteeeeeeeeteettaeeeeeeeaes 9 7 Managing files Displaying free space on the external storage medium eerste 9 8 Saving the Screen IMage ccc eeeeeeeeeeeeceeeee cee ceases seas see seee see eeeesneeseneseeseeesaeeaes 9 13 Clearing Data from the Internal Memory cccceeceececcteeenee eee eeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeaeseeeeesaeeeeeeeaes 9 14 Initializing Setup Data si ccavitiiaee denen isinadiniiih ainda 9 15 Chapter 10 Other Functions 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 10 10 10 11 10 12 10 13 10 14 10 15 10 16 USER Key sec Mactan stags hate aaa a a a a a a et 10 1 Assigning an Action to the USER Key eeecccceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeaeecneeeseeeeeeeneeseaeeneeeeaa 10 2 Using Key LOCK on pete bee edie ell oe Mad i 10 3 Setting the Key Lock Function Basic Setting Mode ceccesseeeceeteeeeeeeeeeeeteeteeeeeaes 10 4 Using the Key Login Logout Function 0 0 0 cic eeeeseeeeeeeee entre eeenaeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeaeeesneeeeeneeeeeaa 10 6 Setting the Key Login Logout Functions Basic Setting Mode cccesceeeceeteeeeeeeees 10 8 Displaying the Log Screen SysteM Screen ceceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneesnaeseeeeenas 10 10 Setting the Memory Alarm Time F1 Option Provides an Relay Output Basic Setting Mode victiateie itive et ee de te eet 10 12 Setting the Remote Control Functions
368. rs for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key Confirming the settings 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER key confirms the new settings The parameter boxes return to a white color The cursor moves to the first parameter on the page Returning to the menu screen of the setting mode 1 Press the Menu or ESC key to return to the menu screen of the setting mode Saving the settings and returning to the operation mode 1 Press the MENU or the ESC key to save the settings and return to the operation mode The operation to enter numbers is used such as when setting the date time or the display span of the input range Window for entering numbers Range Alarm First CH Last CH Jer ja Range Span Node Range Lower Ur Volt E J2 600 When the window used to enter the numbers appears enter the value according to the following key operations Left and right arrow keys Selects the input position Character number input key Enters the number The following soft keys appear when appropriate Space soft key Enters a space or overwrites with a space IM 04L02A01 01E 3 21 suoleiodg uowWOD epoyy UNy SHed JO SoWeN el 3 6 Common Key Operations Explanation Character number input key You can enter numbers a decimal point and a minus sign lac 20 Saw 4a 5mo 6ra Zsu 8m 9x 0 ws minus si
369. rtical For the operating procedure see section 4 6 Historical trend display data only Current trend Current trend information 0 684 IM 04L02A01 01E SUOI OUNZ JO MAIAJBAQ a 1 3 Display Function Setting Screen The various functions of the DX200 are configured using the setting mode or the basic setting mode Setting Mode Screen This screen is used to set the input range filter moving average alarm group channel display color etc For details see section 3 5 Setting screen example for the setting mode First CH Last CH ar Jot f Range Span Hode Range Lower Upper Cursor position Ma 2 a oa f 1 000 blue Alarm Relay Type Value On Off Number 1 o TH 0 008 fon fia 2 Off 3 Off 4 Off Skip Volt TC RTD Scale Parameter selections selected using the soft keys Basic Setting Mode Screen This screen is used to configure the basic specifications of the various functions such as burnout reference junction compensation A D integration time and the method used to acquire data to the internal memory For details see section 3 5 Setting screen example for the basic setting mode Alarm AD Ref lash Off Integrate Auto Relay Scan interval is had J Mone First CH Last CH Action Energize far rar Behavior Nonhold _ Indicator Nonhold Burnout set Off Rate of change External ras m Yolt uy ro Pa
370. ry box used to enter the equation is displayed and the alarm setting boxes are activated white color Set the alarm after setting the equation When computation is turned On Off or when equations and span settings are changed the alarm setting for that channel is turned OFF These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press ew Press the soft key Next 1 2 To display the setting screen press the soft key 7 1 First CH 31 Last CH 31 r Nath range Nath On Off On Span Calculation expression Lower Upper Unit far 2 00 200 00 Nath alarn Relay Type Value On Off Number im Ju aaa On Ier The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels For the channels set here the Math range is also simultaneously set 2 On Off Turn the alarm On enabled Items 3 4 and 5 are displayed On Use alarm Off Do not use alarm IM 04L02A01 01E 11 13 uodo uolouny Wodsey uolneyndwoy Ey 11 5 Setting the Al
371. s displayed color message 0 cece cece este eeeeeeteeeteeeeeeeee displayed color trend displayed color trip line s displayed data of the waveform essisesserererrrerereeen 1 7 displayed data type historical trend 0 0 4 15 4 16 displayed information c ccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeteeeeeeaes 10 20 displayed language dividing report files DMN n eee beer aa RTs DMR aiia a a eh Gah a a aaea aa aaa aeiy DYRE ith ce E E E S aaa DAA S EA AE EE E A A TATAE t cata e mail transmission function ICON sseeeceeeeeeerereeee 4 4 eject UttOM syin en ra esi 3 2 energize de energize alarm output relay 0 0 6 12 entering characters 7 entering NUMDeETrS 0 00 2 cece eeeese cette ates ceeaeeeseeeeesaeeeeenaeeees rror MESSAGES orisii rani toa Ta TRAE E 12 1 ESG KO e ae EE E naan 3 2 Ethernet poft sciinte eare n e iaia 3 3 event data expanding the time AXiS 0 2 0 0 eeen nenene 4 22 OXDONGM REE A TT 11 1 OXTONSION o oo cece cee ce eect ce eeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeeseaeeeeeeaeeeteeaeeetseaeeete 8 2 external storage media handling external storage medium condition we hed external trigger srs scenedeedtenet cadet innate ioe 8 5 external trigger for event data remote control 10 14 E MIMI Fahrenheitas ninr Ei iS 10 24 FAIL memory end output EDISK A veh esac iit Sel a ee ae ees file format file header file MAME oe ceececc cee ceeseeseceeecee
372. s 8 3 8 3 Function to Acquire Other Data c ceececccceeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeecaeeseeeeeeestaeeeneessaeeseaeenaes 8 9 8 4 Function that Saves the Data in the Internal Memory to the External Storage Medium 8 10 8 5 Acquiring Display Data ic eiren er Aidt en die lia 8 12 8 6 ACquIning Event Data prne a aaa e Ea a detent nats 8 13 8 7 Saving the Data in the Internal Memory to the External Storage Medium 008 8 15 8 8 Setting the Auto Save Interval for the Display Data ecceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeenaeees 8 18 8 9 Setting the File Header Directory Name and the Saved Data during Manual Save 8 20 8 10 Setting the Channels to Display the Trend and Acquire the Data Basic Setting Mode 8 22 8 11 Setting the Method of the Display Event Data Acquisition Basic Setting Mode 8 23 8 12 Specifying the Date Time When Data Is To Be Saved to the External Storage Medium Basic Setting MOde 2 isitere adaisipeaaca ae a E a cae ees ne 8 26 8 13 Storing Measured Computed Data at Arbitrary Times Manual Sampling 8 28 IM 04L02A01 01E xi Contents Chapter 9 Managing Files and Initializing Data 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 9 6 9 7 9 8 Saving loading setup data iisi naa a e a ee aaa eoa e a e EE oa 9 1 Saving data in the internal memory to the external storage medium using key operation 9 5 Viewing Display Data in the External Storage Medium ssesesssresrsrersrrsrrrrnsr
373. s in progress Wait till the formatting ends 155 The message is not written while sampling is stopped See sections 8 5 and 8 6 160 Cannot load the specified data Change the memory setting See sections 4 5 9 3 and 9 4 Operation Errors Errors related to external storage medium Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref section 200 Operation aborted because an error was found in media See Communication Interface User s Manual 201 Not enough free space on media Use another storage medium 202 Media is read only Release the write protection 210 Media has not been inserted Insert a storage medium into the drive 211 Media is damaged or not formatted Use another storage medium or carry out formatting 212 Format error Try formatting again or use another storage medium 213 The file is read only Access to other files or make the file write enable 214 There is no file or directory See Communication Interface User s Manual 215 Exceeded the allowable number of files Delete files or change storage medium 216 The file or directory name is incorrect See sections 8 9 and 9 1 217 Unknown file type Access to other files 218 Directory exists Delete the directory or change directory name See section 8 9 219 Invalid file or directory operation Cannot handle files and directories in the 2nd and deeper layers 220 The file is already in use Try again later Wait til
374. s the DISP ENTER key Grid on the waveform display area Grid The number of grid is 10 in this example vd f Jif Hy j j j H f J i A 00 19 N 00 16 ASAE 4 w 8 13 HESSAGE S ff j j j E A E E R A O TA TAA Dfocheccboctocdesots Ji 7 24 IM 04L02A01 01E 7 14 Setting the Brightness of the Screen and the Backlight Saver Function Procedure There are four screen brightness settings which can be selected 1 2 3 or 4 The lifetime of the LCD backlight can be extended by automatically dimming the light when there has been no key operation for a certain amount of time The screen will return to the original brightness with a key operation or an alarm occurrence The screen saver is initially disabled Note The degradation of the brightness and the discoloration of the screen become yellowish tend to progress faster as the brightness is set higher Extended use at an unnecessary high setting should be avoided It is also recommended that the backlight saver be used These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming th
375. s the set range Jan 11 2088 04 15 28 BAS The input numerical value exceeds the set range Jan 11 2088 83 23 19 681 Measured data have been initialized The total number of inputs on the DX200 the capacity of the internal memory the communication functions the external storage drive the options the MAC address and the firmware version number can be displayed For the operating procedure see section 10 7 Number of measurement channels Number of computation channels ANALOG 3A HATH 30 MEMORY 1200088 _ _ ______________________ internal memory capacity OPTION RS 232 Communication function ETHERNET FDD External storage medium drive ALARN 6 6 6 6 BATCH Optional functions PRODUCT HAC address 00 00 64 80 B0 00 MAC address Version 4 81 Graphic 4 61 Firmware version number When the cramped input terminal is equipped H2 option C is indicated as ANALOG 30 C in this example 1 30 IM 04L02A01 01E 1 8 Other Functions Displayed Language The displayed language can be set to English Japanese German or French For the setting procedure see section 10 10 FAIL Memory End Output F1 option Operation at System Failure This function activates the relay output when the CPU fails The relay is de energized on CPU failure The relay is de energized if the CPU fails This relay action cannot be reversed to energized on failure
376. sely the DX200 can operate as an FTP server The DX200 can be accessed from a PC and the data in the external storage medium can be retrieved for storage For these functions see the DX100 DX200 Communication Interface User s Manual IM 04L02A01 17E IM 04L02A01 01E 1 21 suoloUN JO MAIAJ9AQ 5 1 5 Alarm Function This function generates an alarm when the measured computed data meets a certain condition When an alarm occurs information notifying the alarm occurrence is displayed on the screen In addition a signal can be output from the relay output terminals on the rear panel of the DX200 only on models with the optional alarm output relay function AR1 AR2 A3 A4 or A5 Alarm Indication The alarm conditions are displayed as alarm icons in the status display section and through the trend digital bar graph overview and other displays The detailed information about the alarms is displayed in the alarm summary There are two methods in displaying alarms One method is to clear the alarm display when the cause of the alarm is no longer met non hold display The other method is to display the alarm until the alarm is confirmed hold display Alarm Indication Example Overview display and alarm summary display Measured computed value Cursor The area corresponding to a channel on which an alarm is occurring is displayed in red Alarm mark 1 854 1 980 TAG 04 TAG 14 TAG A TAG
377. serted into the drive All Save all the data residing in the memory when the medium is inserted into the drive Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key IM 04L02A01 01E 8 21 winipa y eaHbe10jg jeus9 xq 0 Burnes pue uoljsinboy eead el 8 10 Setting the Channels to Display the Trend and Acquire the Data Basic Setting Mode Procedure Explanation Specify the channel for which the display or event data are to be acquired to the internal memory The waveforms of the specified channels can be displayed on the trend display The waveforms for the channels that are turned OFF are not displayed but numerical values bar graphs and alarms are displayed These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press mew Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears To display the setting screen press the soft key Oox Henory and Trend Neas CH Math CH ME i1 2 f j First CH Last CH al
378. sic Setting Mode Acquiring only the event data 2 Note Data Select Event Boxes used to set the method for event data acquisition are displayed Event Sample rate This is the sampling interval for the event data You cannot specify a sampling interval that is faster than the scan interval DX204 DX208 125 ms 250 ms 500 ms 1 s 2s 5 s 10s 30 s 60 s 120 s 300 s and 600 s DX210 DX220 DX230 1 s 2s 5s 10 s 30 s 60 s 120 s 300 s and 600 s Event Mode Select from Free Trigger or Rotate If Free is selected item 6 is displayed If Trigger or Rotate is selected items 5 6 7 and 8 are displayed Event Block The event data storage area in the internal memory is divided by the specified number Select 1 2 4 8 or 16 Select 1 2 or 4 when acquiring display and event data Event Data length The size of the event data file is expressed as a length of time over which data are acquired The data length that can be specified varies depending on the sampling interval sample rate in item 3 number of blocks and the number of measurement and computation channels that are acquired Event Pre Trigger This is the range of data to be acquired before the trigger point Itis specified as a percentage of the data length 0 5 25 50 75 95 and 100 If 0 is selected all data after the trigger point are acquired Event Trigger Key When using
379. sieeseeeeaes 14 5 14 4 Alarm Function Specifications 0 0 ccc cecceece ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeseeeescaeeeeeeeneesiaeeeeeensas 14 9 14 5 Specifications of Communication Functions eecceeeeee cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteettaeeeeeeeea 14 10 14 6 Specifications of Optional FUNCTIONS 00 cece este eeeeeeeeeteteeeeeeeeeetaeeeeeeeeneeeeaeeeneeeaa 14 11 14 7 General Specifications cece eeceeeeeeeeeeeee eens esas entre eae seeee eee eaaeeneeeeieeeeeeenieeeeaeeeneeeea 14 15 14 8 Dimensional Drawings pssi iinit neiii psenice ee eeneeeeseeeeesaeeeseeeeeesaeeeeeaeeseenaeesnneeegs 14 20 Appendix Appendix 1 Parameters and Initial Settings ee ec eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeaeeeaeesneeetaseeeeetaes App 1 Appendix 2 Data Formats of ASCII Files 0 ee ceeccceceeeeeeeee cece eeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeenieesiaeeneeenias App 9 Appendix 3 The Relationship between Style Numbers and Functions c cecceesseeeereeees App 14 Index IM 04L02A01 01E xiii Chapter 1 Overview of Functions 1 1 Overview of the DX200 Unlike conventional recorders that record data on charts the DX200 displays the measured data acquired in the internal memory to a LCD in the form of waveforms numerical values and bar graphs The measured data can also be saved to external storage media such as floppy disks Zip disks and ATA flash memory cards DX200 External storage media S Floppy disk lt I Zip disk
380. ss than 60 minutes minutes unit less than one minute is rounded off n 16 The maximum number of display data files that can be written to the internal memory is 16 see section 8 2 16 represents this value n represents the number of files in the internal memory Note The display data are overwritten for the following cases Be aware of these cases because data that are overwritten are lost When the display data storage area in the internal memory becomes full In such case Overwrite is displayed in the status display section When the number of files that remains to be saved to the external medium exceeds 16 6 The usage condition of the event data storage area in the internal memory This is displayed when event data acquisition is enabled When the trigger mode is set to Free see section 8 2 Bar graph Displays the used space of the event data storage area Time period The remaining time for acquiring the event data When the remaining time is less than one hour the time is displayed in units of minutes For the detail of the displayed unit see Time period in item 5 above n 16 The maximum number of event data files that can be written to the internal memory is 16 see section 8 2 16 represents this value n represents the number of files in the internal memory Note The event data are overwritten for the following cases Be aware of these cases because data that are overwrit
381. ssing the DISP ENTER key saves the new settings and returns to the operation mode If you do not wish to save the new settings select No with the arrow key and press the DISP ENTER key to return to the operation mode Selecting Cancel with the arrow key and pressing the DISP ENTER key cancels the operation to exit the basic setting mode and returns to the basic setting mode menu In this case the setting changes made up to that point are held Key operations in the setting mode Procedure Entering the setting mode 1 Press the MENU key to enter the setting mode 2 Press the soft key to enter individual setting screens First CH Last CH far Jar Cursor position blue Range Node Range Ea Span Lower 8 000 Upper 1 008 Al Relay On Off Number Type Value 1 fm JH Jf oa o Jia 2 Off 3 Off 4 Off Skip Volt TC RTD Scale Delta Next 1 2 Setting selections selected using the soft keys 3 20 IM 04L02A01 01E 3 6 Common Key Operations Entering Numbers Procedure Selecting the parameter 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The available selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen above the soft keys 2 Select the parameter with the soft key The box containing the parameter that was changed turns yellow The cursor moves to the next parameter To cancel the settings press the ESC key A window appea
382. storage medium The function is the same as that in the basic setting mode Procedure These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate position Press Press 5 soft key to display the Save Load Clear data menu screen He Press 7 soft key to display the Delete screen r Delete Directory name File name Time 16188898 DHR 2008 01 81 60 09 16188898 DDS 2008 01 81 60 09 16168168 DHR 2088 01 01 88 16 16186188 DDS 2008 01 81 60 16 16186348 DDS 2000 01 01 68 34 16168340 DEY 2000 01 81 88 34 16188538 DHR 2000 01 01 68 53 16188438 DDS 2008 01 81 68 54 16188438 DEY 2008 01 01 88 54 16186488 DHR 2000 01 01 66 40 16186358 DDS 2008 01 81 68 48 16168538 DEY 2000 01 81 88 54 16180548 DHR 2000 01 01 68 54 16168548 DDS 2000 01 81 88 54 16168548 DEY 2000 01 81 88 54 16188568 DHR 2000 01 01 68 56 Deleting a file in a directory 1 Of the directories listed in the Directory name column select the directory in which the file you wish to delete exists using the up and down arrow keys The File name column displays a list of files in the selected directory is the root directory 2 Pressing the right arrow key moves the cursor onto the File name column Use the up and down arrow keys to select the file to be deleted 3 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays a confirmation dialog box 4 Use
383. switches 20 16 7 ms fixed to 20 ms on models that use the DC power supply 50 Hz fixed to 20 ms 60 Hz fixed to 16 7 ms 100 ms fixed to 100 ms the scan interval is 2 s Setting the scan interval 2 Scan interval Input signals are scanned at every scan interval For the models with computation function M1 the computation carried out at every scan interval DX204 DX208 125 ms 250 ms DX210 DX220 DX230 1 s 2 s when the A D integration time is 100 ms 2 s only Setting the thermocouple input burnout and setting the reference junction compensation This setting is void for all input settings other than the TC 3 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels IM 04L02A01 01E 5 15 sBunjes jouueyy juowoinseoyy eo 5 9 Setting the A D Integration Time Scan Interval Burnout and Reference Junction Compensation Basic Setting Mode Explanation 4 Burnout Select from Off Up and Down Off Disable the burnout function Up When the thermocouple burns out the measured result is set to positive over range xxxxx Down When the thermocouple burns out the measured result is set to negative over range xxxxx 5 RJC Set External or Internal External Use the external RJC Internal Use the RJC of the DX200 6 Volt uV If External is selected set the reference junction compensation voltage to add to the input Pressing the Input soft key or
384. t AND Logical product Syntax e1 ANDe2 Condition If both e1 and e2 are non 0 the operation results in 1 otherwise in 0 Status e1 0 e2 0 e1ANDe2 0 el 0 e2 0 e1ANDe2 0 e1 0 e2 0 e1ANDe2 0 e1 0 e2 0 e1ANDe2 1 IM 04L02A01 01E uondo uolouny pod y uoneyndwog Ey 11 2 Explanation of Computing Equations OR Logical sum Syntax e10Re2 Condition If both e1 and e2 are 0 the operation results in 0 otherwise in 1 Status e1 0 e2 0 e10Re2 0 e1 0 e2 0 e10Re2 1 e1 0 e2 0 e10Re2 1 e1 0 e2 0 e10Re2 1 XOR Mutually exclusive logical sum Syntax e1XORe2 Condition If e1 and e2 have different values the operation results in 1 otherwise in 0 Status e1 0 e2 0 e1XORe2 0 e1 0 e2 0 e1XORe2 1 e1 0 e2 0 e1XORe2 1 e1 0 e2 0 e1XORe2 0 NOT Logical negation Syntax NOTe1 Condition Reverses the value of data e1 Status e1 0 NOTe1 1 e1 0 NOTe1 0 EXAMPLE 01 020R03 GT 04 Determines the OR of the computed results of 01 02 and 03 GT 04 11 6 IM 04L02A01 01E 11 2 Explanation of Computing Equations TLOG Computation MAX MIN AVE SUM MAX MIN Only measured data and computed data can be used in the TLOG computation In the explanation below e1 is used to represent a measurement or computation channel You cannot specify an equation that contains a computing element inside e1 In addition o
385. t channel To display the setting screen press the soft key 2 Setting on a computation channel option Press the soft key Next 1 2 To display the setting screen press the soft key 8 1 1 First CH Last CH First CH Last CH EE Jar 31 E r Tag Tag Alarm Delay Tas E22 Tine 1s Hoving average TLOG Count Off Timer No 1 Sum scale Off r Alarm Delay J Time 18 s Rolling average On Off Off The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels For the channels set here other parameters shown in the above figure are also simultaneously set 2 Tag Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter the tag name Enter the tag name up to 16 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key IM 04L02A01 01E 7 1 Ae dsiq oy Buiyesodo pue Buras 7 2 Selecting Tag Display or Channel Number Display Basic Setting Mode Procedure Select whether tag
386. t key Switch the function of the character number input key between number input and computing element input Each time the 1 M soft key is pressed the function of the character number input key switches between number input and computing element input The selected function is displayed to the right of the soft key display section 1 Number is selected M Computing element is selected Note _ __ When using TLOG computation timers must be set in the basic setting mode and the number of the timer and the sum unit only for TLOG SUM must be set in the setting mode 4 Upper and lower limits of span Set the upper and lower limits of the display span Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter a value in the allowed range given below and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 Allowed range 9999999 to 99999999 The decimal can be set in the following positions UOUUE ODO Oo Oo ooo Note The upper and lower limits of span cannot be set to the same value 5 Unit Set the unit Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a character string Enter the unit up to 6 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings s
387. t set or FTP function is not available Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 280 Character String and Details HOSTADDR The DX s IP address has not been specified Check the IP address DORMANT Internal processing error LINK Data link is disconnected Check the cable connection 281 FTP mail box operation error Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 281 Character String and Details MAIL Internal processing error STATUS Internal processing error TIMEOUT Internal processing error PRIORITY Internal processing error NVRAM Internal processing error 282 FTP control connection error Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 282 Character String and Details HOSTNAME Failed the DNS lookup search the IP address corresponding to the host name Check the DNS setting and the destination host name TCPIP Internal processing error UNREACH Failed to connect to a control connection server Check the address setting and that the server is running OOBINLINE Internal processing error NAME Internal processing error CTRL The control connection does not exist Check that the server does not drop the connection and that it responds within the proper time period IAC Failed to respond in the TELNET sequence Check that the server does not drop th
388. t to the display reference position Display data The time axis can be expanded to twice the trend display It can also be reduced down to minimum 1 60th of the trend display Event data The time axis can be reduced down to minimum 1 60th The factor by which the display can be expanded or reduced at one time by carrying out the procedures below varies depending on the display update rate for the display data and the sampling interval for the event data being displayed To expand or reduce the display further repeat the procedures below 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu TREND HISTORY is selected 2 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key 3 Select ZOOM or ZOOM using the up and down arrow keys fiz TREND HISTORY ES 4 Pressing the DISP ENTER key expands or reduces the time axis To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key Scrolling the waveform Pressing the left or right arrow key horizontal display or the up or down arrow key vertical display while displaying the historical trend scrolls the waveform along the time axis Specifying the displayed position with the cursor The cursor position on the all data display locates the display reference position Enclosed in parentheses are for the vertical trend display 1 Pressing the up right arrow key displays the all data display in the upper right section
389. t use more than 16 stacks channel KO1 to K30 C01 to C30 D01 to D08 in one equation Otherwise a computation error may occur The computed result is set to positive overflow displayed as xxxxxx in this case Example The number of stacks in the equation 01 K01x 03 04xKO2 is five IM 04L02A01 01E uodo uolouny Wodsey uolneyndwoyg Ey 11 3 Using the Computation Function Operations related to the computation function are as follows Start stop computation This operation can be carried out with the START STOP key the FUNC key or the USER key when Math is assigned Reset computation data This operation can be carried out with the FUNC key or the USER key when Math rst is assigned Release the computation data dropout display This operation is carried out with the FUNC key Start stop computation Procedure Operation using the START STOP key Starting the computation also starts the data acquisition to the internal memory 1 Press the START key to start the computation At this point the data acquisition to the internal memory is also started When the computation is started a computation icon is displayed in the status display section For details related to the status display section see section 4 2 Stopping the computation also stops the data acquisition to the internal memory 1 Press the STOP key A confirmation window is displayed For models with the batch function BT1 option the b
390. ta file Sampling interval Sampling length 17 days ts 5s 10s 6 9h 34h 2days 26 days 30s 8 days 52 days 60s 17 days 480s approx 120s 34 days IM 04L02A01 01E 14 7 suoneoyiseds z 14 3 Data Storage Specifications In case measurement ch 30 ch mathematical ch 0 ch Display data file only approx Display rate min div 240 min Sampling interval s 480s Sampling length 5 6h 13 days 55 days Event data file only approx 5 6h 27h 2days 6 days 13 days 27 days Display data file Event data file Display data file approx Display rate ne min div 240 min Sampling interval s 480 s Sampling length 4 2 h 10 days 41 days Event data file approx Sampling interval 1s 5s 10s 30s 60s 120s Sampling length 14h 69h 13h 41h 3days 6 days Manual sampled data Trigger Key operation communication command or remote input signals R1 option Data format ASCII Max number of data sets internal memory can hold 50 TLOG data M1 option Trigger Timeout of the timer Data format Binary Max number of data sets or files internal memory can hold 400 data sets or 16 files number of START STOP operations Report data M1 option Types Hourly daily hourly daily daily monthly and daily weekly Data format ASCII Max number of report data internal memory can hold 40 Screen
391. ta in the internal memory Display from the alarm summary For the operating procedure see section 4 5 Display from the message summary For the operating procedure see section 4 5 Display from the memory summary For the operating procedure see section 4 5 Recall from the screen menu For the operating procedure see section 4 6 For methods used to display the historical trend of display data or event data in the external storage medium see section 9 3 and 9 4 Information Displayed on the Historical Trend The displayed information shown below is common to the historical trend of display data and event data For the operating procedure see section 4 6 Zoom factor of the time axis Time axis Tag Channel no Maximum and minimum The background color is the opposite value at the display reference position of the trend display black or white Maximum and minimum value over the entire display range TAG IL 551 2 608 0 584 2 000 C Unit TAG 82 0 034 2 000 0 069 2 008 L H TAG 83 8 483 2 000 8 449 2 000 cm TAG B4 8 969 2 008 1 6 938 2 000 A ny 5 388 H Screen switch display 1 714 2 000 1 696 2 008 y Display reference position the right end of the display range the position of the newest data being displayed Trip line Date and time at the display reference position Date and time at the display reference position 1 16 IM 04L02A01 01E
392. ta to other instruments up to 8 channels 1 MAO function block receive measured data and other data from other instruments and record or display the data up to 8 channels Link master function Others Computation function M1 is necessary The DX200 s screen can be displayed on a monitor via this terminal Only a VGA monitor or a multi synchronous monitor which is capable of displaying VGA can be used Resolution 640 by 480 dots VGA Connection D SUB 15 pin receptacle FAIL Memory End Output F1 The relay contact output on the rear panel informs of the occurrence of a system error Another relay contact output informs of the time until end of the internal memory space selectable from 1 2 5 10 20 50 or 100 hours before the data is overwritten or of the time when the remaining space on the external storage medium reaches to 10 of whole capacity Relay De energized on system error Energized on memory end Contact specification 250 VDC 0 1 A resistive load 250 VAC 50 60 Hz 3 A Clamped Input Terminal H2 Clamped input terminal is used for input terminal Desktop Type H5 Provides carrying handle Power cord is provided when H5D H5F H5R or H5u is specified H5 Screw type power terminal can only be specified when P1 is simultaneously specified Computation Functions M1 Can perform computation display the computed data assigned to channels in trends and numerical values and store comp
393. tal screen Direction Vertical or horizontal selectable Number of indication channels 10 channels per screen maximum Number of screens 4 screens 4 group Scales 4 to 12 divisions selectable Base position of bar Left right or center only for horizontal display Display update rate 1 s 2 s when the scan interval is 2 s Contents Bar graph numerical value unit scale alarm indication Number of indication channels 10 channels per screen maximum Number of screens 4 screens 4 group Display update rate 1 s 2 s when the scan interval is 2 s Contents Numerical value unit alarm indication Automatic display switching Overview screen Information screen Tags Historical trend screen 4 screen display Log display System screen Backlight saver function Display language Temperature unit The displayed group can be automatically changed on the trend digital and bar graph screens The display switching interval is selectable from 5 s 10 s 20 s 30 s and 1 min Number of indication channels Measured values and alarm status of all channels Alarm summary Displays the list of alarms Capable to switch to historical trend screen by cursor pointing Message summary Display the list of messages and time Capable to switch to historical trend screen by cursor pointing Memory summary Display the file list in internal memory Capable to switch to historical trend screen by cursor pointi
394. tarts stops the report function When the computation is stopped it is started with the START key IM 04L02A01 01E 8 13 winipayy eabe10jg jeus9 xq 0 Hulaes pue uoljsinboy eead el 8 6 Acquiring Event Data During Trigger mode or Rotate mode Start data acquisition 1 Press the START key to enter the trigger wait state The icon in the status display section will change accordingly A bar indicating the pretrigger data in the status display section is displayed in orange 2 When the trigger occurs data acquisition starts Providing the key trigger that starts the data acquisition to the internal memory This operation is carried out in the trigger wait state For all other cases this operation produces no effect For details related to triggers other than the key trigger see section sections 8 2 or 8 11 Operation using the FUNC key 1 Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu 2 Press the Trigger soft key to start the data acquisition of the event data to the internal memory Operation using the USER key This is an operation carried out only when the key trigger function is assigned to the USER key 1 Press the USER key to start the data acquisition of the event data to the internal memory Stop data acquisition Data acquisition stops upon reaching the specified time data length see section 8 11 In the status display section the block to which data were stored turns green See section 4 2
395. te min Measured computed values are updated every second However when the scan interval on the DX210 DX220 DX230 is 2 s the display update rate is also 2 s 1 6 IM 04L02A01 01E 1 3 Display Functi on Displayed Data The data displayed on the screen are a maximum and minimum values of the data that are sampled at the scan interval within the time period corresponding to one dot Displayed data of the waveform when the display update rate is set to one minute Tr min 1 division 30 dots A Maximum value Loe Minimum value 2 s 1 dot When the display update rate is set to one minute the time period corresponding to one dot the sampling interval of displayed data is 2 s The time period corresponding to one dot is called the sampling interval of displayed data The sampling interval of displayed data is determined by the display update interval The relationship between the display update rate and the sampling interval of displayed data is as follows Display Update 15s 30s 1min 2min 5min 10min 20min 30min 1h 2h 4h 10h Rate div Sampling interval 0 5 1 2 10 20 40 60 120 240 480 1200 of displayed data s for DX204 and DX208 only For the procedure related to setting the display update rate see section 7 3 Displayed Information The following Information can be displayed Information Description Al
396. ten are lost When the event data storage area in the internal memory becomes full In such case Overwrite is displayed in the status display section When the number of files that remains to be saved to the external medium exceeds 16 IM 04L02A01 01E 4 3 su 19 UO e19dQ BulyoyMsS 4 2 Using the Status Display Section When the trigger mode is set to Trigger or Rotate see section 8 2 Bar graph Displays the used space with respect to the specified memory length data length see section 8 11 When pretrigger is specified and the START key is pressed causing the DX200 to enter the trigger wait state data of size equal to the pretrigger amount are acquired to the internal memory The bar is displayed in orange After acquiring data of size equal to the pretrigger the length of the bar stays fixed However the relevant data are updated until the trigger is activated When the trigger is activated the bar turns green Data are acquired to the internal memory after the pretrigger data During the Trigger mode Full is displayed when data acquisition to all blocks is complete When Full is displayed event data are no longer acquired even if the trigger condition is met In this case save the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium Block display When the event data storage area is divided into multiple blocks the usage condition of the blocks are displayed White block N
397. tered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Company and product names that appear in this manual are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective holders The company and product names used in this manual are not accompanied by the registered trademark or trademark symbols and Revisions First edition October 1999 Fourth edition February 2001 Second edition February 2000 Fifth edition November 2003 6th Edition April 2008 YK Third edition June 2000 Sixth edition April 2008 All Rights Reserved Copyright 1999 Yokogawa Electric Corporation IM 04L02A01 01E i Protection of Environment Control of Pollution Caused by the Product For details see the Control of Pollution Caused by the Product IM04L01A01 92C Proper Disposal of This Product This is an explanation of how to dispose of this product based on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment WEEE Directive 2002 96 EC This directive is only valid in the EU Marking This product complies with the WEEE Directive 2002 96 EC marking requirement The affixed product label see below indicates that you must not discard this electrical electronic product in domestic household waste A gt i Product Category With reference to the equipment types in the WEEE directive Annex 1 this product is classified as a AgMonitoring and Control instrumentationAh product Do not dispose in domestic household waste To return unwant
398. the USER key The screen image is saved to the external storage medium File format Screen image data is in PNG format File name File names are automatically assigned Month date hour and minute when the screen image data were stored sequence number to screen image data files Mddhhmma PNG where M month 1 to 9 X 10 Y 11 Z 12 dd date hh hour mm minute a sequence number Note The sequence number of the file name is normally set to 0 However if the screen image data is saved twice within a minute for example then the file name of the two files will have sequence numbers 0 and 1 for the first and second files respectively The two files will have the same Mddhhmm month day hour minute section IM 04L02A01 01E 9 13 ejeq Bulzijeniuy pue saji4q Guibeuey el 9 7 Clearing Data from the Internal Memory Procedure Clears display data event data manual sampled data TLOG data option and report data option from the internal memory These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate position Press w Press soft key to display the Save Load Clear data menu screen Press Clear data soft key to display a confirmation window Selecting Yes and pressing the DISP ENTER key clears the data from the internal memory A No 9 14 IM 04L02A01 01E 9 8 Initializing Setup Data
399. the Upper Limit of the Normal Operating Temperature 50 C The replacement period varies depending on the temperature in which the instrument is operated and the instrument s specifications If the instrument is used in a 30 C environment it may be operational for 10 years or more The LCD replacement period indicates the half life of the brightness when the brightness is set to the factory default setting The half life is shortened as the brightness is set higher The deterioration of brightness varies depending on the condition of use and its determination is subjective Consider these facts for determining the actual replacement period The color of the LCD may become yellowish as time elapses The discoloration tends to progress faster as the brightness is set higher IM 04L02A01 01E 13 5 aoueUd UIeW Chapter 14 Specifications 14 1 Number of Inputs Scan Interval Inputs Input type Input Specifications DX204 four channels DX208 eight channels DX210 ten channels DX220 twenty channels DX230 thirty channels DX204 DX208 DX210 DX220 DX230 125 ms or 250 ms 1 s or 2 s 2s when an A D integration time is set to 100 ms Volt DC voltage TC thermocouple RTD resistance temperature detector DI digital input DC current with external shunt resistor attached Measuring range 20 00 to 20 00 mV 60 00 to 60 00 mV 200 0 to 200 0 mV 2 000 to 2 000 V 6 000 to
400. the access occurred 885 685 Time No Code Flag File Name Jan 61 2008 01 50 22 Jan 61 2008 61 58 22 Jan 61 2008 61 49 32 Jan 61 2088 61 48 51 Jan 61 2008 01 48 27 282 HOSTNAME 282 UNREACH P P P P 16161588 DDS 16161588 DDS 18181498 DDS File name 18181488 DDS DX_FTPC TXT FTP server P primary S secondary Error code Date and time when the file transfer was made Web operation 804 084 Time Jan 87 2081 61 19 12 Jan 87 2081 81 18 29 Jan 87 2081 01 18 15 Jan 87 2681 81 17 58 log Request No Parameter Message 155 2 stop Message 1 start Key UP Screen DIGITAL GROUP 1 Date time Type E mail log 1 t Operation Error code see chapter 12 885 085 Time Jan 07 2081 81 00 24 Jan 7 2081 61 60 01 Jan 87 2081 01 00 08 Jan 87 2081 88 59 53 Jan 06 2081 81 82 21 Type No Recipient Error Full 264 Time 1 HS Report 1 HS Report 1 HS Alarm 1 HS 1 2 Some recipients addresses are inv System screen See section 1 8 Recipient address Recipient No Error code see chapter 12 Date time Mail type 10 11 suonouny 19410 2 10 8 Setting the Memory Alarm Time F1 Option Provides an Relay Output Basic Setting Mode When the remaining time for storing the display or event data in the internal memory falls to the specified time Memory alarm during manual save an alarm is generated via e
401. the arrow keys to select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key to delete the selected file The file is cleared from the file list To cancel the delete operation select No and press the DISP ENTER key Note _____ If the ESC key is pressed in the middle of the operation the screen returns to the Save Load Clear Data menu IM 04L02A01 01E 9 9 eyeq Bulzijeniuy pue saji4 GuiBeuey el 9 5 Managing files Displaying free space on the external storage medium Deleting all the files in the directory 1 Of the directories listed in the Directory name column select the directory in which the files you wish to delete exist using the up and down arrow keys The File name column displays a list of files in the selected directory is the root directory 2 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays a confirmation dialog box 3 Use the arrow keys to select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key to delete all the files in the directory All files are cleared from the file list To cancel the delete operation select No and press the DISP ENTER key Not EOEOOEEO_O_E_EOXT_LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL If the ESC key is pressed in the middle of the operation the screen returns to the Save Load Clear Data menu Deleting a directory A directory can be deleted if there are no files in the directory To delete a directory that has files delete all the files in the directory first 1 Of the directories listed in the Directory name column select t
402. the bracket Panel Mounting Panel Screw temporarily Fix in place Case Mounting bracket Mounting bracket Panel Attachment screw In contact with each other zi Torque driver i flat blade Attachment screw Front The figure shows the case when the mounting brackets are used on the top and bottom of the case For panel cutout and external dimensions see section 14 8 External Dimensions 2 4 IM 04L02A01 01E 2 3 Input Signal Wiring This section describes the wiring of the input signal cables Read this section before wiring the cables CAUTION If a strong tension is applied to the cable wired to the DX200 the terminals of the DX200 and or the cable can be damaged In order to prevent tension from being applied directly on the terminals fasten all wiring cables to the rear of the mounting panel To prevent fire use signal wires having a temperature rating of 70 C or more Precautions to be taken while wiring Take the following precautions when wring the input signal cables It is recommended that crimp on lugs designed for 4 mm screws with insulation sleeves be used on the lead wire ends However this does not apply to the optional clamped terminals optional code H2 a a A i Crimp on lug Take measures to prevent noise from entering the measurement circuit Move the measurement circuit away from the power
403. the computation is stopped it is started with the START key 8 12 IM 04L02A01 01E 8 6 Acquiring Event Data This operation is performed when the type of data acquired is set to Event or E D For setting the data acquisition method see sections 8 10 and 8 11 Procedure During Free mode Start data acquisition To begin data acquisition press the START key The icon in the status display section will change accordingly icon GROUP 1 GROUP ae 20 43 00 GRO EVENT I Shor 2 16 C Stop data acquisition 1 Press the STOP key A confirmation window opens On models with the computation option the confirmation window displays the following choices Mem Math terminate acquisition and all computations Memory terminate acquisition and Cancel For models with the batch function BT1 option that has the batch function enabled see section 10 13 the batch information is also displayed S ECEN EC 2 Select Yes Mem Math or Memory for models with the computation function using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key to stop the data acquisition The icon in the status display section changes to a stop icon Note When the memory area becomes full or the number of files exceeds 16 existing data will be overwritten starting with the oldest data When a power disruption occurs the file is closed When the power resumes data are written to anew file e The START STOP operation also s
404. tion When the front cover is closed the DX200 checks whether or not an external storage medium is inserted in the drive Do not remove the storage medium while it is being accessed When the data save operation is finished remove the storage medium from the drive When the external storage medium does not have enough space Change the external storage medium to save the remaining data 1 The message Exchange media to continue the saving operation will be displayed Change the external storage medium and close the front cover The message Do you want to continue to save measured data will be displayed 2 Selecting Yes and pressing the DISP ENTER key saves the remaining data to the external storage medium Selecting No and pressing the DISP ENTER key does not save the remaining data Note The data saving operation is interrupted in five minutes after the message Exchange media to continue was displayed The message Memory save to media was interrupted will be displayed in this case The remaining data can be saved to the external storage medium by another manual save operation IM 04L02A01 01E 8 15 wnp n eBbe10jg jeus9 xq 0 Burnes pue uoljsinboy eead el 8 7 Saving the Data in the Internal Memory to the External Storage Medium Explanation Name of the directory to which to save the data For the setting procedure of the directory to which to save the data see section 8 9 Each time the stor
405. torage medium and make the settings effective Returns to the operation mode when loading is completed These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate position Press ew Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears Press soft key to display the Save Load Initialize menu screen Press soft key to display the Load settings screen pLoad settings File name Time TEST PNL 2000 01 01 82 05 1 A list of setup files in the storage medium appears Select the file to be loaded The extension of setup files is PNL To cancel the operation and return to the Save Load Initialize menu press the ESC key 2 Press the DISP ENTER key to load the file After loading the screen returns to the operation mode The loaded setup data take effect Note If the loaded data does not take effect refer to the error log For the procedure related to displaying the error log see section 10 7 IM 04L02A01 01E 9 2 Saving data in the internal memory to the external storage medium using key operation Procedure Explanation The following data in the internal storage memory are saved to the external storage medium using key operation Display data Event data Manual sampled data TLOG data option Report data option These procedures are carried out in the setting mode
406. ts the internal clock down to the nearest hour Example 10 hr 01 min 50 s becomes 10 hr 00 min 00 s 02 min 00 s to 57 min 59 s Time is unchanged 58 min 00 s to 59 min 59 s Adjusts the internal clock down to the nearest hour Example 10 hr 59 min 50 s becomes 11 hr 00 min 00 s Starts stops computation option Math Remote input Rising start falling stop Starts stops the computation This is valid only on models with the computation function M1 option If the computation is started applying a rising signal produces no effect If the computation is stopped applying a falling signal produces no effect Clears computed results option Math rst Remote input Trigger 250 ms or more Resets the data on all computation channels This is valid only on models with the computation function M1 option and while the computation is stopped For all other cases applying the remote signal produces no effect Manual sampling M sample Remote input Trigger 250 ms or more The instantaneous values of all measurement and computation channels excluding the measurement channels that are set to Skip and the computation channels that are turned Off can be stored to the internal memory 10 14 IM 04L02A01 01E 10 9 Setting the Remote Control Functions R1 Option Basic Setting Mode Loads the setup data Pnl1 load Pnl2 load Pnl3 load Remote input Trigger 250 ms or more The setup
407. tum computation data 8 bytes datum Event data Measurement data 2 bytes datum computation data 4 bytes datum Event data only Selectable from Free Trigger or Rotate Display data Event data Selectable from Trigger or Rotate The sampling length the maximum data length can be derived from the following equation Sampling length the maximum number of data points per channel x sampling interval Maximum number of data points per channel calculated from internal memory capacity types of data data size and number of measurement or computation channels data to be stored suoneoyioeds z IM 04L02A01 01E 14 5 14 3 Data Storage Specifications Internal memory capacity Data type Capacity of internal memory Display data only 1 2 MB Display data and event data Display data 0 9 MB Event data 0 3 MB Event data only 1 2 MB Maximum number of data points per channel that can be stored Data type Maximum number of data points per channel Display data only 1 200 000 bytes number of measurement channels x 4 number of computation channels x 8 Except the maximum number of data points is 100 000 Display data and event data Display data 900 000 bytes number of measurement channels x 4 number of computation channels x 8 Except the maximum number of data points is 75 000 Event data 300 000 bytes number of measurement channels x 2 number of computation channels x 4
408. uct is no longer produced IM 04L02A01 01E Checking the Contents of the Package NO Serial No When contacting the dealer from which you purchased the DX200 please quote the serial No Standard Accessories The following standard accessories are supplied with the DX200 Make sure that all items are present and undamaged 9 One of these power cord types is supplied according to the instrument s suffix code 10 Number Part Name Part Number Model Q ty Notes 1 Fuse A1423EF A1463EF 1 1 250 V 1 25 A time lag except for P1 model 250 V 6 3 A time lag for P1 model Terminal screw M4 Mounting bracket B9900BX For panel mounting except for H5 models User s Manual IM 04L02A01 01E This manual User s Manual IM 04L02A01 18E Fieldbus Communication Interface Provided only when CF1 is specified for the optional code Electronic Manual B9968MZ CD ROM containing the PDF files of DAQSTANDARD manual and the DX100 DX200 Communication Interface manual DAQSTANDARD DXA120 CD ROM containing the DAQSTANDARD External storage A1053MP medium A1056MP B9968NL 100 MB Zip disk included only when the suffix code for external storage medium is 2 250 MB Zip disk included only when the medium suffix code for external storage medium is 5 ATA flash memory card 32 MB CF card adapter capacity and model of the CF ca
409. uisition TLOG data data display section data formats of ASCII files oo eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Gata Ont x cisssscidsscepdesseriss tedvsienientstisidereedned data used in computation date and time 00 date and time entering comment daylight savings time eee eee eeeeeceetteeeeetteeeeeeeeeeneeeees 1 33 DO CUITONE EART EATE 1 3 DG Voltage NEA E E 1 2 IM 04L02A01 01E Index 1 DD Stith win eet eee Aan ea ta aaenee das te delay lower limit alarm ve delay upper limit alarm eee cece rneerre nennen deleting a directory eee cece eee eeereeeneeeneeeees 9 10 9 12 deleting files 9 9 9 12 difference eeen difference lower limit alarm difference upper limit alarm ssh digitalinputex i8 a hansen eda CigitaliSGree iz 5 so h ec ade eheetactenciaetenes he lacseehee eee eee digits of the scale values i dimensional drawings essessssssriesrirssrrierrrreerrrssrrrees directory Name iicrneiniiiiiiiaiieai ee ene directory name manual save cece eects eeeeeeeees 8 16 directory name saving data using key operation 9 5 display conditions of the LCD display data eee cece apa aeni aari esata niadse display direction bar graph display direction trend display reference position display update rate displayed color bar graph cece cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
410. umbers with a floppy disk drive with a Zip drive with an ATA flash memory card drive io 7 2A 1415 1816 17 16 17 16 17 Power switch Fuse Storage medium drive Floppy disk drive Zip drive or ATA flash memory card drive depending on the specification Eject button Access lamp for Zip drive Used when ejecting the storage medium Also is the access lamp for the Zip drive The access lamp is lit while the Zip disk is being accessed Access lamp for the floppy disk drive The access lamp is lit while the floppy disk is being accessed IM 04L02A01 01E 3 1 Names of Parts and Functions Rear Panel Desktop Type 6 2 1 Note1 1 Note2 amp bhem O Go e oO 3 7 3 RS 232 iegaense T T Fieldbus 5 e oe 4 e oO 3 0 PRE S l Note1 Panel mount type i 2 ss Desktop type with P1 Note2 Desktop type without P1 1 Power terminals and a protective ground terminal Connect the power cord and the protective ground cord 2 Ethernet port Connect the Ethernet cable 10Base T 3 Serial interface port C2 C3 option or fieldbus interface port CF1 option RS 232 port RS 422 485 port or FOUNDATION Fieldbus port depending on the specification Connect the interface cable 4 Input terminals Connect the input signal cable of th
411. urs when the measured value becomes smaller than or equal to the alarm value Delay upper limit alarm T An alarm occurs when the measured value remains above or equal to the alarm value for the specified time period delay period see section 6 3 Setting the Alarm Delay Period Delay lower limit alarm An alarm occurs when the measured value remains below or equal to the alarm value for the specified time period delay period see section 6 3 Setting the Alarm Delay Period 11 14 IM 04L02A01 01E 11 6 Setting Constants Procedure Explanation Total of 30 constants KO1 to K30 can be defined These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press w Press the soft key Next 1 2 To display the setting screen press the soft key a7 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Constant Select the constant you wish to set using the arrow keys Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter a value i
412. using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press ew To display the setting screen press the soft key Oon 1 1 First CH Last CH First CH Last CH Jer Jar jar Jar Tag Tag Tag Tag Filtr oving average E Iter MA 2 Count ott E Alarm Delay Alarm Delay ine 18 s tie 18 s The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels For the channels set here Tag and Alarm Delay Time are also simultaneously set Input Filter Setting for DX204 DX208 2 Filter Filter Select Off or set the time constant of the filter Moving Average Setting for DX210 DX220 DX230 3 Moving Average Count Select Off or set the number of data points for the moving average Note Regardless of this setting filter and moving average operations are not performed for the digital inputs DI Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key The following table shows the values Filter Moving Average Value Description Filter Off Do not use the filter 2s Filter time
413. uted data Channels assignable to computed data DX204 DX208 Up to 8 channels DX210 DX220 DX230 Up to 30 channels Operation General arithmetic operations Four arithmetic operations square root absolute common logarithm exponential power relational operations lt lt gt logical operations AND OR NOT XOR 14 12 IM 04L02A01 01E 14 6 SPECIFICATIONS OF OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS Constant Statistical operations Average maximum minimum summation and maximum minimum Special operations Rolling average moving average on computed results Available Up to 30 constants Digital input data via communication Remote input status Report functions TLOG data Digital data via communication can be used in calculation expression Up to 30 data Remote input status 0 1 can be used in calculation expression Up to 8 inputs Report type Hourly daily hourly daily daily monthly and daily weekly Operation Average maximum minimum and summation Data format ASCII Saves all measured computed data at the specified interval Cu10 Cu25 RTD Input 3 terminal isolated RTD Input N1 This option allows Cu10 and Cu25 inputs to be added to the standard input types A B b terminals are of isolated input type for DX210 DX220 and DX230 Input type Measuring range Cu10 GE Cu10 L amp N WEED RTD Cu10 measurement Cu10 BAILEY 200 to 300 C current i 1 2
414. ver Transition time for the LCD backlight saver and conditions that restore the backlight 5 Save Load Clear data operations 6 Time setting 7 Math set 1 8 Math set 2 9 Batch set 4 2 Color 7 8 4 3 Zone 7 9 Graph 7 10 Partial 7 11 4 4 View 7 13 LCD 7 14 IM 04L02A01 01E Foreword Thank you for purchasing the YOKOGAWA DAQSTATION DX200 This User s Manual contains useful information about the functions installation wiring operating procedures and troubleshooting of the DX200 To ensure correct use please read this manual thoroughly before operation Keep this manual in a safe place for quick reference in the event a question arises In addition a quick reference is provided on the previous page This reference briefly explains operations that are used frequently Separate this reference from the manual for use The following four manuals including this one are provided as manuals for the DX200 Manual Name Manual No Description DX200 User s Manual IM 04L02A01 01E This manual Explains all functions and procedures of the DX200 excluding the communication functions DX100 DX200 IM 04L02A01 17E Included in the accompanying CD ROM Communication Explains the communication functions of Interface User s Manual the Ethernet serial interface Fieldbus Communication IM 04L02A01 18E Explains the communication functions of Interface User s Manual the
415. verwritten if there is not enough free space on the external storage medium or if the storage medium is not inserted in the drive in the following cases When the number of display data files exceeds 16 A file is created for each auto save interval see section 8 8 When the event data are acquired to the internal memory in the free mode and the number of files exceeds 16 A file is created at specified acquisition periods data length see section 8 11 8 16 IM 04L02A01 01E 8 7 Saving the Data in the Internal Memory to the External Storage Medium Explanation Saving the data to the external storage medium using key operation during auto save mode This operation applies when the data acquisition of the display data or the data acquisition of event data in the free mode is in progress and the data storage to the storage medium is set to auto save The display data or event data can be saved to the external storage medium at arbitrary times The data acquisition to the internal memory continues even if this operation is carried out 1 Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu shown below Save Display When the type of data acquired to the internal memory is display data or display data and event data Save Event When the type of data acquired to the internal memory is event data and the free mode is set 1 For the setting procedure see section 8 11 2 The soft key is not displayed in the trigger or rotate mo
416. ving a temperature rating of 70 C or more Arrange the wires as shown below DX200 Current 24 VDC power supply terminal T E Transmitter Opr 7 Input terminal 1 Shunt resistor 250 ohms 1 Turn OFF the DX200 and remove the cover for the option terminal 2 Connect the 24 VDC power supply wires to the terminal The terminal arrangement for the 24 VDC power supply option is as follows Terminal Position Option terminal 3 TPS8 L A Option terminal 4 TPS4 TPS8 2 16 IM 04L02A01 01E 2 8 24 VDC Transmitter Power Supply Wiring TPS4 Tps8 Option TPS4 Option Terminal 4 7 TPS8 Option Terminal 3 7 Option Terminal 4 7 Note HS CE DE a8 gg E QS oozxa y Buisn 10J g D Use shielded wires to reduce the effects of noise Connect the shield to the ground terminal of the DX200 IM 04L02A01 01E 2 9 Power Supply Wiring For Panel Mount Type Precautions to Be Taken When Wiring the Power Supply To prevent electric shock and damage to the DX200 observe the following warnings A WARNING To prevent electric shock ensure the main power supply is turned OFF To prevent the possibility of fire use 600 V PVC insulated wire AWG18 or an equivalent wire for power wiring Mak
417. with numbers The procedures are given with the premise that the user is carrying out the steps for the first time Depending on the operation not all steps need to be taken Explanation This section describes the setting parameters and the limitations regarding the procedures It does not give a detailed explanation of the function For detail on the function see chapter 1 Revision History Edition Addition and change to functions 6 Added explanations Fixed explanations IM 04L02A01 01E ix Contents Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 FOr Word PP Ahi Hass ieaarl ais Aiding Ais beds asks Apa ATM eias eau Sis Aiea Safety PreCAutiOns garth eect etees eee eects inchs Gace ances a a Mic deans Checking the Contents of the Package ecccecceeeeece eeeeeeeeeeecneeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeseeeaeenieesiaeeeeeeeea How to Use this Manual ee cceeeeeeeen cece eeeeeeenee teense eeeae eee eeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeegneeeeeaeeeeeaeeesneeeeenaeenes Overview of Functions 1 1 Overview of the DX200 uo ecceececeeecneeeeee cee eeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeenieesiaeseneesaeeeneeeneeee 1 2 Functions of the Input Section oo ec ceeeeeee cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseneesaeeeaeeeneetiaeeeeeenias 1 3 Display FUNCION 2ccise cocies sania ee hehe ete dec a a ee Pat daha ee T4 Storage RUNCtION cocer a eg teaeed Gaawa caghlavane aa a aE 1 5 Alarm FUNCHON inen ite eh nina a a ah bee hu ae 1 6 Computation Fun
418. wn below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Application name Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter the application name Enter the application name up to 16 characters and press the DISP ENTER key Procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 IM 04L02A01 01E 10 19 suonouny 19410 2 10 12 Setting the Batch Information BT1 Option 2 Note The lot number after 9999 is 0 Supervisor name Enter the supervisor name up to 16 characters using the same method as step 1 Manager name Enter the manager name up to 16 characters using the same method as step 1 Batch number Enter the batch number up to 16 characters using the same method as step 1 Lot number Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter the lot number Enter the lot number 0 9999 and press the DISP ENTER key Procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 Auto increment Automatic increment of the lot number Set whether or not to automatically increment the lot number to the next lot number when the data acquisition to the internal memory is complete On Automatically increment the lot number when the data acquisition is complete Off Do not change the lot number Disp information Displayed in
419. xpanded display 7 12 Use Not use batch function for models with BT1 10 13 Time zone 10 16 Time difference from GMT End End 3 6 Terminate operations in the basic setting mode See the DX100 DX200 Communication Interface User s Manual IM 04L02A01 17E 3 18 IM 04L02A01 01E 3 6 Common Key Operations This section describes common key operations that are used often Soft keys Arrow keys OD O O OGOOGO Ga Character number input keys DISP ENTER key Key operations in the basic setting mode Procedure Entering the basic setting mode 1 Press the MENU key to enter the setting mode 2 Hold the FUNC key down for three seconds to enter the basic setting mode 3 Press the soft key to enter individual setting screens Note Basic setting mode cannot be entered while data acquisition or computation is in progress or the storage medium is being accessed Stop data acquisition and computation first before entering the basic setting mode Changing and storing the data acquiring method in the basic setting mode Memory and Memory and trend under the 2 menu clears the measured computed data in the internal memory Make sure to save the data to the external storage medium before entering the basic setting mode Common key operations in the basic setting mode are described Alarm A D Temperature r Alarm A D Ref lash Of
420. y If you are using a model with the optional alarm output relay AR1 AR2 A3 A4 or A5 a contact signal can be generated according to the alarm conditions For the procedure related to setting the alarm output relay see section 6 2 Alarm Setting The following functions can be specified on the alarm output relay For details see section 6 4 When multiple alarms are set to one alarm output relay notify the succeeding alarms after the first alarm that causes the relay operation reflash alarm function When multiple alarms are set to one alarm output relay operate the relay when all specified alarms are active AND function Energize or de energize the alarm output relay when the alarm occurs energize de energize function of the output relay When the alarm changes from the ON state to the OFF state return to normal condition turn OFF the output relay with an alarm ACK operation output relay hold function 1 24 IM 04L02A01 01E 1 6 Computation Function and Report Function M1 Option Computing equations are assigned to channels that are dedicated to performing computations Displaying computation channels and acquiring computed data can be carried out in the same manner as in the measurement channels The computation is performed every scan interval For detail see sections 11 1 and 11 2 Computation channels Model Channel DX204 DX208 DX210 DX220 DX230 Channels 31
421. y Write and Set soft keys are displayed Write Set Displaying a message on the trend screen Writing a message to the internal memory 3 Press the Write soft key Eight soft keys for the messages and a window containing a list of messages are displayed 4 Press the soft key corresponding to the message you wish to display A message mark time and the message are displayed on the trend display Changing message strings 3 Press the Set soft key The Message1 to Message3 soft keys and a window containing a list of messages are displayed 4 Press the soft key of the message to be changed A window to enter a message string appears ai Nessagel Nessage2 Hessage3 5 Enter the message string up to 16 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER key The window used to enter the message string disappears For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Character on page 3 22 6 Press the FUNC key or the ESC key to erase the window Ae dsiq oy Buiyesodo pue Buras Operation using the USER key The operating procedure is the same as for models without the batch function BT1 option IM 04L02A01 01E 7 5 7 4 Using Message Strings Trend Explanation Message Display Message mark Massage entering time Massage Displayed colors of the message The message colors on the trend screen are shown below They cannot be changed Message Numbe
422. y is used the position will be shifted When the trend is displayed horizontally the number of characters that can be displayed is up to 4 1 800 0 200 Bar base position normal right edge 4 Bar base position normal left edge 1 400 8 600 Bar base position Cn center a 1 400 0 600 IM 04L02A01 01E 7 19 Ae dsiq oy Buiyesodo pue Buras 7 11 Using Partial Expanded Display Trend Procedure By compressing a section of the display scale of the measured computed data the remaining section of the display is expanded For detail see section 1 3 To use the partial expanded display first set the partial expanded display to Use in the basic setting mode This will display a partial expanded display setting box in the setting mode see section 7 12 These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press w Press the soft key Oom Setting on a measurement channel To display the setting screen press the soft key 3 To display the setting screen press the soft key 6
423. y section disappears Note When the computation is stopped the computed data of the computation channel is held at the value that existed immediately before If data are being written to the internal memory the value held is written Resetting the computation This is executable only when the computation is suspended Data from all computation channels are cleared Procedure Operation using the FUNC key 1 Pressing the FUNC key displays the soft key menu The Math RESET soft key is displayed only when the computation is suspended 2 Pressing the Math RESET soft key clears the data from all computation channels Nath reset Operation using the USER key The operation is for when the reset function of computation is assigned to the USER key 1 Press the USER key to reset the computation data of all computation channels Clearing the computation dropout display When a computation data dropout occurs during computation the computation icon displayed in the status display section turns yellow The computation icon will return to a white color once the computation data dropout has been acknowledged Computation icon Procedure 1 Pressing the FUNC key displays the soft key menu The Math ACK soft key is displayed only when a computation data dropout occurs 2 Pressing the Math ACK soft key causes the yellow computation icon in the status display section to return to a white color Explanation Computation data dr
424. yaa Model DX204 DX208 DX210 DX220 DX230 pees DAQSTATION DX200 ET vigilantplant 4bL2A10 1 60 6 YOKOGAWA Le eae Yokogawa Electric Corporation uonesodioy 9190 9 emeHoyo VWMV5DONOA uonipa us 3 0 L0YZOTYO INI skep 9 xosdde yj6ue Buijdwues sep eeg skep gg shep Ly s 009 s 0ZL soe sg YEE u9 Ss swoos ucty sw Gel s yeasaquy Budwes MO 8q jqe y u SON eA y JO y jayewxoidde s ezep uano y pue eyep Aejdsip y y0q Bunnboe usym eyep uaaa y JO Y HUE Bulj dwes y sj uuLyo pu wanse w JNO wo AjUO gyep puana y Buninboy uayM s ep yO skep 9 y skep po skep zg skep pe shepg ypy YO xodde yua Suidwes ooz O8r oZ 09 or OL z gO y4 0L uv YUL uwog UW OZ UWS UW Sg 3y ajJepdy edsa s emau Buljdwes mojaq jqe y u s njean au JO p E jayewxoidde s eyep juana y pue eyep Aejdsip ay y0q Buninboe usym geep Aejds p y 10 y Bua Buijdwes y S UUBYO yu wanse w JNO wo AjUO gyep Aejdsip y Buninboy uayM e eq u43 pue geq Aejdsig 10 y Hua Buijdwes pue jeasa uy Burdwes u3 19S uoesado 934 S 0 Ady moe 19 10 y umop dn ay SS ld u3 19S uol e1ado y JO nu w u 319S ay ejds p 0 Aey YILNJ dSIA 24 SS Id su 19 5 uoeiado BulyoyiMs Aeldsiq usas9S y Pu 1L eous H Hewwuns Kowa w Hewwns ebessay Mewwns wiejy uonewojuj ydeb seg jey6iq puas su 195 uoeado JL0 LOVZ071 0 NI J
425. ys and press the DISP ENTER key Explanation Actions that can be assigned The initial setting is AlarmACK Soft Key Ref section Action None No operation Trigger 8 6 Provides a key trigger for starting acquiring the event data when Key Trigger is set as a trigger to start acquiring event data see section 8 11 AlarmACK 6 1 Release alarm indication and relay output when alarm display and alarm output relay action is set to hold see section 6 4 Math 11 3 Starts stops computation when the computation function M1 is equipped Math rst 11 3 Clears computed results when the computation function M1 is equipped and the computation is suspended M sample 8 13 Stores instantaneous values of all channels to the internal memory Message 1 to 8 7 4 Displays messages and stores them to the internal memory Snapshot 9 6 Save the screen image data to the storage medium Snapshot works in all modes Other actions work in the operation mode or the setting mode 10 2 IM 04L02A01 01E 10 3 Using Key Lock Key lock is a function used to prevent key operations Zip disk removal and saving data to the external storage medium in the manual save mode To release a key lock you must enter a password The key lock ON OFF condition is retained even if the power is turned OFF Thus the next time the power is turned ON the preexisting state is restored Key lock is set in the basic setting mode

DAQSTATION DX200 User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents